JP2019103636A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To prevent reduction in the performance effect in a case of executing the change performance.SOLUTION: A game machine can execute the performance of changing the display mode of the specific display to the second mode having the high advantageous degree (for example, blue-color holding or red-color holding) after displaying the specific display (for example, holding display) in the first mode (for example, special holding) as the change performance (for example, holding notice performance followed by the action performance), and can execute the performance of changing the display mode of the specific display to the third mode (for example, normal holding) in a case where the display mode of the specific display is not changed to the second mode after displaying the specific display in the first mode as the change performance. The ratio of changing the display mode of the specific display to the third mode is low in a prescribed period (for example, a period in which the holding display of the notice target is displayed at the fourth or third position).SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 41

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine.

  As a game machine, when a game ball is shot into a game area by a launch device as a game medium, and the game ball wins in a prize area such as a prize port provided in the game area, a predetermined prize value is given to the player There is one that has been configured. Furthermore, a variable display means capable of variably displaying (also referred to as "variation") identification information is provided, and a predetermined game value is obtained when the display result of the variable display of identification information in the variable display means is a specific display result There is one configured to give the player a player (so-called pachinko machine).

  The prize value is to pay out a prize ball or to give a score or a prize according to the winning of the game ball to the prize area. In addition, with the game value, when the specific display result is obtained, the state of the variable winning ball device provided in the game area of the game machine is in an advantageous state for the player who is easy to hit the ball, It is to generate the right to be in an advantageous state, and to be in a state where it becomes easy to establish the conditions for award ball payout.

  In a pachinko gaming machine, a specific display mode defined in advance is derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display of the special symbol (identification information) which is started in the variable display means based on the game ball having won the start winning opening. When it is done, a "big hit (favorable condition)" occurs. In addition, derivation | leading-out display is making a symbol stop display. When a big hit occurs, for example, the big winning opening is opened a predetermined number of times, and a transition is made to a big hit gaming state in which a hit ball tends to be won. Then, in each open period, when there is a winning to a predetermined number (for example, 10) of the large winning openings, the large winning openings are closed. The number of times of opening the special winning opening is fixed to a predetermined number of times (for example, 16 rounds). Note that an open time (for example, 29 seconds) is determined for each open, and even if the number of winnings does not reach a predetermined number, the special winning opening is closed when the open time elapses. Hereinafter, the opening period of each big winning opening may be referred to as a round.

  Among such gaming machines, there is a gaming machine configured to be able to display a specific display corresponding to a variable display, and to be able to execute change effects for changing a display mode of the specific display. For example, in Patent Document 1, a specific display (for example, a hold display) is displayed in a special mode that suggests that the display mode changes, and a change effect of a white arrow flying is performed, and a white arrow is displayed in the specific display. It is described that the special mode is changed to the special mode if it is pierced, and the special mode is displayed as it is unless the white arrow is pierced in the specific display.

JP, 2014-168556, A (paragraph 0365-0368, FIG. 43)

  However, in the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, when the specific display does not change from the special mode to the special mode, the special mode is displayed as it is, and there is a risk that the rendering effect in the case of executing the change effect may be reduced. .

  Then, an object of this invention is to provide the game machine which can prevent the fall of the presentation effect at the time of performing change presentation.

(Means 1) The gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine capable of performing variable display, and is a specific display capable of displaying a specific display (for example, a hold display, which may be an active display) corresponding to the variable display. Change presentation that changes the display mode of the specific display after the specific display is displayed by means (for example, the first hold storage display unit 9a, the second hold storage display unit 9b) and the first mode (for example, special hold) (For example, a part that executes steps S800A, S8004 to S8010, and S8106 to S8114 in the microcomputer 100 for effect control) capable of executing (for example, pending announcement effect with action effect) The execution means, after displaying the specific display according to the first aspect as the change effect, displays the display mode of the specific display in a second aspect (for example, a high degree of advantage) It is possible to execute an effect of changing to blue hold or red hold) (for example, change patterns 33 to 36 shown in FIGS. 40 (D) and (E) and change patterns 405 to 45 shown in FIGS. 41 (G) to (I) In the case where the display mode of the specific display is not changed to the second mode after displaying the specific display according to the first mode as the change effect, together with the suspension notice effect based on S414 is executable) It is possible to execute an effect of changing the mode to the third mode (for example, normal retention) (for example, based on change patterns 31 and 32 shown in FIG. 40C and change patterns 401 to 404 shown in FIG. During the predetermined period, the rate at which the display mode of the specific display is changed to the third mode is low (for example, the fourth and the three suspension displays for the notice object). In the period displayed in the position of, it is difficult to change the hold display of the notice target from special hold to normal hold, even if the hold display of the notice target does not change from special hold to normal hold at all. Furthermore, a first indication that the display size is the first size (FIG. 78 (a)), as an indication indicating the expectation of control to an advantageous state (big hit gaming state etc.) advantageous to the player. And the second suggested display (the second size display shown in FIG. 78 (d)) and the second suggested display whose display size is the second size Provided with display means (microcomputer 90100 for effect control, effect display device 909 etc.) capable of displaying the display by reach title image 9095 etc.) The row has a plurality of different types of elements (element E 901 (banana), element E 902 (melon), element E 903 (apple), element E 904 (watermelon), element E 905 (strawberry) shown in FIG. 78 (a), (d). And the like) can be displayed (the fruit pattern etc. shown in FIG. 78 (a), (d)) can be displayed, and the first indication display and the second indication display in the pattern including the specific image Even when any is displayed, a plurality of elements are displayed so as to be included in both the first indication display and the second indication indication (shutter image 9094 shown in FIGS. 78 (a) and (d), reach title Display so that elements E901 to E905 are included in any of the images 9095, etc.). According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a drop in the rendering effect when executing the change rendering. In addition, the specific image can be suitably displayed regardless of the display size of the suggestion display. This makes it possible to accurately convey that a specific image has been displayed.

(Means 2) In the means 1, the change presentation executing means may be configured to display the specific display in the normal mode as the first mode. According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a drop in the rendering effect when executing the change rendering.

(Means 3) In the means 1, the change presentation performing means may be configured to display the specific display in a special mode different from the normal mode as the first mode. According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a drop in the rendering effect when executing the change rendering.

(Means 4) In any of the means 1 to the means 3, the change presentation executing means can execute the change presentation including the action presentation performed by the aspect acting on the specific display displayed in the first aspect, The effect presentation may be configured to be able to be performed a plurality of times with respect to the specific display displayed according to the first aspect of the present invention. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the rendering effect when executing the change rendering.

(Means 5) In any of the means 1 to 4, when the display mode of the specific display displayed in the third mode changes to the second mode, the display of the specific display displayed in the first mode It may be configured such that the degree of advantage is higher than when the aspect changes to the second aspect. According to such a configuration, the sense of expectation for the specific display displayed in the third aspect can be enhanced.

(Means 6) Any of the means 1 to 5 may be configured to include limiting means for limiting the number of specific displays displayed according to the third aspect. According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a drop in interest for the game when the change effect is executed.

(Means 7) In any one of means 1 to 6, the specific display means includes at least the normal mode, the first specific mode having a higher degree of expectation than the normal mode, and the second specific mode indicating the content of the effect And an effect executing means capable of executing the effect of the content suggested by the specific indication of the second specific aspect, the specific display means being the second specific aspect When the effect of the content suggested by the specific indication of the second specific aspect is executed after displaying the specific indication by the display mode of the specific indication can be changed from the second specific aspect to the first specific aspect May be configured. According to such a configuration, the sense of expectation for the specific aspect can be enhanced.

  Moreover, the invention which concerns on the following (means 8)-(means 16) is included in the form for implementing invention mentioned later. Conventionally, in a gaming machine, a specific image configured to include a plurality of types of elements having a high expectation of a big hit as a suggested indication that suggests a big hit expectation, as disclosed in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2013-17598. There was something to display. However, in the above-described gaming machine, when it is intended to display a plurality of types of elements in the specific image, there is a possibility that the specific image can not be suitably displayed due to the display size of the suggestion display. In view of this point, there is a demand for a game machine capable of suitably displaying a specific image regardless of the display size of the suggestion display.

In order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine of (means 8) according to another aspect is:
(Means 8) A display that can be controlled to a game machine (such as a pachinko game machine 901) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (such as a big hit gaming state) advantageous to the player, and displayed as a suggestion display that suggests the degree of control to the advantageous state. The first suggested display (the display by the shutter image 9094 of the first size displayed at the time of the shutter effect shown in FIG. 78A) whose size is the first size and the second suggested display (the display size is the second size) 78 is provided with display means (microcomputer 90100 for effect control, effect display device 909, etc.) capable of displaying the display by reach title image 9095 etc. of the second size displayed at the time of reach title effect shown in FIG. The means includes a plurality of types of elements having different aspects (element E 901 (banana), element E 902 (melon), element E 903 (elements E 903 (elements) shown in FIGS. 78A and 78D)). A specific image (such as a fruit pattern shown in FIGS. 78 (a) and (d)) including an element E904 (watermelon) and an element E905 (strawberry) can be displayed, and includes the specific image When any of the first indication display and the second indication indication is displayed in the pattern, a plurality of elements are displayed so as to be included in both the first indication indication and the second indication indication (FIG. 78 (a And E) display so that elements E901 to E905 are included in any of the shutter image 9094 and the reach title image 9095 shown in (d).

  According to such a configuration, the specific image can be suitably displayed regardless of the display size of the suggestion display. This makes it possible to accurately convey that a specific image has been displayed.

(Means 9) In means 8, the display means changes and displays the display sizes of the plurality of types of elements constituting the specific image in accordance with the difference in display size between the first suggestion display and the second suggestion display The display sizes of the elements E901 to E905 shown in 78 (a) and (d) are changed according to the display size difference between the shutter image 9094 and the reach title image 9095, and the like.

  According to such a configuration, the specific image can be suitably displayed regardless of the display size of the suggestion display. This makes it possible to accurately convey that a specific image has been displayed.

(Means 10) In means 8 or 9, all of the plurality of types of elements are displayed so as to fall within each of the first indication display and the second indication indication (elements E901 to E shown in FIGS. 78 (a) and (d)). Display all E905 so as to fit in the shutter image 9094 and the reach title image 9095, respectively.

  According to such a configuration, the specific image can be suitably displayed regardless of the display size of the suggestion display. This makes it possible to accurately convey that a specific image has been displayed.

(Means 11) In any one of means 8 to 10, when any of the first suggestion display and the second suggestion display is displayed in a pattern including a specific image, notifying means capable of executing predetermined common notification The speakers 9027L and 9027R, the lamp for effect, the shutter effect shown in FIG. 79, the notification for outputting the common sound (melody) by the speakers 9027L and 9027R in the reach title effect, and the notification by light emission of the lamp for effect etc. Prepare.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to accurately convey that the specific image has been displayed by the predetermined common notification.

(Means 12) In means 11, the notifying means outputs a predetermined common sound (such as melody shown in FIG. 79) as the predetermined common notification, and when the second indication is displayed, the output of the predetermined common sound After that, when the first suggested display is displayed, a specific sound (such as a voice shown in FIG. 79) not to be output is further output (as shown in FIG. 79). Output etc.

  According to such a configuration, when the second indication is displayed, it can be accurately transmitted that the specific image has been displayed.

(Means 13) In any of the means 8 to the means 12, the display means displays the display size of the first suggestion display larger than the display size of the second suggestion display (the shutter image 9094 shown in FIG. 78A). The display size is displayed larger than the display size of the reach title image 9095 shown in FIG.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to pay attention to the difference in display size of the suggestion display.

(Means 14) In any one of means 8 to 13, the display means displays the first suggestion display and the second suggestion display at different timings (a shutter image 9094 shown in FIG. 78 (a) The reach title image 9095 shown in) is displayed at different timings etc.).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the specific image from being obscured by overlapping execution timings.

(Means 15) In any one of means 8 to 14, when displaying any of the first indication display and the second indication display in the pattern including the specific image, a plurality of types of the specific image are displayed. A predetermined operation (scrolling display etc.) is caused to the elements of (as shown in the modification, the elements E901 to E905 are displayed by scrolling in the image display area in any of the shutter image 9094 and the reach title image 9095). Make all of them visible.

  According to such a configuration, a plurality of types of elements constituting a specific image can be displayed in a recognizable manner.

(Means 16) In any one of means 8 to 15, the display means includes a pattern in which only one element is displayed among a plurality of types of elements constituting a specific image (only an apple as shown in the modification) May contain a pattern to be displayed).

  According to such a configuration, since the pattern for displaying the image is increased, the interest can be improved.

It is the front view which saw the pachinko game machine from the front. It is a block diagram showing an example of circuit composition of a game control board (main board). It is a block diagram showing an example of circuit composition of a production control board, a lamp driver board, and an audio output board. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing which CPU in a main board | substrate performs. It is a flowchart which shows 4 ms timer interruption processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the fluctuation pattern of the production | presentation symbol prepared beforehand. It is explanatory drawing which shows each random number. It is explanatory drawing which shows a big hit determination table, a small hit determination table, and a big hit classification determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the fluctuation pattern classification determination table for big hit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the change pattern classification determination table for loss. It is an explanatory view showing a hit change pattern judging table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a loss change pattern determination table. It is an explanatory view showing an example of contents of an effect control command. It is an explanatory view showing an example of contents of an effect control command. It is an explanatory view showing an example of contents of a symbol specification command. It is an explanatory view showing an example of the contents of a change category command. It is an explanatory view showing an example of the contents of a change category command. It is a flow chart which shows an example of a program of special symbol process processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of a program of special symbol process processing. It is a flow chart which shows starting opening switch passage processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of a pending | holding storage buffer. It is a flow chart which shows production processing at the time of winning. It is a flow chart which shows special symbol normal processing. It is a flow chart which shows special symbol normal processing. It is a flow chart which shows change pattern setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows a display result designation command transmission process. It is a flow chart which shows processing during special symbol change. It is a flow chart which shows special symbol stop processing. It is a flow chart which shows big hit end processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of a program of special symbol display control processing. It is a flowchart which shows production control main processing which CPU for production control performs. It is an explanatory view showing an example of composition of a command receiving buffer. It is a flow chart which shows command analysis processing. It is a flow chart which shows command analysis processing. It is a flow chart which shows command analysis processing. It is a flowchart which shows production control process processing. It is a flow chart which shows a reservation notice production setting processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of a final display mode determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of a final display mode determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of a change pattern determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of a change pattern determination table. It is a flow chart which shows change pattern command reception waiting processing. It is a flowchart which shows production design fluctuation start processing. It is an explanatory view showing an example of a stop design of a production design. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of an effect presentation determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of an effect presentation determination table. It is an explanatory view showing the example of composition of process data. It is a flow chart which shows processing during production design variation. It is a flowchart which shows production design fluctuation stop processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the production | presentation aspect of pending | preceding advance production. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the production | presentation aspect of pending | preceding advance production. FIG. 18 is an explanatory view showing an example of an effect mode of the suspension notice effect in the modification 1; FIG. 18 is an explanatory view showing an example of an effect mode of the suspension notice effect in the modification 2; It is a flow chart which shows a reservation notice production setting processing in a 2nd embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the final display mode determination table in 2nd Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the final display mode determination table in 2nd Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the change pattern determination table in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the pending | holding display control processing in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the pending | holding display control processing in 3rd Embodiment. (A) is explanatory drawing which shows a pending | holding change pattern determination table, (B) is explanatory drawing which shows the selection ratio of red pending | holding. It is explanatory drawing which shows a change timing determination lottery table. (A) is an explanatory view showing a first special suggestion execution lottery table, (B) is an explanatory view showing a second special suggestion execution lottery table, and (C) is an explanatory view showing a pseudo continuous suggestion execution lottery table (D) is an explanatory view showing an SP suggested execution lottery table. It is a flow chart which shows processing during production design variation in a 3rd embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a display in the case of displaying a pending | holding display in the 2nd special suggestion mode in 3rd Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a display in the case of displaying a pending | holding display in the 2nd special suggestion mode in 3rd Embodiment. It is the front view which saw the pachinko game machine from the front. It is a figure showing a hit classification table. FIG. 5 is a block diagram showing an example of a circuit configuration of a main board (game control board). It is explanatory drawing which shows each random number. It is explanatory drawing which shows a big hit determination table and a big hit classification determination table. It is a figure which shows the change pattern table used in order to determine a change pattern in a tabular form. It is an explanatory view showing an example of contents of an effect control command. It is a flowchart which shows timer interruption processing. It is a flow chart which shows special symbol process processing. It is a flow chart which shows production control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows production control process processing. It is a flowchart which shows production design fluctuation start processing. It is a display screen figure when a shutter production and a reach title production are performed. It is a timing chart which shows sound output timing and lamp emission timing for effects. It is explanatory drawing which shows a fruit pattern execution determination table. It is a flowchart which shows an effect setting process.

Embodiment 1
Hereinafter, a first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of a pachinko gaming machine 1 which is an example of a gaming machine will be described. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 viewed from the front.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 is configured of an outer frame (not shown) formed in a vertically-long rectangular shape and a game frame attached to the inside of the outer frame so as to be openable and closable. In addition, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a glass door frame 2 formed in a frame shape provided so as to be openable and closable in the game frame. The play frame is a front frame (not shown) installed openably and closably to the outer frame, a mechanism board (not shown) to which mechanism parts and the like are attached, and various parts attached to them (a game to be described later And the board 6).

  On the lower surface of the glass door frame 2, there is a hitting ball supply plate (upper plate) 3. At the lower part of the bat supply tray 3, there are provided a surplus ball tray 4 for storing gaming balls which can not be accommodated in the bat supply tray 3, and a bat operating handle (operation knob) 5 for firing a bat. In addition, on the back of the glass door frame 2, the game board 6 is detachably attached. The game board 6 is a structure including a plate-like body that constitutes the game board and various components attached to the plate-like body. Further, on the front surface of the game board 6, there is formed a game area 7 in which the shot game balls can flow down.

  The member forming the surplus ball tray (lower plate) 4 is formed in a stick shape (rod shape) at a predetermined position on the front side of the upper surface of the lower plate main body (for example, the central portion of the lower plate). There is attached a stick controller 122 capable of holding and tilting in a plurality of directions (front and rear, left and right). In the stick controller 122, the player holds the operating stick of the stick controller 122 with an operating hand (for example, the left hand), and performs predetermined operations by pushing and pulling with a predetermined operating finger (for example, forefinger). A trigger button 121 (see FIG. 3) which can perform an instruction operation is provided, and a trigger sensor 125 (see FIG. 3) that detects a predetermined instruction operation by pushing and pulling the trigger button 121 3) is built-in. In addition, a tilting direction sensor unit 123 (see FIG. 3) for detecting a tilting operation on the operating rod is provided in the lower main body inside the lower portion of the stick controller 122 or the like. Also, the stick controller 122 incorporates a vibrator motor 126 (see FIG. 3) for vibrating the stick controller 122.

  On the member forming the hitting ball supply plate (upper plate) 3, the player performs a predetermined instruction operation, for example, by pressing the predetermined position on the front side of the upper surface of the upper plate body (for example, above the stick controller 122). A possible push button 120 is provided. The push button 120 may be configured to be able to mechanically, electrically or electromagnetically detect a predetermined instruction operation by a player or the like. A push sensor 124 (see FIG. 3) for detecting the operation of the player performed on the push button 120 may be provided inside the body of the upper tray at the installation position of the push button 120 or the like. In the configuration example shown in FIG. 1, the mounting positions of the push button 120 and the stick controller 122 are in the upper and lower positional relationship in the central portion of the upper and lower dishes. On the other hand, the mounting positions of the push button 120 and the stick controller 122 may be shifted to either the left or the right in the upper and lower plates while maintaining the upper and lower positional relationship. Alternatively, the mounting positions of the push button 120 and the stick controller 122 may not be in the vertical positional relationship, and may be in the horizontal positional relationship, for example.

  Near the center of the game area 7, an effect display device 9 configured of a liquid crystal display (LCD) is provided. The display screen of the effect display device 9 has an effect symbol display area for performing variable display of the effect symbol synchronized with the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Thus, the effect display device 9 corresponds to a variable display device that performs variable display of the effect symbol. In the effect symbol display area, there are symbol display areas for variably displaying effect symbols for three decorations (for effect), for example, “left”, “middle” and “right”. There are symbol display areas of “left”, “middle” and “right” in the symbol display area, but the position of the symbol display area may not be fixed on the display screen of the effect display device 9, and the symbol Three areas of the display area may be separated. The effect display device 9 is controlled by the effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board. When the variable display of the first special symbol is executed by the first special symbol display 8a, the effect control microcomputer causes the effect display 9 to execute the effect display along with the variable display, and the second special symbol is displayed. When the variable display of the second special symbol is executed by the symbol display 8b, the effect display is performed by the effect display device 9 along with the variable display, so it is possible to easily grasp the progress of the game .

  Further, in the effect display device 9, symbols other than the symbol to be the final stop symbol (for example, middle symbol among left and right middle symbols) continue for a predetermined time, and the big hit symbol (for example, left middle right symbol is aligned with the same symbol) Stop, swing, scale, shrink or deform in a state that matches the symbol combination), or multiple symbols change synchronously with the same symbol, or the positions of the display symbols are changed An effect performed in a state where the possibility of the occurrence of a big hit continues before the final result is displayed (hereinafter, these states are referred to as a reach state) is called reach effect. In addition, reach state and the appearance are called reach mode. Furthermore, variable display including reach production is called reach variable display. Then, when the display result of the symbol variably displayed on the effect display device 9 is not a big hit symbol, it becomes "off", and the variation display state is ended. A player plays while enjoying how to generate a big hit.

  In the upper right portion of the display screen of the effect display device 9, fourth symbol display areas 9c and 9d are provided which display a fourth symbol following the effect symbol, the special symbol to be described later, and the normal symbol. In this embodiment, the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol, in which the variation display of the fourth symbol for the first special symbol is performed in synchronization with the variation display of the first special symbol to be described later, and the second A fourth symbol display area 9d for the second special symbol is provided in which the variation display of the fourth symbol for the second special symbol is performed in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol.

  The fourth symbol for the first special symbol and the fourth symbol for the second special symbol may be generically referred to as the fourth symbol, and the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol and the second special The fourth symbol display area 9d for symbols may be collectively referred to as a fourth symbol display area.

  Variation of the fourth symbol (variable display) is realized by continuing turning on and off of the fourth symbol display areas 9c and 9d with a predetermined display color (for example, blue) at predetermined time intervals. . The variable display of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display 8a and the variable display of the fourth symbol for the first special symbol in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol are synchronized. The variable display of the second special symbol in the second special symbol display 8b and the variable display of the fourth symbol for the second special symbol in the fourth symbol display area 9d for the second special symbol are synchronized. Synchronization means that the start point and the end point of the variable display are the same and the period of the variable display is the same.

  On the right of the effect display device 9, a first special symbol display (first variable display unit) 8a for variably displaying a first special symbol as identification information is provided. In this embodiment, the first special symbol display 8a is realized by a simple and small display (for example, 7-segment LED) capable of variably displaying the numbers 0-9. That is, the first special symbol display 8a is configured to variably display the numbers 0 to 9 (or symbols). Also, a second special symbol display (second variable display unit) 8b that variably displays a second special symbol as identification information on the right side of the effect display device 9 (next to the right of the first special symbol display 8a) Is also provided. The second special symbol display 8b is realized by a simple and small display (for example, 7-segment LED) capable of variably displaying the numbers 0-9. That is, the second special symbol display 8b is configured to variably display the numbers 0 to 9 (or symbols).

  The small display is formed, for example, in a square shape. Moreover, in this embodiment, although the kind of 1st special symbol and the kind of 2nd special symbol are the same (for example, both numbers of 0-9), kinds may differ. The first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b may be configured to variably display, for example, numbers 00 to 99 (or two-digit symbols).

  Hereinafter, the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be collectively referred to as a special symbol, and the first special symbol indicator 8a and the second special symbol indicator 8b are generically referred to as a special symbol indicator (variable indicator) There is something to do.

  Although this embodiment shows the case where the two special symbol displays 8a and 8b are provided, the gaming machine may have only one special symbol display.

  The variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is the first start condition or the second start condition which is the execution condition of the variable display (for example, the game ball is the first start winning opening 13 or the second starting winning opening After having passed 14 (including winnings), the variable display start condition (for example, when the number of reserved memories is not 0, variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is not executed It is a state, and it is started based on the state where the big hit game is not executed) being established, and when the variable display time (variation time) passes, the display result (stop symbol) is derived and displayed. The game ball passing means that the game ball has passed through an area previously defined as a winning area such as a winning opening or a gate, and the concept including that the gaming ball is in the winning opening (winning) It is. Furthermore, deriving and displaying a display result means to stop and display a symbol (example of identification information).

  Below the effect display device 9, a winning device having a first start winning hole 13 is provided. The game ball that has won the first start winning opening 13 is guided to the back of the game board 6 and is detected by the first start opening switch 13a.

  Further, below the winning device having the first start winning opening (first starting opening) 13, a variable winning ball device 15 having a second starting winning opening 14 capable of winning a game ball is provided. The game ball that has won the second starting winning opening (second starting opening) 14 is guided to the back of the game board 6 and is detected by the second starting opening switch 14a. The variable winning ball device 15 is opened by the solenoid 16. When the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state, the gaming ball can be won in the second start winning hole 14 (it becomes easy to get a start prize), which is advantageous for the player. In the state where the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state, the gaming ball is more likely to win the second starting winning hole 14 than the first starting winning hole 13. In addition, in a state where the variable winning ball device 15 is in the closed state, the gaming ball does not win the second start winning hole 14. Therefore, in a state where the variable winning ball device 15 is in the closed state, the gaming ball is more likely to win the first starting winning hole 13 than the second starting winning hole 14. In the state where the variable winning ball device 15 is in the closed state, although it is difficult to win, it may be configured to be able to win (that is, the gaming ball is hard to win).

  Hereinafter, the first starting winning opening 13 and the second starting winning opening 14 may be collectively referred to as a starting winning opening or a starting opening.

  When the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled to the open state, the gaming ball heading to the variable winning ball device 15 is extremely easy to win a prize in the second start winning opening 14. And although the first start winning opening 13 is provided immediately below the effect display 9, the distance between the lower end of the effect display 9 and the first start winning opening 13 can be further narrowed, or the first start winning opening It is difficult to arrange nails closely around 13 and to make it difficult to guide the game balls to the first start winning opening 13 by arranging the nails around the first starting winning opening 13, so that the winning ratio of the second start winning opening 14 You may make it be higher than the winning rate of the first start winning opening 13.

  Above the second special symbol display 8b, there is a second special symbol hold storage indicator 18b consisting of four indicators for displaying the number of activated winning balls that have entered the second start winning opening 14, ie, the second reserve memory number. It is provided. The second special symbol hold storage indicator 18b increases the number of lighted indicators by one each time there is a valid start winning. Then, every time variable display on the second special symbol display 8b is started, the number of lighted indicators is reduced by one.

  Further, above the second special symbol suspension storage indicator 18b, the number of activated winning balls entering the first start winning opening 13, ie, the first suspension storage number (pending storage is also referred to as start storage or start prize storage). A first special symbol hold storage indicator 18a consisting of four indicators for displaying) is provided. The first special symbol hold storage indicator 18a increases the number of lighted indicators by one each time there is a valid start winning. Then, every time variable display on the first special symbol display 8a is started, the number of lighted indicators is reduced by one.

  In addition, the display screen of the effect display device 9 is provided with a first hold storage display unit 9a for displaying the first hold storage number and a second hold storage display unit 9b for displaying the second hold storage number. . In addition to the mode shown in this embodiment, for example, the sum of the first number of pending storages and the second number of pending storages instead of the first pending storage display unit 9a and the second pending storage display unit 9b. An area (total holding storage display unit) may be provided to display the total number (total holding storage number).

  The effect display device 9 is for decoration (for effect) during the variable display time of the first special symbol by the first special symbol display 8a and during the variable display time of the second special symbol by the second special symbol display 8b. Perform variable display of the effect design as a symbol of. The variable display of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display 8a and the variable display of the effect symbol in the effect display device 9 are synchronized. In addition, the variable display of the second special symbol in the second special symbol display 8b and the variable display of the effect symbol in the effect display device 9 are synchronized. In addition, when the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the first special symbol display 8a, and when the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the second special symbol display 8b, a rendering symbol that evokes a big hit in the effect display device 9 The combination of is displayed stopped.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 1, a special variable winning ball device 20 that forms a big winning opening is provided below the variable winning ball device 15. The special variable winning ball device 20 has an opening and closing plate, and when the specific display result (big hit symbol) is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a, the specific display result (big hit symbol) on the second special symbol display 8b In the specific gaming state (big hit gaming state) that occurs when the display is derived, the opening / closing plate is controlled by the solenoid 21 to be in the open state, whereby the big winning opening serving as the winning area is opened. The game ball that has won the special winning opening is detected by the count switch 23.

  On the left side of the effect display device 9, an ordinary symbol display 10 for variably displaying an ordinary symbol is provided. In this embodiment, the normal symbol display 10 is realized by a simple and small display (for example, 7-segment LED) capable of variably displaying the numbers 0-9. That is, the normal symbol display 10 is configured to variably display the numbers 0 to 9 (or symbols). Moreover, the small display is formed, for example, in a square shape. In addition, the normal symbol display 10 may be configured to variably display, for example, the numbers 00 to 99 (or two-digit symbols). Also, the normal symbol display 10 is not limited to a 7-segment LED etc., for example, a display capable of lighting and displaying a predetermined symbol display (for example, a decorative lamp capable of alternately lighting and displaying "o" and "x") May be composed of

  When the game ball passes through the gate 32 and is detected by the gate switch 32a, the variable display of the display of the normal symbol display 10 is started. When the stop symbol in the normal symbol display 10 is a predetermined symbol (a hit symbol, for example, a symbol "7"), the variable winning ball device 15 is opened for a predetermined number of times and for a predetermined time. That is, when the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a hit symbol, the variable winning ball device 15 is in a state advantageous to the player from a disadvantageous state (a state where the game ball can be won in the second start winning opening 14) Change to In the vicinity of the normal symbol display 10, a normal symbol hold storage indicator 41 having a display unit with four LEDs for displaying the number of winning balls having passed through the gate 32 is provided. Each time the game ball passes to the gate 32, that is, whenever the game ball is detected by the gate switch 32a, the normal symbol hold storage indicator 41 increases the number of lighted LEDs by one. Then, whenever variable display of the normal symbol display 10 is started, the number of LEDs to be lit is reduced by one. Furthermore, a probability change state in which the probability determined to be a big hit as compared to the normal state is high (a state in which the probability of being determined as a big hit as a result of the variation display of the special symbol is increased compared to the normal state) Then, the probability that the stop symbol in the normal symbol display 10 hits and the symbol is increased is increased, and the opening time and the number of times of opening of the variable winning ball device 15 are increased. In addition, even in the short time state (the game state in which the variable display time of the special symbol is shortened), which is not a definite change state but the symbol variation time is shortened, the opening time and the opening number of the variable winning ball device 15 are increased.

  At the lower part of the game board 6, there is an out port 26 where a non-winning hit ball is taken. In the upper left and right upper and lower left of the game area 7, four speakers 27 are provided for producing sound effects and sounds as a predetermined sound output. On the outer periphery of the game area 7, a frame LED 28 provided on the front frame is provided.

  In the game machine, a hit ball firing device (not shown) which drives the drive motor in response to the player operating the hitting operation handle 5 and uses the rotational force of the drive motor to launch the game ball into the game area 7 ) Is provided. The game balls fired from the hit ball launcher enter the game area 7 through the ball hitting rails formed in a circular shape so as to surround the game area 7, and then descend the game area 7. When the game ball enters the first start winning opening 13 and is detected by the first start opening switch 13a, it is possible to start variable display of the first special symbol (for example, variable display of the special symbol is ended, the first The start condition of 1 is satisfied), the variable display (variation) of the first special symbol is started in the first special symbol display 8a, and the variable display of the effect symbol is started in the effect display device 9. That is, the variable display of the first special symbol and the effect symbol corresponds to the winning of the first start winning opening 13. If it is not in a state where variable display of the first special symbol can be started, the first number of pending storages is increased by 1 on the condition that the first number of pending storages has not reached the upper limit value.

  If the game ball enters the second starting winning opening 14 and is detected by the second starting opening switch 14a, the variable display of the second special symbol can be started (for example, the variable display of the special symbol ends, the first The start condition of 2 is satisfied), the variable display (variation) of the second special symbol is started in the second special symbol display 8 b, and the variable display of the effect symbol is started in the effect display device 9. That is, the variable display of the second special symbol and the effect symbol corresponds to the winning of the second start winning opening 14. If it is not in a state where variable display of the second special symbol can be started, the second pending storage number is increased by one on the condition that the second pending storage number has not reached the upper limit value.

  In this embodiment, the game state is shifted to a high probability state (probable change state) when becoming a probability change big hit, and the game ball becomes easy to get started (that is, the special symbol display 8a, 8b or the effect) A transition is made to a high base state which is a gaming state controlled such that execution conditions of variable display in the display device 9 are easily established) (in this embodiment, transition to a time saving state). Also, when the gaming state is shifted to the short time state, it shifts to the high base state. In the high base state, for example, the frequency with which the variable winning ball device 15 is opened is increased, and the time when the variable winning ball device 15 is open is extended, as compared with the case where the high base is not used. It will be easier to get started.

  In addition, instead of extending the time when the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state (also referred to as the open extension state), the transition to the normal symbol certainty state in which the probability of the stop symbol in the normal symbol display 10 hitting is increased. It is possible to move to the high base state. When the stop symbol in the normal symbol display 10 becomes a predetermined symbol (hit symbol), the variable winning ball device 15 is opened for a predetermined number of times and for a predetermined time. In this case, by performing transition control to the normal symbol certainty state, the probability that the stop symbol in the normal symbol display 10 hits will be increased, and the frequency with which the variable winning ball device 15 is opened increases. Therefore, if it shifts to the normal symbol certainty variation state, the opening time and the number of times of opening of the variable winning prize ball device 15 are increased, and it becomes a state (high base state) in which start winning is easy. That is, the opening time and the number of times of opening of the variable winning ball device 15 is enhanced when the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a hit symbol or the stop symbol of a special symbol is a definite symbol, etc. Change to an advantageous state (start start winning state). Note that increasing the number of times of opening is a concept that includes changing from the closed state to the open state.

  In addition, the transition to the high base state may be made by transitioning to the normal symbol time short state in which the variation time (variable display period) of the normal symbol in the normal symbol display 10 is shortened. In the normal symbol time short state, since the variation time of the normal symbol is shortened, the frequency at which the variation of the normal symbol starts is increased, and as a result, the frequency at which the normal symbol is hit is increased. Therefore, when the frequency with which the normal symbol is hit is high, the frequency with which the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state is high, and it becomes a state (high base state) in which start winning is easy.

  In addition, by shifting to a time reduction state in which the variation time (variable display period) of the special symbol and the representation symbol is shortened, the variation time of the special symbol and the representation symbol is shortened, so the variation of the special symbol and the representation symbol starts It is possible to reduce the frequency of occurrence (in other words, the quickening of the reserve memory) and the occurrence of an invalid start winning. Therefore, an effective start winning is likely to occur, and as a result, the possibility of playing a big hit game is increased.

  In addition, it is possible to start winning easily (transition to the high base state) by transitioning to all the states shown above (open extension state, normal pattern exact variation state, normal symbol time short state and special symbol time short state) May be In addition, it is easy to start winning by shifting to any one of the above-mentioned states (open extension state, normal symbol probability change state, normal symbol time short state and special symbol time short state) (high base (high base) (Transition to the state). In addition, it is easy to start winning by shifting to any one of the above-mentioned states (open extension state, normal symbol probability change state, normal symbol time short state and special symbol time short state) (high It may be made to shift to the base state).

  FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing an example of the circuit configuration of the main board (game control board) 31. As shown in FIG. FIG. 2 also shows the payout control board 37, the effect control board 80, and the like. The main substrate 31 is mounted with a game control microcomputer (corresponding to game control means) 560 for controlling the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to a program. The game control microcomputer 560 has a ROM 54 for storing a program for game control (game progression control) and the like, a RAM 55 as storage means used as a work memory, a CPU 56 for performing control operations according to the program, and an I / O port unit 57 including. In this embodiment, the ROM 54 and the RAM 55 are incorporated in the game control microcomputer 560. That is, the game control microcomputer 560 is a one-chip microcomputer. The one-chip microcomputer only needs to incorporate at least the CPU 56 and the RAM 55, and the ROM 54 may be external or internal. Also, the I / O port unit 57 may be externally attached. The game control microcomputer 560 further includes a random number circuit 503 that generates hardware random numbers (random numbers generated by a hardware circuit).

  In addition, the RAM 55 is a backup RAM as a non-volatile storage means backed up by a backup power source, part or all of which is created on the power supply substrate. That is, even if the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped, the content of a part or all of the RAM 55 is stored for a predetermined backup period (until the capacitor as a backup power source discharges and the backup power source can not supply power). Ru. In particular, data indicating at least the gaming state, that is, the control state of the gaming control means (such as a special symbol process flag or a probability change flag) and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are stored in the backup RAM. The data corresponding to the control state of the game control means is data necessary to restore the control state before the occurrence of a power failure or the like on the basis of the data when the power failure or the like is restored after the occurrence of a power failure or the like. Further, data corresponding to the control state and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as data indicating the progress of the game. In this embodiment, it is assumed that all of the RAM 55 is backed up by the power supply.

  In the game control microcomputer 560, the CPU 56 executes control in accordance with the program stored in the ROM 54, so that the game control microcomputer 560 (or the CPU 56) executes (or performs processing) hereinafter. Specifically, the CPU 56 executes control according to a program. The same applies to a microcomputer mounted on another substrate other than the main substrate 31.

  The random number circuit 503 is a hardware circuit used to generate a random number for determination to determine whether or not to make a big hit according to the display result of the variable display of the special symbol. The random number circuit 503 updates numerical data in accordance with a set update rule within a numerical range in which an initial value (for example, 0) and an upper limit value (for example, 65535) are set, and start occurs at random timing. Based on the fact that the winning is at the time of reading out (extraction) of numerical data, it has a random number generation function in which the numerical data to be read out is a random number.

  Further, an input driver circuit 58 for giving detection signals from the gate switch 32a, the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a, and the count switch 23 to the game control microcomputer 560 is also mounted on the main board 31. In addition, the main circuit board is also a solenoid 16 for opening and closing the variable winning ball device 15, and an output circuit 59 for driving the solenoid 21 for opening and closing the special variable winning ball device 20 for forming the special winning opening in accordance with a command from the game control microcomputer 560. It is mounted on 31.

  In addition, the microcomputer 560 for game control, the first special symbol indicator 8a which variably displays the special symbol, the second special symbol indicator 8b, the normal symbol indicator 10 which variably displays the ordinary symbol, the first special symbol hold memory The display control of the display 18a, the second special symbol hold storage indicator 18b and the normal symbol hold storage indicator 41 is performed.

  An information output circuit 64 for outputting an information output signal such as big hit information indicating the occurrence of a big hit gaming state to an external device such as a hall computer via the terminal board 160 is also mounted on the main board 31.

  In this embodiment, the effect control means (composed of the effect control microcomputer) mounted on the effect control board 80 instructs the effect contents from the game control microcomputer 560 via the relay board 77. The effect control command is received, and the display control of the effect display device 9 that variably displays the effect pattern is performed.

  Further, the effect control means mounted on the effect control board 80 controls the display of the frame LED 28 provided on the frame side via the lamp driver board 35, and from the speaker 27 via the audio output board 70. Control the sound output of

  The effect control means is also connected to the trigger sensor 125 provided in the stick controller 122, the tilt direction sensor unit 123, the vibrator motor 126, and the push sensor 124 provided in the push button 120, as described later. (See FIG. 3), but illustration is omitted in FIG.

  FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing an example of the circuit configuration of the relay board 77, the effect control board 80, the lamp driver board 35, and the sound output board 70. As shown in FIG. In the example shown in FIG. 3, the microcomputer is not mounted on the lamp driver substrate 35 and the sound output substrate 70, but a microcomputer may be mounted. Further, only the effect control substrate 80 may be provided for effect control without providing the lamp driver substrate 35 and the sound output substrate 70.

  The effect control board 80 is mounted with an effect control microcomputer 100 including a effect control CPU 101 and a RAM for storing information on effects such as an effect pattern process flag and the like. The RAM may be externally attached. In this embodiment, the RAM in the effect control microcomputer 100 is not backed up by a power supply. In the effect control board 80, the effect control CPU 101 operates according to a program stored in a built-in or external ROM (not shown), and takes in a signal taken from the main board 31 input via the relay board 77 ( According to the effect control (INT signal), the effect control command is received via the input driver 102 and the input port 103. Further, the effect control CPU 101 causes the VDP (video display processor) 109 to perform display control of the effect display device 9 based on the effect control command.

  In this embodiment, a VDP 109 for controlling display of the effect display device 9 in cooperation with the effect control microcomputer 100 is mounted on the effect control board 80. The VDP 109 has an address space independent of the effect control microcomputer 100, and maps a VRAM there. VRAM is a buffer memory for expanding image data. Then, the VDP 109 outputs the image data in the VRAM to the effect display device 9 via the frame memory.

  The effect control CPU 101 outputs a command for reading out necessary data from a CGROM (not shown) in accordance with the received effect control command to the VDP 109. The CGROM stores in advance character image data and moving image data displayed on the effect display device 9, specifically, data of a person, characters, figures, symbols, etc. (including effect patterns), and background image data. It is a ROM for. The VDP 109 reads image data from the CGROM in response to an instruction from the effect control CPU 101. Then, the VDP 109 executes display control based on the read image data.

  The effect control command and the effect control INT signal are first input to the input driver 102 in the effect control board 80. The input driver 102 only passes the signal input from the relay board 77 in the direction toward the inside of the effect control board 80 (does not pass the signal from the inside of the effect control board 80 to the relay board 77) It is also a unidirectional circuit as a regulation means.

  As a signal direction regulation means which allows the signal input from the main substrate 31 to pass only in the direction toward the effect control substrate 80 (does not allow the signal to pass in the direction from the effect control substrate 80 to the relay substrate 77) in the relay substrate 77 A unidirectional circuit 74 is mounted. For example, diodes or transistors are used as unidirectional circuits. A diode is illustrated in FIG. Also, unidirectional circuits are provided for each signal. Further, since the effect control command and the effect control INT signal are output from the main board 31 through the output port 571 which is a unidirectional circuit, the signal from the relay board 77 toward the inside of the main board 31 is restricted. That is, the signal from the relay board 77 does not enter the inside of the main board 31 (the game control microcomputer 560 side). The output port 571 is a part of the I / O port unit 57 shown in FIG. In addition, a signal driver circuit which is a unidirectional circuit may be further provided outside the output port 571 (the relay board 77 side).

  The effect control CPU 101 also receives an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that the player's operation on the trigger button 121 of the stick controller 122 has been detected, from the trigger sensor 125 via the input port 106. Further, the effect control CPU 101 inputs an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that the player's operation on the push button 120 has been detected, from the push sensor 124 via the input port 106. The effect control CPU 101 also receives an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that the player's operation on the operation stick of the stick controller 122 has been detected, from the tilt direction sensor unit 123 via the input port 106. . Further, the effect control CPU 101 vibrates the stick controller 122 by outputting a drive signal to the vibrator motor 126 via the output port 105.

  Further, the effect control CPU 101 outputs a signal for driving the LED to the lamp driver board 35 via the output port 105. Further, the effect control CPU 101 outputs sound number data to the sound output board 70 via the output port 104.

  In the lamp driver substrate 35, a signal for driving the LED is input to the LED driver 352 via the input driver 351. The LED driver 352 supplies current to a light emitter such as the frame LED 28 based on a signal for driving the LED.

  In the voice output board 70, the sound number data is input to the voice synthesis IC 703 via the input driver 702. The speech synthesis IC 703 generates speech and sound effects according to the sound number data and outputs the speech and the sound effects to the amplification circuit 705. The amplifier circuit 705 outputs to the speaker 27 an audio signal obtained by amplifying the output level of the voice synthesis IC 703 to a level according to the volume set by the volume 706. The voice data ROM 704 stores control data corresponding to the sound number data. The control data corresponding to the sound number data is a collection of data indicating in time series the output mode of the sound effect or the sound in a predetermined effect period (for example, a fluctuation period of the effect symbol).

  Next, the operation of the gaming machine will be described. FIG. 4 is a flow chart showing main processing executed by the game control microcomputer 560 on the main substrate 31. When power is supplied to the gaming machine and power supply is started, the input level of the reset terminal to which the reset signal is inputted becomes high level, and the microcomputer for gaming control 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) After the security check process, which is a process for confirming whether the content of the program is valid, is performed, the main process after step S1 is started. In the main processing, the CPU 56 first performs necessary initialization.

  In the initial setting process, the CPU 56 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S1). Next, the interrupt mode is set to the interrupt mode 2 (step S2), and the stack pointer designation address is set in the stack pointer (step S3). Then, after initializing the built-in device (initializing the built-in device (built-in peripheral circuit) CTC (counter / timer) and PIO (parallel input / output port) etc.) (step S4), the RAM can be accessed (Step S5). In interrupt mode 2, the address synthesized from the value (1 byte) of a specific register (I register) built in CPU 56 and the interrupt vector (1 byte: least significant bit 0) output from the built-in device is This mode indicates the interrupt address.

  Next, the CPU 56 confirms the state of the output signal (clear signal) of the clear switch (for example, mounted on the power supply substrate) input through the input port (step S6). If ON is detected in the confirmation, the CPU 56 executes a normal initialization process (steps S10 to S15).

  If the clear switch is not in the ON state, it is checked whether data protection processing (for example, processing at the time of power supply stop such as addition of parity data) of backup RAM area is performed when power supply to the gaming machine is stopped (Step S7). After confirming that such protection processing has not been performed, the CPU 56 executes initialization processing. Whether or not there is backup data in the backup RAM area is confirmed by, for example, the state of the backup flag set in the backup RAM area in the power supply stop processing.

  After confirming that the power supply stop processing has been performed, the CPU 56 performs data check of the backup RAM area (step S8). In this embodiment, parity check is performed as data check. Therefore, in step S8, the calculated checksum is compared with the checksum calculated and stored by the same process in the power supply stop process. If recovery is performed after a power supply stop such as an unexpected power failure occurs, the data in the backup RAM area should be saved, so the check result (comparison result) becomes normal (match). If the check result is not normal, it means that the data in the backup RAM area is different from the data at the time of the power supply interruption. In such a case, since the internal state can not be returned to the state at the time of the power supply stop, the initialization process executed at the time of power-on not at the time of recovery from the stop of the power supply is executed.

  If the check result is normal, the CPU 56 restores the game state recovery processing for returning the internal state of the game control means and the control state of the electric component control means such as the effect control means to the state at the time of stopping the power supply (steps S41 to S43). Process). Specifically, the top address of the backup setting table stored in the ROM 54 is set as a pointer (step S41), and the contents of the backup setting table are sequentially set in the work area (the area in the RAM 55) (step S42). ). The work area is backed up by a backup power supply. In the backup setting table, initialization data for an area that may be initialized in the work area is set. With the processing of steps S41 and S42, the saved content remains as it is for the portion of the work area that should not be initialized. The part that should not be initialized is, for example, data (special symbol process flag, positive change flag, time saving flag, etc.) indicating the gaming state before the power supply is stopped, the area where the output state of the output port is saved (output port buffer ), And a portion where data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls is set.

  Further, the CPU 56 transmits a power failure recovery designation command as an initialization command at the time of power supply recovery (step S43). In addition, the CPU 56 transmits to the effect control board 80 a display result designating command designating the display result (usually a big hit, a positive change big hit, a sudden positive change big hit, a small hit, or a drop) stored in the backup RAM (step S44). Then, the process proceeds to step S14. In step S44, if the value of the special symbol pointer described later is also stored in the backup RAM, for example, the CPU 56 also transmits the first symbol variation specification command and the second symbol variation specification command (see FIG. 13). You may do it. In this case, the effect control microcomputer 100 may resume the variation display of the fourth symbol based on the reception of the first symbol variation specification command or the second symbol variation specification command.

  In this embodiment, the backup RAM area also stores the value of the fluctuation time timer described later. Therefore, when the power failure is restored, after the display result designation command is transmitted in step S44, the measurement of the value of the fluctuation time timer which has been saved is restarted, and the fluctuation display of the special symbol is resumed and saved. When the value of the fluctuation time timer which has been timed out, a symbol determination designation command to be described later is transmitted. Further, in this embodiment, the backup RAM area also stores the value of a special symbol process flag described later. Therefore, when the power failure is recovered, the special symbol process processing is resumed from the process corresponding to the value of the stored special symbol process flag.

  It should be noted that the CPU 56 may first check whether the value of the fluctuation time timer stored in the backup RAM area is 0 or not, instead of transmitting the display result specification command at the time of power failure recovery. . Then, if the value of the fluctuation time timer is not 0, it is determined that a power failure occurs during fluctuation, and a display result designation command is transmitted. If the fluctuation time timer is 0, it is fluctuating at power failure. It may be determined not to be in the state, and the display result designation command may not be transmitted.

  The CPU 56 may first check whether the value of the special symbol process flag stored in the backup RAM area is three. Then, if the value of the special symbol process flag is 3, it is determined that a power failure occurs during fluctuation, and a display result designation command is transmitted. If the special symbol process flag is not 3, it fluctuates at power failure. It may be determined that the display result designation command is not transmitted, judging that it is not inside.

  In this embodiment, although both the backup flag and the check data are used to check whether the data in the backup RAM area is stored or not, only one of them may be used. That is, either the backup flag or the check data may be used as a trigger for executing the gaming state recovery process.

  In the initialization process, the CPU 56 first performs a RAM clear process (step S10). In addition, predetermined data (for example, data of the count value of the counter for generating the random number per judgment for normal symbols) is initialized to 0 by the RAM clear process, but it is an arbitrary value or a predetermined value It may be initialized to In addition, predetermined data (for example, data of a count value of a counter for generating a random number per determination) may be left as it is without initializing the entire area of the RAM 55. Further, the start address of the initialization setting table stored in the ROM 54 is set as a pointer (step S11), and the contents of the initialization setting table are sequentially set in the work area (step S12).

  By the processing of steps S11 and S12, for example, a flag for performing selective processing according to the control state, such as a random symbol counter for determining a normal symbol, a special symbol buffer, a total prize ball number storage buffer, a special symbol process flag, etc. The value is set.

  In addition, the CPU 56 is an initialization designation command (a command indicating that the gaming control microcomputer 560 has executed the initialization process) for initializing the sub board (the board on which the microcomputer other than the main board 31 is mounted). ) Is sent to the sub-substrate (step S13). For example, when the effect control microcomputer 100 receives the initialization designation command, the effect display device 9 performs screen display for notifying that control of the gaming machine has been initialized, that is, initialization notification.

  Further, the CPU 56 executes a random number circuit setting process of initializing the random number circuit 503 (step S14). The CPU 56 performs setting for causing the random number circuit 503 to update the value of random R, for example, by executing processing in accordance with the random number circuit setting program.

  Then, in step S15, the CPU 56 sets the register of the CTC incorporated in the game control microcomputer 560 so that a timer interrupt is periodically generated every predetermined time (for example, 4 ms). That is, a value corresponding to 4 ms, for example, is set as an initial value in a predetermined register (time constant register). In this embodiment, it is assumed that a timer interrupt is periodically performed every 4 ms.

  When the execution of the initialization process (steps S10 to S15) is completed, the CPU 56 repeatedly executes the display random number update process (step S17) and the initial value random number update process (step S18) in the main process. When executing display random number update processing and initial value random number update processing, interrupt disabled state is set (step S16), and when execution of display random number update processing and initial value random number update processing is completed, interrupt permitted state is set. It sets (step S19). In this embodiment, the display random number is a random number for determining a stop symbol of a special symbol when not being a big hit, or a random number for determining whether to be a reach when not being a big hit. The random number updating process is a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the display random number. The initial value random number updating process is a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number. In this embodiment, the initial value random number is an initial value of the count value of a counter (normal pattern random number generation counter for determination per pattern) for generating a random number for determining whether or not to hit a normal symbol. It is a random number to decide. The game control process for controlling the progress of the game to be described later (The game control microcomputer 560 controls the game display devices such as the effect display device provided in the game machine, the variable winning ball device, the ball payout device, etc. by itself Count value of the random number for determination per normal pattern in the process of transmitting a command signal to control another microcomputer, or to control other microcomputers, the count value of the random number for determination per normal pattern is 1 round (take the random number for determination per normal pattern) When the value is advanced by the number of numerical values between the minimum value and the maximum value of the possible value, the initial value is set to the counter.

  When a timer interrupt occurs, the CPU 56 executes the timer interrupt process of steps S20 to S34 shown in FIG. In the timer interrupt process, first, a power-off detection process is performed to detect whether or not the power-off signal is output (is turned on or not) (step S20). The power-off signal is output, for example, when the power supply monitoring circuit mounted on the power supply substrate detects a drop in the voltage of the power supplied to the game machine. Then, in the power-off detection process, when the CPU 56 detects that the power-off signal is output, the CPU 56 executes the power-supply stop process for storing necessary data in the backup RAM area. Subsequently, detection signals of the gate switch 32a, the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a, and the count switch 23 are input through the input driver circuit 58, and the states of them are determined (switch processing: step S21). ).

  Next, the CPU 56 displays the first special symbol display 8a, the second special symbol display 8b, the normal symbol display 10, the first special symbol hold memory indicator 18a, the second special symbol hold memory indicator 18b, the ordinary symbol A display control process for controlling the display of the hold storage indicator 41 is executed (step S22). For the first special symbol display 8a, the second special symbol display 8b and the normal symbol display 10, drive signals are output to each display according to the contents of the output buffer set in steps S32 and S33. Execute control.

  Further, processing is performed to update the count value of each counter for generating each determination random number such as a normal symbol-performing determination random number used for game control (determination random number update process: step S23). The CPU 56 further performs processing for updating the initial value random number and the count value of the counter for generating the display random number (initial value random number updating process, display random number updating process: steps S24, S25).

  Further, the CPU 56 performs special symbol process processing (step S26). In the special symbol process processing, the corresponding processing is executed in accordance with a special symbol process flag for controlling the first special symbol display 8a, the second special symbol display 8b and the special winning opening in a predetermined order. The CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag in accordance with the gaming state.

  Then, a normal symbol process process is performed (step S27). In the normal symbol process processing, the CPU 56 executes the corresponding processing in accordance with the normal symbol process flag for controlling the display state of the normal symbol display 10 in a predetermined order. The CPU 56 updates the value of the normal symbol process flag in accordance with the gaming state.

  In addition, the CPU 56 performs a process of sending out the effect control command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (effect control command control process: step S28).

  Further, the CPU 56 performs an information output process of outputting data such as big hit information, start information, probability fluctuation information and the like supplied to the hole management computer, for example (step S29).

  Further, the CPU 56 executes a winning ball process for setting the number of winning balls based on the detection signals of the first starting opening switch 13a, the second starting opening switch 14a and the count switch 23 (step S30). Specifically, the payout control micro-circuit mounted on the payout control board 37 according to the winning detection based on any one of the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a and the count switch 23 being turned on. A payout control command (prize ball number signal) indicating the number of prize balls is output to the computer. The payout control microcomputer drives the ball dispenser 97 in accordance with the payout control command indicating the number of winning balls.

  In this embodiment, the RAM area (output port buffer) corresponding to the output state of the output port is provided, but the CPU 56 relates to the ON / OFF of the solenoid in the RAM area corresponding to the output state of the output port. The content is output to the output port (step S31: output processing).

  In addition, the CPU 56 performs special symbol display control processing of setting special symbol display control data for performing special symbol effect display according to the value of the special symbol process flag in the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data ( Step S32).

  Furthermore, the CPU 56 performs normal symbol display control processing of setting normal symbol display control data for performing effect display of normal symbols according to the value of the normal symbol process flag in the output buffer for setting normal symbol display control data ( Step S33). For example, when the start flag related to the variation of the normal symbol is set, the CPU 56 changes the display state ("○" and "x") every 0.2 seconds until the end flag is set. With such a speed, the value of the display control data (for example, 1 indicating "o" and 0 indicating "x") is switched every time 0.2 seconds elapse. Further, the CPU 56 executes the effect display of the normal symbol in the normal symbol display 10 by outputting the drive signal in step S22 according to the display control data set in the output buffer.

  Thereafter, the interrupt enabled state is set (step S34), and the process is ended.

  By the above control, in this embodiment, the game control process is activated every 4 ms. The game control process corresponds to the process of steps S21 to S33 (excluding step S29) in the timer interrupt process. Further, in this embodiment, the game control process is executed in the timer interrupt process, but in the timer interrupt process, for example, only a flag indicating that an interrupt has occurred is set, and the game control process is the main process May be performed in

  FIG. 6 is an explanatory view showing a variation pattern of a rendering symbol prepared in advance. As shown in FIG. 6, in this embodiment, non-reach PA 1-1-1-1 as non-reach PA-1 as non-reach pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “off” and the variable display mode of the rendering symbol is non-reach The fluctuation pattern of reach PA1-2 is prepared. Among them, non-reach PA 1-1 is a fluctuation pattern without reach and without pseudo reciprocation or slip rendition, and is not a shortening fluctuation, and is a fluctuation pattern for normal fluctuation (in this example, fluctuation time 12.50 seconds) It is. In addition, non-reach PA1-2 is a fluctuation pattern without reach and without pseudo reunion and slip rendition, and the fluctuation time is shorter than the normal fluctuation, and the fluctuation pattern for shortening fluctuation (in this example, fluctuation time 2 .00 seconds).

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 6, when the non-reach is out, the case where the fluctuation pattern accompanied by the pseudo ream or the slip effect is not included is shown, but when the non-reach is out. Also, it may be configured to provide a fluctuation pattern accompanied by a pseudo ream or a slip effect.

  In addition, as a variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "off" and the variable display mode of the effect pattern is "reach", normal PA2-1 to normal PA2-2, normal PB2-1 to normal PB2-2 The variation patterns of Super PA 3-1 to Super PA 3-2 and Super PB 3-1 to Super PB 3-2 are prepared. In addition, as shown in FIG. 6, when using normal PB2-1 among the fluctuation patterns which are used when reaching and are accompanied by effects of pseudo ream, re-variation is performed once. Moreover, when using normal PB2-2 among the fluctuation patterns which are used when reaching and are accompanied by effects of pseudo ream, re-variation is performed twice. Furthermore, in the case of using the super PA 3-1 to the super PA 3-2 among the fluctuation patterns that are used when reaching and that are accompanied by the effect of pseudo ream, re-variation is performed three times. In addition, re-variation is to execute the variable display of the production symbol again after temporarily stopping the production symbol that is temporarily distracted from the start of the variable display of the production symbol until the display result is derived and displayed. .

  Further, as shown in FIG. 6, in this embodiment, normal PA2-3 to normal PA2-4, normal PB2 as a variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result of the special symbol becomes a big hit symbol or a small hit symbol. -3-Normal PB 2-4, Super PA 3-3-Super PA 3-4, Super PB 3-3-Super PB 3-4, Special PG 1-1-Special PG 1-3, Special PG 2-1-Special PG 2-2 fluctuation pattern Is prepared. In FIG. 6, the variation patterns of the special PG 1-1 to the special PG 1-3 and the variation pattern of the special PG 2-1 to the special PG 2-2 are variation patterns used in the case of sudden probability big hit or small hit. Further, as shown in FIG. 6, among the fluctuation patterns accompanied by the pseudo-representation, which is used when the sudden variation is not a big hit or a small hit, when using the normal PB2-3, re-variation is performed once. Moreover, when using normal PB2-4 among the fluctuation patterns which are used when reaching and are accompanied by effects of pseudo ream, re-variation is performed twice. Furthermore, in the case of using the super PA 3-3 to the super PA 3-4 among the fluctuation patterns that are used when reaching and that are accompanied by the effect of pseudo ream, re-variation is performed three times. In addition, a re-variation is performed once for the variation pattern of the special PG 1-3 which is used in the case of the sudden big hit or small hit and which is accompanied by the effect of pseudo ream.

FIG. 7 is an explanatory view showing each random number. Each random number is used as follows.
(1) Random 1 (MR1): Determine the type of jackpot (normal jackpot described later, probability variation big hit, sudden probability variation big hit) (for jackpot type determination)
(2) Random 2 (MR 2): Determine the type (type) of variation pattern (for variation pattern type determination)
(3) Random 3 (MR 3): Determine a variation pattern (variation time) (for variation pattern determination)
(4) Random 4 (MR 4): Determine whether or not to generate a hit based on a normal symbol (for normal symbol determination)
(5) Random 5 (MR 5): Determine the initial value of random 4 (for determining the random 4 initial value)

  In step S23 in the game control process shown in FIG. 5, the game control microcomputer 560 is a counter for generating a jackpot type determination random number of (1) and a random number per normal symbol determination of (4). Perform count up (1 addition). That is, those are determination random numbers, and the other random numbers are display random numbers (random 2, random 3) or initial value random numbers (random 5). Note that random numbers other than the above random numbers may be used to enhance the gaming effect. Further, in this embodiment, a random number generated by hardware (which may be hardware outside the gaming control microcomputer 560) built in the gaming control microcomputer 560 is used as the jackpot determination random number. Note that software random numbers may be used instead of hardware random numbers as the jackpot determination random numbers.

  FIG. 8A is an explanatory view showing the big hit determination table. The jackpot determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 54 and is a table in which a jackpot determination value to be compared with the random R is set. The jackpot determination table includes a normal jackpot determination table used in a normal state and a short time state (that is, a gaming state that is not a definite change state), and a probability change time jackpot determination table used in a positive change state. Each numerical value described in the left column of FIG. 8A is set in the normal time jackpot determination table, and each numerical value described in the right column of FIG. 8A in the positive change time jackpot determination table Is set. The numerical value described in FIG. 8A is the jackpot determination value.

  FIGS. 8B and 8C are explanatory diagrams showing a small hit determination table. The small hit determination table is a group of data stored in the ROM 54 and is a table in which a small hit determination value to be compared with the random R is set. In the small hit determination table, a small hit determination table (for the first special symbol) used when performing variable display of the first special symbol, and a small hit determination table used when performing the variable display of the second special symbol (For the second special symbol) and there. Each numerical value described in FIG. 8B is set in the small hit determination table (for the first special symbol), and in the small hit determination table (for the second special symbol), in FIG. 8C. Each numerical value described is set. Further, the numerical values described in FIGS. 8B and 8C are small hit determination values.

  The CPU 56 extracts the count value of the random number circuit 503 at a predetermined time and sets the extracted value as the value of the big hit determination random number (random R), but the big hit determination random number value is shown in FIG. If any of the big hit judgment values are matched, it is decided to make it a big hit (normal big hit, positive variation big hit, sudden positive variation big hit which will be described later) for the special symbol. If the jackpot determination random number value matches any of the small hit determination values shown in FIGS. 8B and 8C, it is determined that the special symbol is to be a small hit. The “probability” shown in FIG. 8A indicates the probability (percentage) of becoming a big hit. The “probability” shown in FIGS. 8B and 8C indicates the probability (percentage) of being a small hit. In addition, deciding whether or not to make a big hit is deciding whether or not to shift to a big hit gaming state, but the stop symbol in the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b It is also to decide whether or not to make it a jackpot symbol. In addition, deciding whether or not to make a small hit is to decide whether to shift to a small hitting gaming state, but the stop at the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b It is also to decide whether or not to make the symbol a small hit symbol.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8B and 8C, when using the small hit determination table (for the first special symbol), it is determined to be a small hit at a ratio of 1/300. In the case where the small hit determination table (second special symbol) is used, the case where it is determined to be a small hit at a rate of 1/3000 will be described. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the first start winning opening 13 is start winning and the first special symbol variation display is executed, the second starting winning opening 14 is start winning and the second special symbol of The percentage determined as "small hit" is higher than when variable display is performed.

  8D and 8E are explanatory diagrams showing the jackpot type determination tables 131a and 131b stored in the ROM 54. Among these, FIG. 8 (D) determines the jackpot type using the suspension memory based on the game ball having won the first start winning opening 13 (that is, when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed). It is a jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol) 131 a of the case. Further, FIG. 8E shows the case where the jackpot type is determined by using the retention memory based on the game ball having won the second start winning opening 14 (that is, when the variation display of the second special symbol is performed). Jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol) 131b.

  When it is determined that the big hit classification determination table 131a, 131b is to make the variable display result a big hit symbol, the type of the big hit "normal big hit", based on the random number (random 1) for the big hit type determination, " It is a table to be referred to in order to determine either “probability big hit” or “suddenly big hit”. In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8 (D) and 8 (E), five judgment values are assigned to the "sudden probability change big hit" in the big hit type determination table 131a (40 minutes Whereas in the big hit category determination table 131b, one decision value is assigned to "sudden oddity big hit" (a ratio of 1/40). The case where it is determined to be a definite big hit suddenly. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the first start winning opening 13 is start winning and the first special symbol variation display is executed, the second starting winning opening 14 is start winning and the second special symbol of As compared with the case where the variable display is performed, the rate at which the "sudden probability change big hit" is determined is high. "Suddenly probability variation big hit" is distributed only to the first special symbol big hit classification determination table 131a, and "suddenly probability variation big hit" is not distributed to the second special symbol big hit classification determination table 131b (that is, , And may be determined as "suddenly probability variation big hit" only when performing the variable display of the first special symbol).

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8D and 8E, there are "normal big hit", "probably big hit" and "suddenly big hit" as the big hit types. In this embodiment, although the case where the number of rounds executed in the big hit game is two types of 15 rounds and 2 rounds is shown, the number of rounds executed in the big hit game is shown in this embodiment. It is not limited to For example, a 10R probability variation big hit to control 10 rounds of big hit games, a 7R probability variation big hit to control 7 rounds of big hit games, a 5R probability variation big hit to control 5 rounds of big hit games may be provided. Also, in this embodiment, there are three cases of the big hit type being “normal big hit”, “probably big hit” and “suddenly big hit”, but not limited to three types, for example, four or more types. A jackpot type may be provided. Also, conversely, the jackpot type may be less than three types, for example, only two types may be provided as the jackpot type.

  The “normal big hit” is a big hit that is controlled to a big hit state of 15 rounds and is shifted to a time saving state only after the end of the big hit state (see step S 167 described later). Then, after shifting to the time saving state, when the variable display is finished a predetermined number of times (100 times in this embodiment), the time saving state is finished (see steps S168 and S137 to S140). In addition, even before the variable display is ended a predetermined number of times, the time saving state is ended even when the next big hit occurs (see step S132).

  "Perhaps a big hit" is a big hit that controls to 15 rounds of big hit gaming state, and shifts to a positive changing state after the big hit playing state ends (in this embodiment, it is transferred to a positive changing state and also to a time saving state (Refer to steps S169 and S170 described later). Then, the positive change state and the short time state continue until the next big hit occurs (see step S132).

  In addition, "suddenly positive variation big hit" is allowed up to the number of times the opening number of the big winning opening is smaller than "normal big hit" or "positive variation big hit" (in this embodiment, 2 times opening for 0.1 seconds) It is a big hit. That is, in the case of "a sudden odd change big hit", it is controlled to a big hit gaming state of two rounds. Also, the opening time of the big winning opening per round is as long as 29 seconds in "normal big hit" and "probably big hit", while the opening time of big winning opening per round is "in sudden definite changing big hit" It is extremely short at 0.1 seconds, and it can hardly be expected that the game ball will win the big winning opening during the big hit game. And in this embodiment, it is transitioned to a definite change state after the termination of that sudden change big hit game state (in this embodiment, it is transferred to a definite change state and also to a short time state. Step S169, which will be described later). See S170). Then, the positive change state and the short time state continue until the next big hit occurs (see step S132).

  Note that the aspect of sudden positive jackpot is not limited to that shown in this embodiment. For example, the opening number of the big winning opening may be 15 times (15 rounds) the same as that of the big hit or sudden odd variation big hit normally, and only the opening time of the big winning opening may be made extremely short such as 0.1 second.

  In this embodiment, even in the case of "small hit", the opening of the big winning opening is performed twice for 0.1 seconds each, and the same control as the big hit gaming state by "suddenly positive variation big hit" is performed. It will be. Then, in the case of "small hit", after the opening of the special winning opening is finished, the gaming state does not change, and the gaming state before the "small hit" is maintained. By doing so, it is possible to make it impossible to recognize whether the game is a sudden sudden big hit or a small hit, thereby improving the interest of the game. In addition, it is not necessary to provide a small hit, when it is comprised so that all the big hit types may be a definite variation big hit. In addition, when it is configured to provide a small hit if all the big hit type is a definite variation big hit, it is transitioned to a definite variation state (high probability state) and a sudden definite variation big hit without a short time state (high base state) It is preferable that the opening pattern of the big winning opening be made the same for the big hit and the small hit suddenly.

  The jackpot type judgment tables 131a and 131b are numerical values to be compared with the value of random 1, and the judgment values corresponding to "normal jackpot", "probably variable big hit", and "suddenly odd variable big hit" (big hit type judgment value ) Is set. When the value of random 1 matches any of the big hit type determination values, the CPU 56 determines the type of big hit as the type corresponding to the matched big hit type determination value.

  FIGS. 9A to 9C are explanatory diagrams showing the jackpot variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132C. The jackpot variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132C, when it is determined that the variable display result is to be a jackpot symbol, according to the jackpot type determination result, a fluctuation pattern type, a random number for fluctuation pattern type determination It is a table to be referred to in order to determine one of a plurality of types based on (Random 2).

  Each of the jackpot variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132C is a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the value of the random number (random 2) for the variation pattern type determination, which is normal CA 3-1 to normal CA 3-2, Determination values corresponding to any of the variation pattern types of the super CA 3-3, the special CA 4-1, and the special CA 4-2 are set.

  For example, the variation pattern type determination table 132A for big hit shown in FIG. 9A used when the big hit type is “normally big hit”, and FIG. 9 (B) used when the big hit type is “probable variation big hit”. In the jackpot variation pattern type determination table 132B shown in, the allocation of determination values to the variation pattern types of normal CA3-1 to normal CA3-2 and super CA3-3 is different.

  As described above, when the jackpot variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132C selected according to the jackpot type are compared, the assignment of the determination value to each fluctuation pattern type is different according to the jackpot type. In addition, determination values are assigned to different fluctuation pattern types according to the jackpot type. Therefore, different fluctuation pattern types can be determined according to the determination result of which of a plurality of types the jackpot type is to be made, and the ratio determined to be the same fluctuation pattern type can be made different.

  As shown in FIGS. 9A and 9B, in this embodiment, in the case of “normal big hit” or “probable variation big hit”, the value of the random number (random 2) for determining the variation pattern type Is 150 to 251, it can be seen that the variable display with at least Super Reach (Super Reach A, Super Reach B) is performed.

  In addition, for super reach big hit, fluctuation pattern type with pseudo ream (fluctuation pattern type including fluctuation patterns of super PA3-3, super PA3-4) and fluctuation pattern type without pseudo ream (super PB3-3, super And the variation pattern type including the variation pattern of PB3-4. In this case, a variation pattern type with a super reach and a pseudo run, a super reach and a pseudo run, in both the big hit for the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132A for normal hit and the big hit for the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132B. A variation pattern type not to be accompanied is assigned.

  Also, in the jackpot variation pattern type determination table 132C used when the jackpot type is "sudden probability variation big hit", for example, when the jackpot type such as special CA4-1, special CA4-2 is other than "sudden probability variation big hit" The judgment value is assigned to the fluctuation pattern type to which the judgment value is not assigned. Therefore, when the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is suddenly controlled to the big hit state according to the big hit type being "suddenly odd change big hit", it is different from the case where the big hit state due to the big hit or positive hit is usually controlled. It can be determined as the variation pattern type.

  FIG. 9D is an explanatory view showing a small hit variation pattern type determination table 132D. The small hit variation pattern type determination table 132D, when it is determined that the variable display result is made a small hit symbol, a plurality of variation pattern types based on the random number (random 2) for change pattern type determination. Is a table referenced to determine one of In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9 (D), in the case where it is determined to be a small hit, it is shown that special CA 4-1 is determined as the variation pattern type. .

  FIGS. 10A to 10C are explanatory diagrams showing the release variation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135C. Among these, FIG. 10A shows a variation pattern type determination table for loss 135A used when the gaming state is the normal state and the total number of pending storages is less than three. Further, FIG. 10B shows a variation pattern type determination table for deviation 135B used when the gaming state is the normal state and the total number of pending storages is three or more. Further, FIG. 10C shows a change pattern type determination table for disengagement 135C used when the gaming state is a definite change state or a short time state. When it is determined that the variable display result is to be a disappointing pattern, a plurality of types of variation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135C for loss are used based on random numbers (random 2) for variation pattern type determination. Is a table referenced to determine one of

  In each of the outlier fluctuation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135B, numerical values (judgment values) to be compared with the values of the random numbers (random 2) for fluctuation pattern type judgment, which are non reach CA2-1 to non reach CA2-1. 2. A determination value corresponding to one of the variation pattern types of normal CA2-3 to normal CA2-4 and super CA2-5 is set.

  As shown in FIGS. 10 (A) and 10 (B), in this embodiment, if the game state is normal and the game state is off, the value of the random number (random 2) for fluctuation pattern type determination Is 230-251, it can be seen that the variable display with at least the super reach (super reach A, super reach B) is performed regardless of the total number of pending storages.

  Also, as shown in FIGS. 10A and 10B, in this embodiment, if the game state is normal and the game state is off, the value of the random number (random 2) for determination of the variation pattern type If 1 is 1 to 89, fluctuation display of normal fluctuation without at least reach (without a rendition such as pseudo ream or slip effect) is executed regardless of the total number of pending storages (non-reach CA 2-1) Since it becomes a fluctuation pattern classification of, it turns out that it becomes a fluctuation pattern of non-reach PA-1 of non-reach normal fluctuation, as shown in Drawing 12 mentioned below. With such a table configuration, in this embodiment, the determination table (the variation pattern type determination table for loss 135A, 135B) is at least one of the variable display patterns other than the reach variable display pattern (the variation pattern with the reach). For some, regardless of the number of rights stored by the pending storage means (the first pending storage buffer or the second pending storage buffer) (the first pending storage number, the second pending storage number, the total pending storage number) A common judgment value (1 to 89 in the example shown in FIGS. 10A and 10B) is assigned. Note that “variable display patterns other than reach variable display patterns”, as described in this embodiment, for example, do not involve reach, do not accompany effects such as pseudo-trains or slip effects, and the variable display results It is a variable display pattern (variation pattern) used when it does not become a big hit.

  FIGS. 11A and 11B are explanatory diagrams showing the hit variation pattern determination tables 137A to 137B stored in the ROM 54. FIG. In the hit fluctuation pattern determination tables 137A to 137B, when it is determined that the variable display result is to be "big hit" or "small hit", the change pattern determination is performed according to the determination result of the big hit type or the change pattern type. It is a table referred to in order to determine a fluctuation pattern to any one of a plurality of types based on a random number (random 3) for use. Each of the variation pattern determination tables 137A to 137B is selected as a use table according to the determination result of the variation pattern type. That is, according to the determination result that the variation pattern type is to be any of normal CA3-1 to normal CA3-2 and super CA3-3, hit variation pattern determination table 137A is selected as the use table, and the variation pattern type is special. The hit variation pattern determination table 137B is selected as the use table in accordance with the determination result indicating that one of CA4-1 and the special CA4-2. Each of the variation pattern determination tables 137A to 137B is a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the value of the random number (random 3) for variation pattern determination according to the variation pattern type, and the variable display result of the effect pattern is It includes data (judgment value) corresponding to any one of a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns corresponding to the "big hit".

  FIG. 12 is an explanatory view showing the out-of-out variation pattern determination table 138A stored in the ROM 54. As shown in FIG. The out-of-out variation pattern determination table 138A determines that the variable display result is “off” based on the variation pattern determination random number (random 3) according to the determination result of the variation pattern type. It is a table referred to in order to decide fluctuation pattern in either of multiple types. The out-of-out variation pattern determination table 138A is selected as the use table according to the determination result of the variation pattern type.

  FIG. 13 and FIG. 14 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of the contents of the effect control command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 560. In the example shown in FIGS. 13 and 14, command 80XX (H) is a production control command (a variation pattern command for specifying a variation pattern of a production symbol that is variably displayed on the staging display device 9 corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol. ) (Each corresponding to fluctuation pattern XX). That is, when a unique number is assigned to each of the variation patterns which can be used shown in FIG. 6, there is a variation pattern command corresponding to each of the variation patterns specified by the number. "(H)" indicates that it is a hexadecimal number. Further, the effect control command for specifying the fluctuation pattern is also a command for specifying the start of fluctuation. Therefore, when receiving the command 80XX (H), the effect control microcomputer 100 controls the effect display device 9 to start variable display of the effect pattern.

  Commands 8C01 (H) to 8C05 (H) are effect control commands indicating whether or not to make a big hit, whether or not to make a small hit, and a type of big hit. Since the effect control microcomputer 100 determines the display result of the effect pattern in response to the reception of the commands 8C01 (H) to 8C05 (H), the commands 8C01 (H) to 8C05 (H) are referred to as display result specification commands.

  The command 8D01 (H) is an effect control command (first symbol variation designation command) indicating that variable display (variation) of the first special symbol is started. The command 8D02 (H) is an effect control command (second symbol variation specification command) indicating that variable display (variation) of the second special symbol is started. The first symbol variation specification command and the second symbol variation specification command may be collectively referred to as a special symbol specification command (or a symbol variation specification command). Note that information indicating whether to start variable display of the first special symbol or to start variable display of the second special symbol may be included in the variation pattern command.

  The command 8F00 (H) is an effect control command (design confirmation designation command) indicating that the variable display (variation) of the fourth symbol is ended and the display result (stop symbol) is derived and displayed. When receiving the symbol determination designation command, the effect control microcomputer 100 ends the variable display (variation) of the fourth symbol and derives and displays the display result.

  The command 9000 (H) is an effect control command (initialization designation command: power on designation command) transmitted when power supply to the gaming machine is started. The command 9200 (H) is an effect control command (power failure recovery designation command) transmitted when the power supply to the gaming machine is resumed. When power supply to the gaming machine is started, the gaming control microcomputer 560 transmits a power failure recovery designation command if data is stored in the backup RAM, and otherwise initialization designation Send a command

  The command 9F00 (H) is an effect control command (customer waiting demo specification command) for specifying a customer waiting demonstration.

  The commands A 001 and A 002 (H) are effect control commands (big hit start designation command: fan fare designation command) for displaying the fanfare screen, that is, the start of the big hit game. In this embodiment, depending on the type of big hit, a big hit start designation command or a small hit / sudden definite positive big hit start designation command is used. Specifically, the jackpot start designation command (A001 (H)) is used in the case of "normal big hit" or "probably big hit", and the small hit in the case of "suddenly big hit" or "small hit" The sudden definite big hit start specification command (A 002 (H)) is used. Although the game control microcomputer 560 suddenly transmits a fanfare designation command for a definite big hit start designation when it is a big hit suddenly, it does not send a fan fare designation command when it is a small hit. Good.

  The command A1XX (H) is an effect control command (a special winning opening open designation command) showing a display of a number of times (round) of the special winning opening opening indicated by XX. A2XX (H) is an effect control command (designated command after opening of the special winning opening) indicating the closing of the special winning opening for the number of times (round) indicated by XX.

  The command A 301 (H) is an effect control command (big hit end designation command: ending 1 designated command) for displaying the big hit end screen, that is, the end of the big hit game. The big hit end designation command (A301 (H)) is used when ending a big hit game by “normal big hit” or “probable big hit”. The command A 302 (H) is an effect control command (small hit / sudden definite positive big hit end designation command: ending 2 specified command) for specifying the end of the small hit game or the sudden end of the big hit. The game control microcomputer 560 is configured to transmit the ending designation command for the sudden change big hit termination specification suddenly in the case of the sudden change big hit, but not to send the ending specification command in the case of the small hit. It is also good.

  The command B 000 (H) is an effect control command (normal state background designating command) for specifying background display when the gaming state is the normal state. The command B 001 (H) is an effect control command (probable variation state background designation command) for designating a background display when the gaming state is the definite variation state. The command B 002 (H) is an effect control command (time saving state background specifying command) for specifying a background display when the gaming state is the time saving state.

  The command C000 (H) is an effect control command (first pending storage number addition designation command) for designating that the first pending storage number has increased by one. The command C100 (H) is an effect control command (second pending storage number addition designation command) for specifying that the second pending storage number has increased by one. The command C200 (H) is an effect control command (first pending storage number subtraction designation command) for designating that the first pending storage number has decreased by one. The command C300 (H) is an effect control command (second pending storage number subtraction designation command) for designating that the second pending storage number has decreased by one.

  In this embodiment, as the pending storage information, an effect control command indicating that the number of pending storages has increased or decreased for the first pending storage number and the second pending storage number (the first pending storage number addition designation Although the case where the command, the second pending storage number addition designation command, the first pending storage number subtraction designation command, and the second pending storage number subtraction designation command are transmitted is shown, the form of the pending storage information is the same as in this embodiment. For example, pending storage information may be transmitted as follows.

(1) Only one command is transmitted as pending storage information, and in that one command, which one of the first pending storage and the second pending storage has increased is specified, and the number of pending storages of the increased one (The first number of pending storages or the second number of pending storages) may be set and transmitted as EXT data.

(2) Only one command is transmitted as pending storage information, and which one of the first pending storage and the second pending storage has been specified in that one command, and the total pending storage count is EXT data May be set and transmitted.

(3) As pending storage information, which of the first starting winning opening 13 and the second starting winning opening 14 the start winning combination (which one of the first pending storage and the second pending storage has increased) is specified In addition to transmitting the effect control command (the first start winning specifying command, the second starting winning specifying command), the pending storage number specifying command for specifying the pending storage number is separately transmitted, and The total pending storage number may be set as EXT data and transmitted.

(4) As pending storage information, which of the first starting winning opening 13 and the second starting winning opening 14 the start winning combination (which one of the first pending storage and the second pending storage has increased) is specified In addition to transmitting the effect control command (the first start winning specifying command, the second starting winning specifying command), the pending storage number specifying command for specifying the pending storage number is separately transmitted, and The increased number of pending storages (the first pending storage number or the second pending storage number) may be set and transmitted as EXT data.

  The command C4XX (H) and the command C6XX (H) are effect control commands (determination result specification command at the time of winning) indicating the contents of the determination result at the time of winning. Among them, the command C4XX (H) is the effect control command (design designation command) indicating whether or not it will be a big hit, whether it will be a small hit, or the type of the big hit among the judgment results when winning. is there. In addition, command C6XX (H) is the effect control command indicating the determination result (determination result of the variation pattern type) of which determination value range the random value for the variation pattern type determination is among the winning determination results. (Variable category command).

  In this embodiment, in the prize-time effect processing (see FIG. 22) described later, the gaming control microcomputer 560 determines whether or not it will be a big hit, whether it will be a small hit or not, the type of big hit It is determined whether the value of the variation pattern type determination random number falls within the range of which determination value. Then, a value for designating a big hit or a small hit or a value for designating a type of a big hit is set in the EXT data of the symbol designation command, and control to transmit to the effect control microcomputer 100 is performed. Further, a value designating the range of the determination value as the determination result is set in the EXT data of the variation category command, and control to transmit to the effect control microcomputer 100 is performed. In this embodiment, the effect control microcomputer 100 can recognize whether the display result is a big hit or a small hit, and the type of the big hit based on the value set in the symbol designation command, and Based on the fluctuation category command, when the value of the fluctuation pattern type determination random number becomes a predetermined judgment value, the fluctuation pattern type can be recognized.

  FIG. 15 is an explanatory view showing an example of the contents of the symbol designation command. As shown in FIG. 15, in this embodiment, the EXT data is set according to whether or not a big hit or a small hit, and the type of the big hit, and a symbol designation command is transmitted.

  For example, when it is determined in the winning-time effect processing described later that the “off” is to occur, the CPU 56 transmits a symbol designation command (symbol 1 designation command) in which “00 (H)” is set in the EXT data. Also, for example, when it is determined that “normal big hit” is to be made, the CPU 56 transmits a symbol designation command (symbol 2 designation command) in which “01 (H)” is set in the EXT data. In addition, for example, when it is determined that it becomes a “probable variation big hit”, the CPU 56 transmits a symbol designation command (symbol 3 designation command) in which “02 (H)” is set to the EXT data. In addition, for example, when it is determined that "the sudden probability big hit", the CPU 56 transmits a symbol designation command (symbol 4 designation command) in which "03 (H)" is set to the EXT data. Also, for example, when it is determined that "small hit" will be, the CPU 56 transmits a symbol designation command (symbol 5 designation command) in which "04 (H)" is set in the EXT data. The EXT data set in the symbol designation command and the EXT data set in the display result designation command may be shared. With such a configuration, it is possible to share data to be read out when setting the symbol specifying command and when setting the display result specifying command.

  FIG. 16 and FIG. 17 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of the content of the variation category command. As shown in FIG. 16 and FIG. 17, in this embodiment, which gaming state is, and which display result of the special symbol and the effect symbol is displayed, the random pattern determination random number at the start winning combination A value is set to the EXT data according to whether it is determined that the value of R falls within the range of any determination value, and the variation category command is transmitted.

  For example, when it is determined that the gaming state is normal and off at the start winning, the CPU 56 first determines whether the value of the variation pattern type determination random number will be 1 to 89 in step S232 of the prize effect processing described later. It is determined whether or not. When the value of the fluctuation pattern type determination random number is 1 to 89, the CPU 56 transmits a fluctuation category 1 command in which “00 (H)” is set to the EXT data. In this embodiment, when the gaming state is the normal state, the variation pattern type of non-reach CA2-1 is commonly assigned to the range of the judgment values 1 to 89 regardless of the total number of pending storages. Because of this, the effect control microcomputer 100 can recognize that at least the change pattern type becomes the non-reach CA2-1 based on the change category 1 command being received. Next, when the value of the fluctuation pattern type determination random number is 90 to 99, the CPU 56 transmits a fluctuation category 2 command in which “01 (H)” is set to the EXT data. Next, when the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is 100 to 169, the CPU 56 transmits a variation category 3 command in which “02 (H)” is set to the EXT data. Next, when the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is 170 to 199, the CPU 56 transmits a variation category 4 command in which “03 (H)” is set to the EXT data. Next, when the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is 200 to 214, the CPU 56 transmits a variation category 5 command in which “04 (H)” is set to the EXT data. Next, when the value of the fluctuation pattern type determination random number is 215 to 229, the CPU 56 transmits a fluctuation category 6 command in which “05 (H)” is set to the EXT data. Next, when the value of the fluctuation pattern type determination random number is 230 to 251, the CPU 56 transmits a fluctuation category 7 command in which “06 (H)” is set to the EXT data. In this embodiment, when the gaming state is the normal state, the variation pattern type of the super CA 2-5 is commonly assigned to the range of the determination value 230 to 251 regardless of the total number of pending storages. Because of this, the effect control microcomputer 100 can recognize that at least the change pattern type is super CA2-5 based on the reception of the change category 7 command.

  Specifically, the threshold values 89, 99, 169, 199, 214 and 229 used to determine which of the above variation categories belongs to the removal shown in FIGS. 10 (A) and 10 (B). The values are derived by picking up values that can be the boundaries of the range of the determination value assigned to each variation pattern type in the variation pattern type determination table. The same applies to the subsequent variation categories 8 to 9 and 21 to 29, and they are assigned to each variation pattern type in the variation pattern type determination table shown in FIGS. 9A to 9D and 10C. A threshold that is used for category determination is derived by picking up a value that may be a boundary of the range of the determined value.

  In addition, for example, when it is determined that the gaming state becomes a definite variation state or a short time state and a departure at the start winning, the CPU 56 first determines that the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is 1 in step S232 of the prize effect processing described later. It is determined whether or not .about.219. If the value of the fluctuation pattern type determination random number is 1 to 2 19 (that is, if it becomes the fluctuation pattern type of non-reach CA2-2), the CPU 56 sets fluctuation as “07 (H)” in the EXT data Send category 8 command. Next, the CPU 56 sets “08 (H)” in the EXT data when the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is 220 to 251 (that is, when it becomes the variation pattern type of the super CA 2-5) Send variation category 9 command.

  Note that, even when the gaming state is a definite change state or a short time state, the variation pattern type of the super CA 2-5 may be allocated to the range of the determination value 230 to 251. By doing so, it is possible to assign a common determination value to the variation pattern type of the super CA 2-5 regardless of the gaming state. Therefore, when performing the processing of step S232 of the processing of the effect at the time of winning, which will be described later, if it is a disconnection, the common determination processing may be performed regardless of the gaming state, and the program capacity can be further reduced. Further, in this case, the determination processing of the gaming state in step S226 can be made unnecessary.

  In addition, for example, when it is determined that “normal big hit” is determined at the start winning, the CPU 56 first determines whether the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is 1 to 74 in step S232 of the prize effect processing described later. Determine if If the value of the fluctuation pattern type determination random number is 1 to 74 (that is, if it is the fluctuation pattern type of normal CA 3-1), the CPU 56 sets fluctuation data in which “10 (H)” is set to the EXT data. 21 Send a command. Next, the CPU 56 sets “11 (H)” to the EXT data when the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is 75 to 149 (that is, when it becomes the variation pattern type of normal CA 3-2) Send variation category 22 command. Next, the CPU 56 sets “12 (H)” to the EXT data when the value of the fluctuation pattern type determination random number is 150 to 251 (that is, the case of the fluctuation pattern type of the super CA 3-3). Send variation category 23 command.

  In addition, for example, when it is determined that it becomes “probable big hit” at the start winning, the CPU 56 first determines whether the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is 1 to 38 in step S232 of the prize effect processing described later. Determine if If the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is 1 to 38 (that is, if it becomes the variation pattern type of normal CA 3-1), the CPU 56 sets the EXT data to “13 (H)” as the variation category Send 24 commands. Next, the CPU 56 sets “14 (H)” in the EXT data when the value of the fluctuation pattern type determination random number is 39 to 79 (that is, when it becomes the fluctuation pattern type of normal CA 3-2) Send variation category 25 command. Next, the CPU 56 sets “15 (H)” in the EXT data when the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is 80 to 251 (that is, when it becomes the variation pattern type of the super CA 3-3) Send variation category 26 command.

  Further, for example, when it is determined that the start winning combination suddenly becomes a definite positive big hit, the CPU 56 first determines whether or not the value of the variation pattern type determination random number becomes 1 to 100 in step S232 of the winning presentation processing described later. Determine If the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is 1 to 100 (that is, if it becomes the variation pattern type of special CA 4-1), the CPU 56 sets the EXT data to “16 (H)” as the variation category 27 Send a command. Next, if the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is 101 to 251 (that is, if it becomes the variation pattern type of special CA 4-2), the CPU 56 sets the EXT data to “17 (H)” as the variation category Send 28 commands.

  Further, for example, when it is determined that a small hit will be made at the start winning combination, the CPU 56 transmits a variation category 29 command in which “18 (H)” is set to the EXT data.

  It should be noted that since the total number of pending storages is not necessarily the same between when the winning determination is made at the start winning and when the variable display is actually started, the variation indicated by the winning determination result specification command It may also occur that the pattern type does not match the fluctuation pattern type actually used in the fluctuation display. However, in this embodiment, for at least non-reach CA2-1, super CA2-5 and super CA3-3 variation pattern types, common judgment values are allocated regardless of the total number of pending storages. There is no inconsistency between the winning determination result and the variation pattern type of the variation display actually executed (see FIGS. 9 and 10). Therefore, in this embodiment, the pending advance notice effect, which is a type of advance notice effect, is executed based on the determination result at the time of winning to become the variation pattern type of non-reach CA2-1, super CA2-5 or super CA3-3. Ru. The variation category command shown in FIGS. 16 and 17 (specifically, variation category 1 command, only when it is determined to be the variation pattern type of non-reach CA2-1, super CA2-5 and super CA3-3. The variation category 7 command, variation category 23 command, variation category 26 command only) may be transmitted, and the variation category command may not be transmitted in the case of the winning determination result of the other variation pattern types. In addition, when it is determined at the time of winning that it becomes other than non-reach CA2-1, super CA2-5 and super CA3-3, even if it transmits fluctuation category command which shows that fluctuation pattern classification can not be specified. Good.

  Note that “pre-reading advance notice effect” is an advance notice effect that is executed prior to the start of the variable display targeted for the notice effect. In this embodiment, as described later, when it is decided to execute the on-hold notice effect which is a type of advance notice effect when the start-up winning occurs, the on-hold display is normally performed (in this example, a white circle is displayed). And a final notice effect to be finally changed to a special display mode different from the above (in this example, a blue or red circular display). In this embodiment, when the hold notification effect is executed, the hold display does not directly change from the normal mode to the special display mode, but the hold display is a special display mode (in this example, a triangle display or a rectangular display) The effect presentation is executed at the timing of the subsequent suspension shift, and presentation may be performed in which the suspension display of the advance notice object changes to any of the special display modes. Hereinafter, the hold display displayed in the normal mode is also referred to as “normal hold”, and the hold display displayed in the special display mode is also referred to as “special hold”. The hold display displayed in the blue display color of the special display mode is also referred to as "blue hold", and the hold display displayed in the red display color is also referred to as "red hold".

  In addition to the reserved preview effects, the presentation mode of the preview advance notice effect is not limited to the one shown in this embodiment, and, for example, as a preview advance notice effect, the special display result such as the chance eye symbol continuously over plural variations Perform various effects such as performing an effect to stop display, performing an effect such as counting down over a plurality of changes, or performing an effect of changing the effect mode in such a manner that the background screen changes Is considered.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, a case is shown where the on-hold notice effect is executed so that only the display mode of the on-hold display can be changed, but, for example, the variable display currently being executed is displayed In the gaming machine configured to be able to display the active display corresponding to the display mode, even if the pending display is digested and the variable display of the advance object becomes in execution, the display mode of the active display can also be changed It may be configured.

  The effect control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the effect control CPU 101) mounted on the effect control board 80 receives the effect control command described above from the game control micro computer 560 mounted on the main board 31. Then, the display state of the effect display device 9 is changed according to the contents shown in FIG. 13 and FIG. 14, the display state of the lamp is changed, and the sound number data is output to the audio output board 70. Do.

  FIGS. 18 and 19 are flowcharts showing an example of a program of special symbol process processing (step S26) executed by the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) mounted on the main substrate 31. As described above, in the special symbol process processing, processing for controlling the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b and the special winning opening is executed. In the special symbol process processing, if the first start opening switch 13a for detecting that the game ball has won in the first start winning opening 13 is on in the special symbol process processing, that is, the start to the first start winning opening 13 If the winning is occurring, the first starting opening switch passing process is executed (steps S311 and S312). In addition, if the second starting opening switch 14a for detecting that the game ball has won in the second starting winning opening 14 is on, that is, the starting winning for the second starting winning opening 14 has occurred. Then, the second start port switch passage process is executed (steps S313 and S314). Then, one of the processes in steps S300 to S310 is performed. If the first start winning opening switch 13a or the second start opening switch 14a is not turned on, one of the processes in steps S300 to S310 is performed according to the internal state.

  The processes of steps S300 to S310 are the following processes.

  Special symbol normal processing (step S300): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 0. When the variable display of the special symbol can be started, the game control microcomputer 560 confirms the number of stored numerical data (total number of held memories) stored in the hold memory buffer. The storage number of the numerical data stored in the storage buffer can be confirmed by the count value of the total storage number counter. Also, if the count value of the combined holding memory number counter is not 0, it is determined whether or not the display result of the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is considered as a big hit. In the case of a big hit, the big hit flag is set. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (1 in this example) according to step S301. The big hit flag is reset when the big hit game is over.

  Fluctuation pattern setting processing (step S301): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 1. Also, the fluctuation pattern is determined, and the fluctuation time in the fluctuation pattern (variable display time: time from the start of variable display to the derivation display (stop display) of the display result) is the fluctuation time of the variable display of the special symbol Decide to do. Further, control is performed to transmit a variation pattern command corresponding to the determined variation pattern to the effect control microcomputer 100, and a variation time timer for measuring the variation time of the special symbol is started. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (2 in this example) corresponding to step S302.

  Display result designation command transmission processing (step S302): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 2. Control for transmitting a display result designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 is performed. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (3 in this example) corresponding to step S303.

  Special symbol variation processing (step S303): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 3. When the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern selected in the fluctuation pattern setting process has elapsed (when the fluctuation time timer set in step S301 times out, ie, the value of the fluctuation time timer becomes 0), the microcomputer 100 for effect control is determined Control to transmit a designated command is performed, and the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (4 in this example) corresponding to step S304. Note that the effect control microcomputer 100 controls so that the fourth symbol is stopped in the effect display device 9 when the symbol determination designating command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 560 is received.

  Special symbol stop processing (step S304): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 4. When the jackpot flag is set, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (5 in this example) corresponding to step S305. If the small hit flag is set, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (8 in this example) corresponding to step S308. If neither the big hit flag nor the small hit flag is set, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (0 in this example) corresponding to step S300. In this embodiment, the special symbol display control for stopping and displaying the stop symbol of the special symbol in the special symbol display control process, as will be described later, based on the value of the special symbol process flag being 4 will be described later. Data is set in the output buffer for special symbol display control data setting (see FIG. 30), and the stop symbol of the special symbol is actually stopped and displayed in the display control processing of step S22 according to the setting contents of the output buffer.

  Special winning opening opening pre-processing (step S305): is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is five. In the special winning opening open processing, control is performed to open the special winning opening. Specifically, a counter (for example, a counter that counts the number of gaming balls that have entered the special winning opening) is initialized, and the solenoid 21 is driven to open the special winning opening. In addition, while performing control which transmits the special winning a prize opening opening designated command to the micro-computer 100 for production control, the execution time of the special winning a prize opening opening processing is set with the timer, internal state (special symbol process flag) step S306 Update to the value corresponding to (6 in this example). The big winning opening opening pre-processing is executed for each round, but when starting the first round, the big winning opening opening pre-processing is also processing for starting a big hit game. Further, since the special winning opening open designation command is transmitted with the value specifying the round set in the EXT data, the different special winning opening opening designation command is transmitted every round. For example, when executing the first round in the big hit game, the large winning opening opening designated command (A101 (H)) for specifying the round 1 is transmitted, and when executing the tenth round in the big hit game , A special winning opening opening specification command (A10A (H)) for specifying round 10 is transmitted.

  Large winning opening open processing (step S306): is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 6. In the special winning opening open processing, processing for confirming the establishment of the closing condition of the special winning opening is performed. When the closing condition of the special winning opening is satisfied and there are still remaining rounds, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (5 in this example) corresponding to step S305. In addition, while performing control which transmits the specified command after the opening in the big hit to the microcomputer 100 for production control, when all rounds are finished, internal state (special symbol process flag) the value which corresponds to step S307 (this value In the example, update to 7).

  Big hit end processing (step S307): is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 7. Control is performed to cause the effect control microcomputer 100 to perform display control to notify the player that the big hit gaming state has ended. In addition, processing is performed to set a flag indicating the gaming state (for example, a probability change flag or a time saving flag). Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (0 in this example) corresponding to step S300.

  Small hit opening pre-processing (step S308): is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 8. In the small hit opening pre-processing, control is performed to open the big winning opening. Specifically, a counter (for example, a counter that counts the number of gaming balls that have entered the special winning opening) is initialized, and the solenoid 21 is driven to open the special winning opening. Further, the execution time of the special winning opening open process is set by the timer, and the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (9 in this example) corresponding to step S309. In addition, small hit opening pre-processing is executed for each opening of the big winning opening in the small hit game, but when starting the first open in the small hit game, the small hit opening pre-processing is the small hit game It is also a process to start.

  Small hit open processing (step S309): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is nine. Perform processing such as confirming the establishment of the closing condition of the special winning opening. If the closing condition of the special winning opening is satisfied and the number of opening of the special winning opening still remains, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is set to the value corresponding to step S308 (8 in this example). Update. In addition, when all opening is finished, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (10 in this example) corresponding to step S310.

  Small hit end processing (step S310): is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 10. A control is performed to cause the effect control microcomputer 100 to perform display control to notify the player that the small hit gaming state has ended. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (0 in this example) corresponding to step S300.

  FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing the starting opening switch passing process of steps S312 and S314. Among these, FIG. 20A is a flowchart showing the first starting opening switch passage process of step S312. FIG. 20B is a flowchart showing the second starting opening switch passage process of step S314.

  First, the first starting opening switch passage process will be described with reference to FIG. In the first starting opening switch passage process executed when the first starting opening switch 13a is in the on state, the CPU 56 first determines whether the first pending storage number has reached the upper limit value (specifically, 1) Check whether the value of the first pending storage number counter for counting the number of pending storages is 4) (step S1211A). If the first pending storage number has reached the upper limit value, the process ends.

  If the first pending storage number has not reached the upper limit value, the CPU 56 increases the value of the first pending storage number counter by 1 (step S1212A) and the value of the total pending storage number counter for counting the total pending storage number Is increased by 1 (step S1213A). Next, the CPU 56 executes a process of extracting values from the random number circuit 503 and the counter for generating software random numbers and storing them in the storage area in the first hold storage buffer (see FIG. 21) (step S1214A) . In the process of step S1214A, hardware R random number R (big hit determination random number), software random number big hit type determination random number (random 1), variation pattern type determination random number (random 2) and variation pattern The judgment random number (random 3) is extracted and stored in the storage area. In addition, it does not extract the random number for fluctuation pattern judgment (random 3) in the 1st starting opening switch passage processing (at the time of starting winning combination) and store in advance in the preservation area, it extracts at the start of fluctuation of the first special symbol. You may do so. For example, the game control microcomputer 560 may directly extract a value from the variation pattern determination random number counter for generating a variation pattern determination random number (random 3) in the variation pattern setting process described later.

  FIG. 21 is an explanatory view showing a configuration example of a region (pending storage buffer) for saving random numbers and the like corresponding to the pending storage. As shown in FIG. 21, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit (4 in this example) of the first number of pending storages is secured in the first pending storage buffer. In the second hold storage buffer, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit (4 in this example) of the second hold storage number is secured. In this embodiment, the first holding storage buffer and the second holding storage buffer may be hardware random numbers random R (big hit determination random numbers), software random numbers big hit type determination random numbers (random 1), variation A random number for pattern type determination (random 2) and a random number for variation pattern determination (random 3) are stored. The first holding storage buffer and the second holding storage buffer are formed in the RAM 55.

  Next, the CPU 56 checks whether the time-shortening flag indicating that the gaming state is the time-shortening state is set (step S1215A). If it is set, the process directly proceeds to step S1220A. If the time saving flag is not set, the CPU 56 checks whether the value of the special symbol process flag is 5 or more (step S1216A). If the value of the special symbol process flag is 5 or more (that is, if it is the big hit gaming state or the small hitting gaming state), the CPU 56 proceeds to step S1220A as it is.

  If the value of the special symbol process flag is less than 5, the prize effect processing is executed to determine in advance the fluctuation display result and fluctuation pattern type when the fluctuation based on the detected start winning is subsequently executed (step) (step S1217A). Then, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit the symbol designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 based on the determination result of the effect processing at the time of winning (step S1218A) and transmits the variation category command to the effect control microcomputer 100. Control is performed (step S1219A). In addition, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit the first hold storage number addition designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S1220A).

  In this embodiment, by executing the processing of steps S1218A and S1219A, the CPU 56 always specifies a symbol every time the first start winning opening 13 is start-up winning and the winning-time effect processing of step S1217A is executed. Both the command and the variation category command are transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100.

  Further, in this embodiment, when the process of steps S1218A to S1220A is executed, a start winning on first start winning opening 13 occurs and a winning at-a-time effect process of step S1217A is executed. A set of three commands of a command, a variation category command, and a first pending storage count addition designation command is sent collectively in one timer interrupt.

  However, if it is determined in step S 1215 A or step S 1216 A that Y was not determined to be executed in step S 1217 A, the CPU 56 controls to transmit only the first pending storage count addition specification command in step S 1220 A. Control is not performed to transmit the determination result specifying command (design designation command, variation category command) at the time of winning. It should be noted that when the winning effect process of step S1217A is not executed, a value indicating the incompletion determination result can not be specified (for example, "FF (H)") is set as the EXT data specification result specification A command (design designation command, variation category command) may be transmitted.

  Further, in this embodiment, when there is a start winning on the first start winning opening 13 by executing the processing of step S1215A, the winning of step S1217A is performed only when the gaming state is the normal state. The hour effect process is executed. Moreover, in this embodiment, when there is a start winning on the first start winning opening 13 by executing the processing of step S1216A, step S1217A is performed only when it is not the big hit gaming state or the small hitting gaming state. At the time of winning the effect processing is executed. It should be noted that the process may not shift to step S 1217 A only in the big hit gaming state, and may shift to step S 1217 A to execute the prize effect processing in the small hit gaming state.

  In this embodiment, the jackpot gaming state (specific gaming state) is a control that the jackpot is opened for a predetermined number of rounds (for example, 15 rounds) after being notified that the jackpot is started. It is a state until it is notified that the opening of the big winning opening of the final round is finished and the end of the big hit is notified. Specifically, the processing from the big winning opening opening pre-processing (see step S305) to the big hit end processing (see step S307) in the special symbol process processing is being executed.

  Next, the second starting opening switch passage process will be described with reference to FIG. 20 (B). In the second starting opening switch passage process executed when the second starting opening switch 14a is in the on state, the CPU 56 determines whether the second number of pending storages has reached the upper limit (specifically, the second pending opening). Whether or not the value of the second pending storage number counter for counting the storage number is 4) is confirmed (step S1211 B). If the second pending storage number has reached the upper limit value, the process ends.

  If the second pending storage number has not reached the upper limit value, the CPU 56 increases the value of the second pending storage number counter by 1 (step S1212B) and the value of the total pending storage number counter for counting the total pending storage number Is increased by 1 (step S1213B). Next, the CPU 56 executes a process of extracting values from the random number circuit 503 and the counter for generating software random numbers and storing them in the storage area in the second hold storage buffer (see FIG. 21) (step S1214B) . In the process of step S1214B, hardware R random number R (big hit determination random number), software random number big hit type determination random number (random 1), variation pattern type determination random number (random 2) and variation pattern The judgment random number (random 3) is extracted and stored in the storage area. In addition, it does not extract the random number for fluctuation pattern judgment (random 3) in the 2nd starting opening switch passage processing (at the time of starting winning combination) and store in advance in the preservation area, it extracts at the time of the fluctuation start of the second special symbol You may do so. For example, the game control microcomputer 560 may directly extract a value from the variation pattern determination random number counter for generating a variation pattern determination random number (random 3) in the variation pattern setting process described later.

  Next, the CPU 56 executes a prize effect process (step S1217B). Then, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit the symbol designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 based on the determination result of the effect processing at the time of winning (step S1218 B), and transmits the variation category command to the effect control microcomputer 100. Control is performed (step S1219B). In addition, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a second reserve storage number addition designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S1220B).

  In this embodiment, by executing the processing of steps S1218 B and S1219 B, the CPU 56 always specifies a symbol every time the second start winning opening 14 is start-up winning and the winning-time effect processing of step S1217 B is executed. Both the command and the variation category command are transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100.

  Further, in this embodiment, when the start winning at the second start winning opening 14 is generated by executing the processing of steps S1218 B to S1220 B and the winning at presentation processing of step S1217 B is executed, symbol designation is performed. A set of three commands of a command, a variation category command, and a second pending storage count addition designation command is sent collectively in one timer interrupt.

  In the second start port switch passage processing, the same processing as step S1215A is performed, and if time saving state (including control to be in time saving state as well as positive change state) is executed, the effect processing in step S1217B is executed. You may not do. That is, only when it is the normal state, the winning a prize production process of step S1217B may be executed to transmit the symbol designation command and the variation category command. In this embodiment, as described later, since the prefetch advance notice effect is executed only for the second hold storage when in the time saving state, conversely, only when it is in the time saving state, the time of winning of step S1217B Perform rendering processing to transmit symbol designation command and variation category command, and if it is in the normal state, do not execute symbol presentation command in step S1217B and do not send symbol designation command and variation category command It is also good.

  Further, also in the second starting opening switch passing process, the same process as step S1216A may be performed, and when in the big hit game, the effect process at the time of winning in step S1217B may not be executed. In addition, in the second starting opening switch passing processing, it is possible not to execute the winning a prize production processing of step S1217 B (that is, it is possible not to perform the winning a prize determination processing for the second special symbol) . With such a configuration, it is possible to reliably prevent the preview notice effect from being interrupted halfway because the fluctuation time is short when the prefetch notice effect is performed for a certain period of time.

  FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing a prize-time effect process of steps S1217A and S1217B. In the prize effect processing, the CPU 56 first compares the jackpot determination random number (random R) extracted in steps S1214A and S1214B with the normal jackpot determination value shown in the left column of FIG. It is checked whether they match (step S220). In this embodiment, it is determined whether or not to make a big hit or a small hit in the special symbol normal processing, which will be described later, at the timing of starting the variation of the special symbol and the production symbol, the big hit type or the variation pattern setting processing However, before the variation display based on the start winning is started at the timing when the game ball is started to the first starting winning opening 13 or the second starting winning opening 14. It is confirmed in advance whether or not a big hit or a small hit, the type of the big hit, and the value of the variation pattern type determination random number fall within the range of any judgment value by executing the winning presentation process. By doing so, the fluctuation display result and the fluctuation pattern type are predicted in advance before the fluctuation display of the effect pattern is executed, and the microcomputer for effect control is based on the judgment result at the time of winning as described later. Execute a pending advance notice effect to predict that it will be a big hit or a super reach during the change display of the production design by 100.

  If the jackpot determination random number (random R) does not match the normal jackpot determination value (N in step S220), the CPU 56 sets a probability change flag indicating that the gaming state is the high probability state (probable change state) Whether or not it is confirmed (step S221). If the probability change flag is set, the CPU 56 compares the jackpot determination random number (random R) extracted in steps S1214A and S1214B with the jackpot determination value at the probability change shown in the right column of FIG. Are checked to see if they match (step S222). It should be noted that there is a possibility that a plurality of variable displays will be executed from when it is confirmed in step S221 whether or not it is a positive change condition at the start winning combination and the variable display based on the starting winning combination is actually started. There is. Therefore, the game state changes (for example, the change start) until the variable display based on the start change is actually started after it is confirmed in step S221 whether the start change is a definite change state or not. In the case where a definite big hit or a sudden positive big hit has occurred before, it changes from the normal state to the positive change state. Therefore, the gaming state determined in step S221 at the start winning is not necessarily the same as the gaming state (see step S61 described later) determined at the start of fluctuation. In addition, in order to prevent such non-coincidence, a game with a change of gaming state in the currently stored holding memory is specified, and determination at the time of starting winning is performed based on the gaming state after the change. It is also good.

  If the big hit determination random number (random R) does not match the big hit determination value at the time of definite variation (N in step S222), the CPU 56 determines the big hit determination random number (random R) extracted in steps S1214A and S1214B and FIG. The small hit determination values shown in (C) and (C) are compared, and it is confirmed whether they match (step S223). In this case, when there is a start winning on the first start winning opening 13 (when the in-winning effect processing of step S 1217 A is executed), the CPU 56 determines the small hitting determination table (first one shown in FIG. 8B). It is determined whether it matches with the small hit judgment value set in (for special symbol). In addition, when there is a start winning to the second start winning opening 14 (when performing the winning processing at step S1217 B), a small hit determination table (for the second special symbol) shown in FIG. 8 (C) It is determined whether or not it matches the small hit determination value set in.

  If the jackpot determination random number (random R) does not match the small hit determination value (N in step S223), the CPU 56 sets the EXT data "00 (H)" indicating that it becomes "off" as the symbol designation command Processing is performed (step S224).

  Next, the CPU 56 performs processing to determine the current gaming state (step S225). In this embodiment, the CPU 56 determines in step S225 whether or not the gaming state is a definite change state and whether or not the time saving state (specifically, whether the positive change flag and the time saving flag are set) Determine In addition, after confirming whether or not the vehicle is in the definite variation state and the time saving state in step S225 at the start winning combination, a plurality of variable displays are actually started until the variation display based on the starting winning combination is actually started. Variable display may be performed. Therefore, the game state changes in the period from when it is confirmed in step S225 whether or not it is a definite change state and whether it is a short time state at the start winning combination, until the variable display based on the starting winning combination is actually started. (For example, when a definite big hit or a sudden positive big hit occurs before the start of fluctuation, it may change from the normal state to the positive change state). Therefore, the gaming state determined in step S225 at the start winning is not necessarily the same as the gaming state (see step S61 described later) determined at the start of fluctuation. In addition, in order to prevent such non-coincidence, a game with a change of gaming state in the currently stored holding memory is specified, and determination at the time of starting winning is performed based on the gaming state after the change. It is also good.

  Then, the CPU 56 sets each threshold for removal in accordance with the determination result of step S225 (step S226). In this embodiment, a threshold value determination program for performing threshold value determination in advance is incorporated, and the value of the variation pattern type determination random number falls within the range of any determination value by determining whether it is larger than the threshold value. Is determined, and the value of the EXT data to be set in the variation category command shown in FIGS. 16 and 17 is determined.

  For example, the CPU 56 sets the threshold 219 when it is determined that the gaming state is a definite change state or a short time state. In this case, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is less than or equal to the threshold 219 in step S232 described later, and the value is less than or equal to the threshold 219 (ie, when it is 1 to 219). Determines that “07 (H)” is set as EXT data of the variation category command (see FIG. 16). When it is not the threshold 219 or less (that is, when it is 220-251), it is determined that “08 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variation category command (see FIG. 16).

  In addition, for example, when the CPU 56 determines that the gaming state is the normal state, the CPU sets thresholds 89, 99, 169, 199, 214, and 229 regardless of the total number of pending storages. In this case, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is equal to or less than the threshold 89 in step S232 described later, and the value is equal to or less than the threshold 89 (that is, 1 to 89). Determines that “00 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variation category command (see FIG. 16). When the threshold is 99 or less (that is, 90 to 99), it is determined that “01 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variation category command (see FIG. 16). When the threshold is 169 or less (ie, 100 to 169), it is determined to set “02 (H)” as the EXT data of the variation category command (see FIG. 16). When the threshold is 199 or less (that is, 170 to 199), it is determined to set "03 (H)" as the EXT data of the variation category command (see FIG. 16). If the threshold is equal to or less than the threshold 214 (ie, if it is 200 to 214), it is determined that "04 (H)" is set as the EXT data of the variation category command (see FIG. 16). If the threshold is 229 or less (ie, if it is 215 to 229), it is determined that “05 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variation category command (see FIG. 16). If the threshold value is not 229 or less (i.e., if it is 230 to 251), it is determined that "06 (H)" is set as the EXT data of the variation category command (see FIG. 16).

  In the example of threshold determination shown above, 89, 99, 169, 199, 214 and 229 are determined in ascending order of the threshold value, so the one determined with the later order threshold is the previous one. It does not fall within the range below the order threshold. That is, after it is determined whether or not the threshold value is 89 or less, when it is determined whether or not the threshold value is 99 or less, it does not fall within the range of 1 to 89 which is less than or equal to the threshold value of the previous order. It is determined whether or not it is in the range of Also, in this embodiment, a case is shown where determination is made as 89, 99, 169, 199, 214 and 229 in order of decreasing threshold value, but conversely, 229, 214, 199, in order of decreasing threshold value. It may be determined as 169, 99 and 89. The same applies to the case of performing determination using other threshold values described below.

  Note that the threshold in the normal state may always be set without performing the determination of the gaming state in step S225. Even with such a configuration, the range of the determination value is common to at least the variation pattern type for “non-reach out” and the variation pattern type for “super reach”, so “non-reach It can be determined whether or not it becomes "off" or "super reach".

  When the jackpot determination random number (random R) matches the small hit determination value (Y in step S223), the CPU 56 designates EXT data "04 (H)" indicating that the "small hit" will be a symbol designation command A process of setting to is performed (step S227).

  Next, the CPU 56 sets a small hit threshold (step S228). In this embodiment, the CPU 56 sets the threshold 251, and determines in step S232 described later that the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is equal to or less than the threshold 251 (which is 1 to 251). It is determined that “18 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variation category command (see FIG. 17). In the case of a small hit, it may be determined to set the EXT data “18 (H)” as it is without performing the threshold determination.

  If the jackpot determination random number (random R) matches the jackpot determination value in step S220 or step S222, the CPU 56 determines the jackpot type based on the jackpot type determination random number (random 1) extracted in steps S1214A and S1214B. Is determined (step S229). In this case, when there is a start winning on the first start winning opening 13 (when the winning at-step presentation processing in step S1217A is executed), the CPU 56 determines the big hit type determination table (first one shown in FIG. 8D). Using the special symbol) 131a, it is determined whether the jackpot type is "normal big hit", "probably big hit" or "suddenly big hit". In addition, when there is a start winning to the second start winning opening 14 (when performing the winning processing process at step S1217 B), the jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol) shown in FIG. 8 (E) Using 131 b, it is determined whether the big hit type is “normal big hit”, “probably big hit” or “suddenly big hit”.

  Next, the CPU 56 performs processing for setting EXT data according to the determination result of the big hit type in the symbol designation command (step S230). In this case, when it is determined that "normal big hit" is to be performed, the CPU 56 performs processing of setting EXT data "01 (H)" indicating that "normal big hit" is to be made to the symbol designation command. Further, when it is determined that the "certain variation big hit" is to be performed, the CPU 56 performs processing of setting the EXT data "02 (H)" indicating that the "probability variation big hit" is to be made to the symbol designation command. If it is determined that "suddenly a probability change big hit" is found, the CPU 56 performs a process of setting EXT data "03 (H)" indicating that "sudden change probability big hit" will be made as a symbol designation command.

  And CPU56 sets each threshold value for big hit according to the big hit classification determined at Step S229 (Step S231).

  For example, the CPU 56 sets the threshold values 74 and 149 when it determines that "normal big hit". In this case, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is equal to or less than the threshold 74 in step S232 described later, and the value is equal to or less than the threshold 74 (that is, 1 to 74). Determines that “10 (H)” is set as EXT data of the variation category command (see FIG. 17). When the threshold is 149 or less (ie, 75 to 149), it is determined to set “11 (H)” as the EXT data of the variation category command (see FIG. 17). In addition, when it is not the threshold value 149 or less (ie, when it is 150 to 251), it is determined to set "12 (H)" as the EXT data of the variation category command (see FIG. 17).

  In addition, for example, when the CPU 56 determines that the “probable big hit” is made, the CPU 56 sets the threshold values 38 and 79. In this case, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is less than or equal to the threshold 38 in step S232 described later, and the value is less than or equal to the threshold 38 (ie, 1 to 38). Determines that “13 (H)” is set as EXT data of the variation category command (see FIG. 17). When the threshold is 79 or less (that is, 39 to 79), it is determined that "14 (H)" is set as the EXT data of the variation category command (see FIG. 17). When the threshold is not 79 or less (ie, 80 to 251), it is determined to set “15 (H)” as the EXT data of the variation category command (see FIG. 17).

  Also, for example, when the CPU 56 determines that "a sudden probability big hit", the threshold value 100 is set. In this case, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is less than or equal to the threshold 100 in step S232 described later, and the value is less than or equal to the threshold 100 (i.e., 1 to 100). Determines that “16 (H)” is to be set as EXT data of the variation category command (see FIG. 17). If the threshold value is not 100 or less (ie, if it is 101 to 251), it is determined that "17 (H)" is set as the EXT data of the variation category command (see FIG. 17).

  Next, the CPU 56 uses the threshold set in steps S226, S228 and S231 and the random number for fluctuation pattern type determination (random 2) extracted in steps S1214A and S1214B to determine which of the values of the random number for fluctuation pattern type judgment It is determined whether the range is the determination value (step S232).

  In steps S226, S228, and S231, the fluctuation pattern type determination table (see FIGS. 9 and 10) is set instead of setting a predetermined threshold value, and the set fluctuation pattern type in step S232. The range of the value of the variation pattern type determination random number or any variation pattern type may be determined using the determination table.

  Then, the CPU 56 performs a process of setting EXT data according to the determination result as a variation category command (step S233). Specifically, the CPU 56 selects one of “00 (H)” to “08 (H)”, “10 (H)”, and “10 (H)” as shown in FIGS. (H) “18 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variation category command.

  In this embodiment, even when it is determined that a big hit or a small hit is determined in the winning determination, it is uniformly determined whether the value of the variation pattern type determination random number falls within which range. If it is determined that a big hit or a small hit will be made, the range of the value of the variation pattern type determination random number may not be determined. Then, a symbol designating command indicating that it is determined that the winning is determined to be a big hit or a small hit may be transmitted, and a variation category command indicating comprehensively a variation pattern type of a big hit or a small hit may be transmitted. . And, for example, although it is not shown up to which variation pattern type specifically the microcomputer 100 for effect control, it is indicated that the variation pattern type comprehensively becomes any of the big hit variation pattern types On the basis of the reception of the category command, an on-hold notice effect to be described later may be executed.

  FIG.23 and FIG.24 is a flowchart which shows the special symbol normal processing (step S300) in a special symbol process processing. In the special symbol normal processing, the CPU 56 confirms the value of the total number of pending storages (step S51). Specifically, it checks the count value of the combined pending storage number counter. If the total number of pending storages is 0, if the customer waiting demo specification command has not been transmitted yet, control is performed to transmit the customer waiting demonstration specification command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S51A), and the process is performed. finish. For example, when transmitting the customer waiting demo specification command in step S51A, the CPU 56 sets a customer waiting demonstration specification command transmitted flag indicating that the customer waiting demo specification command has been transmitted. Then, when executing the special symbol normal processing after the next timer interruption after transmitting the customer waiting demo specification command, the customer waiting demonstration instruction command completed flag is set and the customer waiting is repeated. Control may be performed so as not to send a demo specification command. Also, in this case, the customer waiting demo specification command transmitted flag may be reset when the next time the variable display of the special symbol is started.

  If the total number of pending storages is not 0, the CPU 56 checks whether the second pending storage number is 0 or not (step S52). Specifically, it is checked whether the value of the second pending storage number counter is 0 or not. If the second pending storage number is not 0, the CPU 56 is a special symbol pointer (a flag indicating whether the special symbol process processing is performed for the first special symbol or the special symbol process processing is performed for the second special symbol) The data which shows "the 2nd" is set to (step S53). If the second pending storage number is 0 (ie, only the first pending storage number has been accumulated), the CPU 66 sets data indicating "first" in the special symbol pointer (step S54).

  In this embodiment, by performing the processes of steps S52 to S54, the variable display of the second special symbol is executed with priority over the variable display of the first special symbol. In other words, the second start condition for starting the variation display of the second special symbol is controlled to be established in preference to the first start condition for starting the variation display of the first special symbol. In addition, the variation display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is executed not only in the mode shown in this embodiment, but in the order of winning on the first start winning opening 13 and the second starting winning opening 14, for example. It may be configured.

  In addition, when it is comprised so that priority is given and the fluctuation display of the 2nd special symbol is performed as shown in this embodiment, in the winning a prize processing process shown in FIG. Only the process of comparing the value with the big hit determination value in the low probability state may be executed, and the value may not be compared with the big hit determination value in the positive change state (specifically, only the process of step S220 is performed , And the processes of steps S221 and S222 may not be performed). With such a configuration, when the second special symbol is configured to be executed with priority, it is between the determination result of the big hit in the winning determination and the determination result of the big hit at the start of the actual change. Deviation can be prevented from occurring.

  Next, the CPU 56 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the number 1 of pending storages indicated by the special symbol pointer in the RAM 55 and stores it in the random number buffer area of the RAM 55 (step S55). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 56 each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the first number of pending storages = 1 in the first pending storage buffer. Are read out and stored in the random number buffer area of the RAM 55. In addition, when the special symbol pointer indicates "the second", the CPU 56 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the second number of pending storages = 1 in the second pending storage buffer. It is stored in the random number buffer area of the RAM 55.

  Then, the CPU 56 subtracts one from the count value of the reserved storage number counter of the one indicated by the special symbol pointer, and shifts the contents of each storage area (step S56). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 56 subtracts one from the count value of the first pending storage number counter, and for each saving area in the first pending storage buffer. Shift the content. If the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the count value of the second hold storage number counter is decremented by 1, and the contents of the respective save areas in the second hold storage buffer are shifted.

  That is, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 56 stores the storage area corresponding to the first number of pending storages = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the first pending storage buffer of the RAM 55. The stored random number values are stored in the storage area corresponding to the first pending storage number = n-1. In addition, when the special symbol pointer indicates "the second", each stored in the storage area corresponding to the second number of pending storages = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the second pending storage buffer of the RAM 55 The random number value is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second pending storage number = n-1. Therefore, the order in which the random number values stored in the respective storage areas corresponding to the respective first pending storage numbers (or the respective second pending storage numbers) are extracted is always the first pending storage number (or It agrees with the order of the 2nd pending memory number) = 1, 2, 3, and 4.

  Then, the CPU 56 decreases the value of the total number of pending storages by one. That is, the count value of the total number of pending storages is decremented by 1 (step S58). Note that the CPU 56 stores the value of the combined pending storage number counter before the count value is decremented by 1 in a predetermined area of the RAM 55.

  Further, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a background designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 in accordance with the current gaming state (step S60). In this case, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a definite change state background designation command when a positive change flag indicating that the change is in the positive change state is set. Also, the CPU 56 sets only the time-shortening flag indicating that the time-shortening state is set, and performs control to transmit a time-shortening state background designation command when the probability change flag is not set. In addition, the CPU 56 performs control of transmitting a normal state background designation command if neither the positive variation flag nor the short time flag is set.

  Specifically, when transmitting the effect control command to the effect control microcomputer 100, the CPU 56 sets the address of a command transmission table (predetermined for each command in the ROM) corresponding to the effect control command. Set to pointer. Then, the address of the command transmission table corresponding to the effect control command is set to the pointer, and the effect control command is transmitted in the effect control command control process (step S28). In this embodiment, when starting the variation of the special symbol, the background designation command, the variation pattern command, the display result designation command, the pending storage number subtraction designated command (the first pending storage number subtraction) for each timer interrupt It is transmitted to the microcomputer 100 for presentation control in the order of the designated command or the second reserved storage number subtraction designated command). Specifically, when starting the variation of the special symbol, first, the background designation command is sent, the variation pattern command is sent after 4 ms, the display result designation command is sent after 4 ms, and after 4 ms, A pending storage number subtraction designation command (a first pending storage number subtraction designation command or a second pending storage number subtraction designation command) is transmitted. In addition, when starting the variation of the special symbol, the symbol variation specification command (1st symbol variation specification command, 2nd symbol variation specification command) is also transmitted, but the symbol variation specification command is the same timer interrupt as the variation pattern command Are transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100.

  In the special symbol normal processing, first, the data indicating the "first" indicating that the processing is performed targeting the first start winning opening 13; that is, the processing indicating that the processing is executed for the first special symbol Data indicating "" or data indicating "second" indicating that the processing is to be performed on the second start winning opening 14, that is, "second" indicating that the processing is to be performed on the second special symbol Data is set to the special symbol pointer. And in subsequent processing in special symbol process processing, processing according to data set to a special symbol pointer is performed. Therefore, the processing of steps S300 to S310 can be made common to the case of targeting the first special symbol and the case of targeting the second special symbol.

  Next, the CPU 56 reads the random R (random hit determination random number) from the random number buffer area and executes the big hit determination module. In this case, the CPU 56 is for the big hit determination stored in advance in the first holding storage buffer or the second holding storage buffer extracted in step S1214A of the first starting opening switch passing processing or in step S1214B of the second starting opening switch passing processing. Read the random number and make a big hit judgment. The big hit judgment module compares the predetermined big hit judgment value or the small hit judgment value (see FIG. 8) with the jackpot judgment random number, and executes processing for deciding to be a big hit or a small hit if they match. Is a program that That is, it is a program that executes the process of the big hit determination and the small hit determination.

  In the process of the big hit determination, when the gaming state is a definite change state, the probability of becoming a big hit is higher than in the case where the gaming state is a non-deterministic change state (normal state or time saving state). Specifically, the probability variation time jackpot determination table (the table on the right side of FIG. 8A in ROM 54 is set) and the number of jackpot determination values are probability variation A normal-time big hit determination table (a table in which the numerical value on the left side of FIG. 8A in the ROM 54 is set) is provided, which is set smaller than the time big hit determination table. Then, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the gaming state is a definite change state, and when the gaming state is a definite change state, processing of the determination of the big hit using the big change determination table at the positive change time, the gaming state is normal When it is in the state, processing of the determination of the big hit is performed using the big hit determination table at the normal time. That is, when the value of the jackpot determination random number (random R) matches any of the jackpot determination values shown in FIG. 8A, the CPU 56 determines that the special symbol is to be a jackpot. If it is determined to be a big hit (step S61), the process proceeds to step S71. In addition, deciding whether or not to make a big hit means to decide whether or not to shift to a big hit gaming state, but to decide whether to make a stop symbol in a special symbol display as a big hit symbol or not It is also.

  In addition, confirmation of whether the present game state is a definite change state is performed by whether the positive change flag is set. The probability change flag is set when shifting the gaming state to the probability change state, and is reset when ending the probability change state. Specifically, it is determined to be “probably big hit” or “suddenly big hit” and is set in the process of ending the big hit game. And, after the big hit game end, it is reset when the next big hit occurs.

  If the value of the jackpot determination random number (random R) does not match any of the jackpot determination values (N in step S61), the CPU 56 uses the small hit determination table (see FIGS. 8B and 8C). And perform a small hit determination process. That is, when the value of the jackpot determination random number (random R) matches any of the small hit determination values shown in FIGS. 8B and 8C, the CPU 56 determines that the special symbol is to be a small hit. In this case, the CPU 56 confirms the data indicated by the special symbol pointer, and when the data indicated by the special symbol pointer is "first", the small hit determination table (for the first special symbol shown in FIG. 8B) Use) to decide whether to make a small hit or not. In addition, when the data indicated by the special symbol pointer is "second", it is determined whether or not the small hit is made using the small hit determination table (for the second special symbol) shown in Fig. 8C. . Then, when it is determined to make the small hit (step S62), the CPU 56 sets a small hit flag indicating that the small hit is made (step S63), and the process proceeds to step S75.

  If the value of the random R does not match either the big hit determination value or the small hit determination value (N in step S62), that is, if it is a loss, the process directly proceeds to step S75.

  In step S71, the CPU 56 sets a big hit flag indicating that it is a big hit. Then, the big hit type determination table indicated by the special symbol pointer is selected as a table used to determine the big hit type to any one of a plurality of types (step S72). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 56 selects the jackpot type determination table 131a for the first special symbol shown in FIG. 8 (D). When the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the CPU 56 selects the jackpot type determination table 131b for the second special symbol shown in FIG. 8 (E).

  Next, using the selected big hit type determination table, the CPU 56 uses the type (“normal big hit”, “probable variation”) corresponding to the value matching the value of the random number (random 1) for big hit type determination stored in the random number buffer area. A "big hit" or "a sudden definite big hit" is determined as the type of big hit (step S73). In this case, the CPU 56 determines the jackpot type that is extracted in step S1214A of the first start port switch passing process and step S1214B of the second start port switch passing process and stored in advance in the first hold storage buffer or the second hold storage buffer. Read the random number and decide the big hit type. Also, in this case, as shown in FIGS. 8 (D) and 8 (E), when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, it is compared with the case where the variable display of the second special symbol is executed. Suddenly, the probability that a big hit is selected is high.

  Further, the CPU 56 sets data indicating the determined type of the big hit in the big hit type buffer in the RAM 55 (step S74). For example, when the big hit type is "normal big hit", "01" is set as data indicating the big hit type, and when the big hit type is "probable variation big hit", "02" is set as data indicating the big hit type, When the big hit type is "suddenly, there is a definite variation big hit", "03" is set as data indicating the big hit type.

  Next, the CPU 56 determines the stop symbol of the special symbol (step S75). Specifically, when neither the big hit flag nor the small hit flag is set, "-" which is an out pattern is determined as the stop symbol of the special symbol. When the big hit flag is set, according to the determination result of the big hit type, it decides the stop design of the special symbol “1”, “3”, “7” which becomes the big hit symbol. That is, when the big hit type is determined to be "suddenly positive variation big hit", "1" is determined to be the stop symbol of the special symbol, and when "big hit" is determined, the "3" is determined to be the stop symbol of the special symbol And, when it is decided to be "probable variation big hit", "7" is decided to be the stop symbol of the special symbol. When the small hit flag is set, the small hit symbol "5" is determined as the special symbol stop symbol.

  In this embodiment, the big hit type is determined first, and the case of determining the stop symbol of the special symbol corresponding to the determined big hit type is shown, but the method of determining the big hit type and the stop symbol of the special symbol is It is not limited to what has been shown in the embodiment. For example, a table in which the stop symbol of the special symbol and the big hit type are associated in advance is prepared, and the stop symbol of the special symbol is first determined based on the big hit type determination random number, the corresponding big hit based on the determination result The type may also be determined.

  Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (step S301) (step S76).

  FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing variation pattern setting processing (step S301) in the special symbol process processing. In the fluctuation pattern setting process, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the big hit flag is set (step S91). When the jackpot flag is set, the CPU 56 uses the jackpot fluctuation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132C (FIG. 9 (A) as a table used to determine the fluctuation pattern type to any one of a plurality of types. ) To (C)) is selected (step S92). Then, the process proceeds to step S100.

  If the big hit flag is not set, the CPU 56 checks whether the small hit flag is set (step S93). When the small hit flag is set, the CPU 56 uses the small hit variation pattern type determination table 132D (FIG. 9 (D (FIG. 9 (D)) as a table used to determine the variation pattern type to any one of a plurality of types. ) Is selected (step S94). Then, the process proceeds to step S100.

  If the small hit flag is not set either, the CPU 56 confirms whether the time short flag indicating the short time state is set (step S95). Note that the time saving flag is set when the gaming state is shifted to a definite changing state or a time saving state, and is reset when the time saving state is ended. Specifically, when it is determined to be "normally a big hit", the time saving flag is set in the process of ending the big hit game. In addition, after the big hit game end, it is reset when the fluctuation indication of specified number of times (100 times with this execution form) ends. The time saving flag is reset even when the next big hit occurs even before the predetermined number of times of variation display ends. In addition, when it is determined to be "probably big hit" or "suddenly big hit", the probability flag is set and the time saving flag is set in the processing for ending the big hit game. Then, when the next big hit occurs, the time saving flag is reset together with the probability change flag.

  If the time saving flag is not set (N in step S95), the CPU 56 checks whether the total number of pending storages is 3 or more (step S96). If the total number of pending storages is less than 3 (N in step S96), the CPU 56 uses the variation pattern type determination table for loss 135A (as a table used to determine the type of variation pattern as any of a plurality of types). FIG. 10A is selected (step S97). Then, the process proceeds to step S100.

  When the total number of pending storages is 3 or more (Y in step S96), the CPU 56 uses the variation pattern type determination table for loss as a table used to determine the type of variation pattern to any one of a plurality of types. Step 135B (see FIG. 10B) is selected (step S98). Then, the process proceeds to step S100.

  If the time saving flag is set (Y in step S95), that is, if the gaming state is a definite change state or a short time state (in this embodiment, the time change state is always made when transitioning to the positive change state) Are also transferred (see steps S169 and S170), and if it is determined as Y in step S95, the CPU 56 may change the type of variation pattern type if there is a probability change state or if it is controlled to only the time saving state). As a table used to determine one of the plurality of types, the release variation pattern type determination table 135C (see FIG. 10C) is selected (step S99). Then, the process proceeds to step S100.

  In this embodiment, when the gaming state is the normal state and the total number of pending storages is three or more by executing the processing of steps S95 to S99, the variation for disconnection shown in FIG. 10 (B). Pattern type determination table 135B is selected. When the gaming state is a definite change state or a short time state, a variation pattern type determination table for omission 135C shown in FIG. 10C is selected. In this case, non-reach CA2-2 may be determined as the change pattern type in the process of step S100 described later, and when the change pattern type of non-reach CA2-2 is determined, the change is performed in step S102. As a pattern, non-reach PA-1 and shortening fluctuation are determined (see FIG. 12). Therefore, in this embodiment, when the gaming state is a definite change state or a short time state, or when the total number of pending storages is three or more, the fluctuation display of the shortening fluctuation may be performed. In this embodiment, a variation pattern type determination table for shortening variation (see FIG. 10C) used in a definite variation state or a short time state and a variation pattern type determination table for shortening variation based on the number of reserved memories (see FIG. Although the case where it is a table different from 10 (B) is shown, a common table may be used as a variation pattern type determination table for shortening variation.

  Next, the CPU 56 reads random 2 (random pattern type determination random number) from the random number buffer area (the first holding storage buffer or the second holding storage buffer), and selects it in the processing of steps S92, S94, S97, S98 or S99. The variation pattern type is determined to be one of a plurality of types by referring to the table (step S100).

  Next, the CPU 56 uses the hit variation pattern determination tables 137A and 137B as a table used to determine one of a plurality of types of variation patterns based on the determination result of the variation pattern type in step S100 (see FIG. 11). And the out-of-out variation pattern determination table 138A (see FIG. 12) are selected (step S101). Also, by reading random 3 (random pattern determination random number) from the random number buffer area (the first reserve storage buffer or the second reserve storage buffer), the variation pattern is determined by referring to the variation pattern determination table selected in the process of step S101. Is determined to be one of a plurality of types (step S102). In addition, when it is comprised so that random 3 (random number for a fluctuation pattern determination) may not be extracted at the timing of starting winning a prize, CPU56 is a random number counter for a fluctuation pattern determination for generating a random number for fluctuation pattern determination (random 3). It is also possible to extract values directly from and to determine a fluctuation pattern based on the extracted random value.

  Next, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit the symbol variation designation command of the special symbol pointer to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S103). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a first symbol variation designation command. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a second symbol variation designation command. Further, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit the effect control command (the change pattern command) corresponding to the determined change pattern to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S104).

  Next, the CPU 56 sets a value corresponding to the fluctuation time corresponding to the selected fluctuation pattern to the fluctuation time timer formed in the RAM 55 (step S105). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the display result designation command transmission process (step S302) (step S106).

  FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing a display result designation command transmission process (step S302). In the display result designation command transmission process, the CPU 56 transmits one of the effect control command (see FIG. 13) of the display result 1 specification to the display result 5 specification according to the determined type, small hit, or removal of the determined big hit. Control to Specifically, the CPU 56 first confirms whether the big hit flag is set (step S110). If not set, the process proceeds to step S116. When the jackpot flag is set, if the type of the jackpot is "normal jackpot", control is performed to transmit the display result 2 designation command (steps S111 and S112). In addition, it can be determined by checking whether the data set in the big hit type buffer is "01" in step S74 of the special symbol normal processing, specifically, whether it is "normal big hit" or not. . Further, when the type of the big hit is “probable variation big hit”, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a display result 3 designation command (steps S113 and S114). In addition, it can be specifically determined by checking whether the data set in the big hit type buffer in step S74 of the special symbol normal processing is "02" or not whether it is "a certainty big hit" or not. . Then, when it is neither “normal big hit” nor “probable big hit” (ie, when it is “suddenly big hit”), the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a display result 4 designated command (step S115).

  On the other hand, when the big hit flag is not set (N in step S110), the CPU 56 checks whether the small hit flag is set (step S116). If the small hit flag is set, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit the display result 5 designation command (step S117). When the small hit flag is not set (N in step S116), that is, when the small hit flag is off, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a display result 1 designation command (step S118).

  Then, the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol variation process (step S303) (step S119).

  FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation in progress processing (step S303) in the special symbol process processing. In the special symbol variation process, CPU 56 first confirms whether or not the pending storage number subtraction designation command (first pending storage number subtraction designation command or second pending storage number subtraction designation command) has already been transmitted ( Step S1121). Note that whether or not the pending storage number subtraction specification command has already been transmitted indicates, for example, that the pending storage number subtraction specification command has been sent when sending the pending storage number subtraction specification command in step S1122 described later. The storage number subtraction specification command transmission completion flag may be set, and it may be checked in step S1121 whether the pending storage number subtraction specification command transmission completion flag is set. Also, in this case, the set storage number subtraction designated command transmitted flag is reset by the special symbol stop processing or the big hit end processing described later when the variation display of the special symbol is finished or the big hit is finished. Just do it.

  Next, if the pending storage number subtraction designation command has not been sent, the CPU 56 performs control to send the pending storage number subtraction designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S1122). In this case, when a value indicating “first” is set to the special symbol pointer, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a first storage reserve number subtraction designation command. When the special symbol pointer is set to a value indicating "second", the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a second storage reserve number subtraction designation command.

  Next, the CPU 56 subtracts 1 from the fluctuation time timer (step S1125), and when the fluctuation time timer times out (step S1126), performs control to transmit a symbol determination specification command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S1127). Then, the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol stop process (step S304) (step S1128). If the fluctuation time timer has not timed out, the process ends.

  FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing special symbol stop processing (step S304) in the special symbol process processing. In the special symbol stop process, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the big hit flag is set (step S131). If the jackpot flag is set, the CPU 56, if it is set, is a probability variation flag indicating that it is a definite variation state, a time shortening flag indicating that it is a time reduction state, and the number of times the special symbol can be varied in the time reduction state Is reset (step S132), and control is performed to transmit a jackpot start designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S133). Specifically, when the type of the jackpot is “normal jackpot” or “probable jackpot”, the jackpot start designation command (command A 001 (H)) is transmitted. Also, when the type of the big hit is a sudden definite big hit, a small hit / sudden positive big hit start specification command (command A 002 (H)) is transmitted. In addition, data indicating the type of jackpot stored in the RAM 55 (data stored in the jackpot type buffer) indicating whether the type of jackpot is “normally jackpot”, “probably outburst jackpot”, or “suddenly outright probability big hit” It is determined based on

  Further, a value corresponding to the big hit display time (for example, a time for notifying that the big hit has occurred in the effect display device 9) is set in the big hit display time timer (step S134). In addition, the number of opening times (for example, 15 times in the case of "normal big hit" or "probably big hit". 2 times in the case of "probably odd big hit") is set in the big winning opening open number counter (step S135) . In addition, round time per round in the big hit game is also set. Specifically, in the case of a sudden odd change big hit, 0.1 second is set as a round time, and in the case of a normal big hit or a positive change big hit, 29 seconds is set as a round time. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special winning opening opening pre-processing (step S305) (step S136).

  If the big hit flag is not set in step S131, the CPU 56 confirms whether the value of the time reduction counter indicating the number of times the special symbol can be changed in the time saving state is 0 (step S137). If the value of the time saving number counter is not 0, the CPU 56 decrements the value of the time saving number counter by 1 (step S138). Then, when the value of the time reduction number counter after subtraction becomes 0 (step S139), the CPU 56 resets the time reduction flag (step S140).

  Next, the CPU 56 checks whether the small hit flag is set (step S141). If the small hit flag is set, the CPU 56 transmits a small hit / sudden definite positive big hit start designation command (command A 002 (H)) to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S142). Further, a value corresponding to the small hit display time (for example, the time for notifying that the small hit has occurred in the effect display device 9) is set in the small hit display time timer (step S143). In addition, the number of times of opening (for example, 2 times) is set in the special winning opening opening number counter (step S144). In addition, the opening time per large winning opening in the small hit game is also set. Specifically, the same 0.1 second as the round time of the sudden big change big hit is set as the open time per one big winning opening in the small hit game. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the small hitting start pre-processing (step S308) (step S145).

  If the small hit flag is not set (N in step S141), the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal processing (step S300) (step S146).

  FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the jackpot end process (step S307) in the special symbol process process. In the big hit end process, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the big hit end display timer is set (step S160), and when the big hit end display timer is set, the process proceeds to step S164. If the big hit end display timer is not set, the big hit flag is reset (step S161), and control to transmit a big hit end designation command is performed (step S162). Here, a "big hit" or "probably big hit" sends a big hit end designation command (command A 301 (H)), and if it is "suddenly big hit" a small hit / sudden positive big hit The end designation command (command A 302 (H)) is transmitted. Then, a value corresponding to the display time corresponding to the time when the big hit end display is performed in the effect display device 9 (big hit end display time) is set in the big hit end display timer (step S163), and the process is ended.

  In step S164, the value of the big hit end display timer is decremented by 1 (step S164). Then, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the value of the big hit end display timer is 0, that is, whether or not the big hit end display time has elapsed (step S165). If it has not, the process is ended.

  If the big hit end display time has elapsed (Y in step S165), the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the big hit to be finished this time is normally a big hit (step S166). In addition, it can be determined by checking whether the data set in the big hit type buffer is "01" in step S74 of the special symbol normal processing, specifically, whether it is "normal big hit" or not. . If it is a normal big hit, the CPU 56 sets the time saving flag and shifts to the time saving state (step S167). Further, the CPU 56 sets a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) in the time reduction number counter (step S168).

  Usually, if it is not a big hit (that is, if it is a definite variation big hit or sudden definite variation big hit), the CPU 56 sets a definite variation flag and shifts to a definite variation state (step S169) and sets a short time flag to shift to a short time condition (Step S170).

  Then, the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal processing (step S300) (step S171).

  FIG. 30 is a flow chart showing an example of a program of special symbol display control processing (step S32) executed by the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) mounted on the main substrate 31. In the special symbol display control process, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the value of the special symbol process flag is 3 (step S3201). If the value of the special symbol process flag is 3 (that is, if the special symbol variation processing is being executed), the CPU 56 sets the special symbol display control data for the special symbol variation display for the special symbol display control data setting. A process of setting or updating the output buffer is performed (step S3202). In this case, the CPU 56 sets or updates special symbol display control data for performing variable display of the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) indicated by the special symbol pointer. For example, if the changing speed is 1 frame / 0.2 seconds, the value of the special symbol display control data set in the output buffer is incremented by 1 each time 0.2 seconds elapses. Then, display control processing (see step S22) is executed, and drive signals are output to the special symbol displays 8a and 8b according to the contents of the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data. The variation display of the special symbol on the special symbol display 8a, 8b is executed.

  If the value of the special symbol process flag is not 3, the CPU 56 confirms whether the value of the special symbol process flag is 4 or not (step S3203). If the value of the special symbol process flag is 4 (that is, when transition to special symbol stop processing), the CPU 56 is a special symbol for stopping and displaying the stop symbol of the special symbol set in the special symbol normal processing. A process of setting display control data in an output buffer for setting special symbol display control data is performed (step S3204). In this case, the CPU 56 sets special symbol display control data for stopping and displaying the stop symbol of the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) indicated by the special symbol pointer. Then, display control processing (see step S22) is executed, and drive signals are output to the special symbol displays 8a and 8b according to the contents of the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data. The stop symbol of the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the special symbol display 8a, 8b.

  Next, the operation of the effect control means will be described. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the effect control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the effect control CPU 101) mounted on the effect control board 80 as effect control means. When the power is turned on, the effect control CPU 101 starts execution of the main processing. In the main processing, first, initialization processing is performed to clear the RAM area, set various initial values, and initialize the timer for determining the start interval (for example, 4 ms) of effect control (step S 701). . Thereafter, the effect control CPU 101 shifts to loop processing for monitoring the timer interrupt flag (step S702). When a timer interrupt occurs, the effect control CPU 101 sets a timer interrupt flag in the timer interrupt process. In the main processing, if the timer interrupt flag is set, the effect control CPU 101 clears the flag (step S703), and executes the following effect control processing.

  In the effect control process, first, the effect control CPU 101 analyzes the received effect control command and performs a process of setting a flag according to the received effect control command (command analysis process: step S704).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 performs an effect control process (step S705). In the effect control process, among the processes corresponding to the control state, the process corresponding to the current control state (effect control process flag) is selected to execute display control of the effect display device 9.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 performs a fourth symbol process process (step S706). In the fourth symbol process processing, among the processes corresponding to the control state, the processing corresponding to the current control state (the fourth symbol process flag) is selected and in the fourth symbol display areas 9c and 9d of the effect display device 9 Execute the display control of the fourth symbol.

  Next, random number update processing is performed to update the count value of the counter for generating a random number such as a jackpot symbol determination random number (step S 707). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S702.

  FIG. 32 is an explanatory view showing one configuration example of a command reception buffer for storing the effect control command received from the game control microcomputer 560 of the main substrate 31. As shown in FIG. In this example, a ring buffer type command reception buffer capable of storing six 2-byte effect control commands is used. Therefore, the command reception buffer is formed of a 12-byte area of the reception command buffers 1-12. Then, a command reception number counter indicating which area the received command is to be stored is used. The command reception number counter takes a value of 0-11. The ring buffer type may not necessarily be used.

  33 to 35 are flowcharts showing specific examples of the command analysis process (step S704). Although the effect control command received from the main board 31 is stored in the reception command buffer, in the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 101 confirms the content of the command stored in the command reception buffer.

  In the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 101 first confirms whether or not a reception command is stored in the command reception buffer (step S611). Whether or not it is stored is determined by comparing the value of the command reception number counter with the read pointer. The case where the two match each other is the case where the reception command is not stored. If the reception command is stored in the command reception buffer, the effect control CPU 101 reads the reception command from the command reception buffer (step S612). Note that when read out, the value of the read pointer is incremented by 2 (step S613). The reason for +2 is that two bytes (one command) are read at a time.

  If the received effect control command is a change pattern command (step S614), the effect control CPU 101 stores the received change pattern command in the change pattern command storage area formed in the RAM (step S615). Then, the variation pattern command reception flag is set (step S616).

  If the received effect control command is the display result specification command (step S617), the effect control CPU 101 forms the received display result specification command (display result 1 specification command to display result 5 specification command) in the RAM. The command is stored in the display result designation command storage area (step S618).

  If the received effect control command is a symbol determination designating command (step S619), the effect control CPU 101 sets a determination command reception flag (step S620).

  If the received effect control command is any of the symbol designation commands (step S621), the effect control CPU 101 determines that the received symbol designation command is the first in the start winning command storage area formed in the RAM. Are stored in the storage area (step S622).

  If the received effect control command is any variation category command (step S623), the effect control CPU 101 stores the received variation category command in each storage area of the start winning command storage area formed in the RAM. It stores in the storage area where the newest design specification command is stored (Step S624).

  If the received effect control command is the first hold memory number addition designation command (step S625), the effect control CPU 101 executes the received first hold memory number addition designation command in the start winning combination command formed in the RAM. Among the storage areas of the storage area, the latest symbol designation command and variation category command are stored in the storage area where the command is stored (step S626). However, when the gaming state is in a definite variation state, a short time state, a big hit gaming state, or a small hit gaming state, the symbol designating command and the variation category command are not transmitted, but only the first reserve memory number adding designating command is transmitted. (See steps S1215A to S1219A). In this case, the effect control CPU 101 determines that the received first pending storage number addition designation command is available in the start winning command storage area formed in the RAM. Store in the first storage area.

  Further, the effect control CPU 101 increases the hold display by one in the normal mode (in this example, a white circle in this example) in the first hold memory display 9a, and the first hold in the first hold memory display 9a. The memory number display is updated (step S627). Further, the effect control CPU 101 adds one to the value of the first pending storage number stored in the first pending storage number saving area formed in the RAM (step S 628).

  If the received effect control command is the second hold memory number addition designation command (step S629), the effect control CPU 101 executes the received second hold memory number addition designation command in the start winning combination command formed in the RAM. Among the storage areas of the storage area, the latest symbol designation command and variation category command are stored in the storage area where the command is stored (step S630).

  Further, the effect control CPU 101 increases the hold display by one in the second hold storage display section 9b in the normal mode (in this example, a white round display in this example), and the second hold storage display section 9b The memory number display is updated (step S631). Further, the effect control CPU 101 adds one to the value of the second pending storage number stored in the second pending storage number saving area formed in the RAM (step S632).

  If the received effect control command is the first hold storage number subtraction designation command (step S633), the CPU 101 for production control erases one hold display in the first hold storage display unit 9a, and the remaining hold display is 1 It shifts one by one to update the first pending storage number display in the first pending storage display unit 9a (step S634). Further, the effect control CPU 101 subtracts one from the value of the first pending storage number stored in the first pending storage number saving area formed in the RAM (step S635).

  If the received effect control command is the second hold memory number subtraction designation command (step S636), the CPU 101 for production control erases one hold display in the second hold storage display unit 9b, and the remaining hold display is 1 It shifts each time and updates the 2nd pending storage number display in the 2nd pending storage indicator 9b (Step S637). Further, the effect control CPU 101 subtracts one from the value of the second pending storage number stored in the second pending storage number saving area formed in the RAM (step S638).

  If the received effect control command is a normal state background designation command (step S639), the effect control CPU 101 causes the background screen to be displayed on the effect display device 9 to have a background screen according to the normal state (for example, blue display color) It changes to background screen) (step S640). Further, if set, the effect control CPU 101 resets the time saving state flag indicating that the gaming state is the time saving state (step S641).

  If the received effect control command is a short time state background designation command (step S642), the effect control CPU 101 causes the background screen displayed on the effect display device 9 to be a background screen according to the short time state (for example, green display color It changes to background screen) (step S643). Further, the effect control CPU 101 sets the time saving state flag (step S644). If the effect control CPU 101 is set, the effect control CPU 101 resets a positive change state flag indicating that the gaming state is a positive change state (step S645).

  If the received effect control command is a definite variation state background designation command (step S646), the effect control CPU 101 causes the background screen to be displayed on the effect display device 9 to be a background screen according to the probable variation state (for example, red display color It changes to background screen) (step S647). Further, the effect control CPU 101 sets the probability change state flag (step S648).

  If the received effect control command is the first symbol variation specification command (step S649), the effect control CPU 101 sets a first symbol variation specification command reception flag (step S650). If the received effect control command is the second symbol variation specification command (step S651), the effect control CPU 101 sets a second symbol variation specification command reception flag (step S652).

  If the received effect control command is another command, the effect control CPU 101 sets a flag corresponding to the received effect control command (step S653). For example, if the received effect control command is a big hit start designated command, the big hit start designated command reception flag is set, and if the received effect control command is a big hit end designated command, the big hit end designated command received flag is set. Then, the process proceeds to step S611.

  FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing an effect control process (step S705) in the main process shown in FIG. In the effect control process, the effect control CPU 101 first executes a pending notification effect setting process for setting the presence / absence of the pending notification effect and the change pattern (step S800A).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 performs one of the processes in steps S800 to S807 in accordance with the value of the effect control process flag. In each process, the following process is performed. In the effect control process, the display state of the effect display device 9 is controlled, and variable display of the effect symbol is realized. However, control regarding variable display of the effect symbol synchronized with the fluctuation of the first special symbol is also the second Control relating to variable display of the rendering symbol synchronized with the variation of the special symbol is also executed in one rendering control process.

  Fluctuation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800): It is confirmed whether or not a fluctuation pattern command is received from the game control microcomputer 560. Specifically, it is checked whether or not the variation pattern command reception flag set in the command analysis process is set. If the fluctuation pattern command is received, the value of the effect control process flag is changed to a value corresponding to the effect symbol fluctuation start process (step S801).

  Effect pattern fluctuation start processing (step S801): Control is performed so that the change of effect pattern is started. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect symbol process (step S802).

  Process during production symbol fluctuation (step S802): While controlling the switching timing and the like of each fluctuation state (variation speed) constituting the fluctuation pattern, the end of fluctuation time is monitored. Then, when the fluctuation time is over, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect symbol fluctuation stop process (step S803).

  Effect pattern fluctuation stop processing (step S803): The change of the effect pattern is stopped and control is performed to derive and display the display result (stop pattern). Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the big hit display process (step S804) or the variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800).

  Big hit display process (step S804): After the end of the fluctuation time, control is performed to display a screen for notifying the effect display device 9 of the occurrence of a big hit. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the in-round process (step S805).

  In-round process (step S 805): Display control in the round is performed. Then, when the round end condition is satisfied, if the final round is not ended, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the post round process (step S806). If the final round has ended, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the big hit end process (step S807).

  Post-round processing (step S806): Perform display control between rounds. Then, when the round start condition is satisfied, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the process during the round (step S805).

  Big hit end effect processing (step S 807): In the effect display device 9, display control is performed to notify the player that the big hit gaming state has ended. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the fluctuation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800).

  FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing on-hold notice effect setting processing (step S800A). In the holding advance notice effect setting process, the effect control CPU 101 first performs one set of start winning combination commands (that is, a symbol specifying command, a change category command, and a holding memory number addition specifying command (first holding memory number addition specification command) Alternatively, it is checked whether or not a set of second pending storage number addition designation command) is newly received (step S6001). Specifically, one set of symbol designation command, variation category command, and pending storage number addition designation command (first pending storage number addition designation command or second pending storage number addition designation command) are included in the start winning command storage area. It can be confirmed by determining whether it is newly stored. If one set of start winning combination commands has not been received anew, the process ends.

  If one set of start winning combination commands has been newly received, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether the probability change status flag or the time saving status flag is set (step S6002). If the probability change status flag or the time saving status flag is set (that is, if it is a probability changing status or a time saving status), the process ends.

  If neither the probability change status flag nor the time saving status flag is set (ie, in the normal status), the effect control CPU 101 receives a newly stored pending memory count addition designation command (newly in the command storage area for start winning). It is checked whether or not the pending storage number addition designation command stored in (1) is the first pending storage number addition designation command (step S6003). If it is not the case where the first pending storage number addition designation command has been newly received (that is, if the second pending storage number addition designation command has been newly received), the processing is ended as it is.

  By executing the processing of steps S6002 and S6003, in this embodiment, only when a start winning for the first start winning opening 13 newly occurs while the gaming state is controlled to the normal state, The processing after step S6004 is executed, and it is configured to be able to execute the on-hold notice effect.

  In addition to the mode shown in this embodiment, for example, it is possible to execute the on-hold notice effect even when the start winning to the second start winning opening 14 occurs while being controlled to the definite variation state or the time saving state. You may configure it.

  Further, for example, when the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is executed in the winning order to the first start winning opening 13 and the second starting winning opening 14, the gaming state is a normal state, Regardless of whether or not it is a definite change state or a short time state, and regardless of which of the first start winning opening 13 and the second starting winning opening 14 is a start winning prize, it is possible to execute the holding notice effect You may configure it.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether the first number of pending storages is 2 or more (step S6004). Note that whether or not the first number of pending storages is 2 or more can be determined, for example, by checking the number of first pending storages stored in the first number of pending storages area (see steps S628 and S635). . If the first pending storage number is not 2 or more (that is, if the first pending storage number is 1), the process ends.

  In this embodiment, when executing the reserve announcement effect, the display of the reserve display is started according to the normal mode at the start winning prize, and then the reserve display is changed to special reserve, blue reserve, or red reserve at the timing of reserve shift. Although there is only one first pending storage number at the start winning timing, if there is a pending shift of the first pending storage, then the pending is immediately taken over and the variable display is performed. From there, there is no room to carry out the pending announcement effect. Therefore, in this embodiment, if it is determined in step S6004 that the first pending storage number is not 2 or more, it is determined that the on-hold notice effect can not be executed, and the process is ended as it is.

  In addition to the mode shown in this embodiment, for example, in the case where the blue hold or red hold is immediately displayed at the timing of the start winning and the execution of the hold notice effect can be started, the first hold memory Even if the number is 1, the process may proceed to the process of step S6005 or later to be able to execute the on-hold notice effect.

  Also, for example, in the case of a gaming machine configured to be able to display the active display corresponding to the currently-displayed variable display by the display mode that has taken over the display mode of the hold display, Since it is also possible to change the display mode, even if the first number of pending storages is 1, the process may proceed to the processing of step S6005 and subsequent steps so as to be able to execute the on-hold notice effect.

  If the first pending storage number is two or more, the effect control CPU 101 determines the final display mode of the latest pending display based on the received latest variation category command and the first pending storage number (step S6005). . In step S6005, the effect control CPU 101 selects the final display mode determination table for determining the final display mode of the latest pending display based on the latest variation category command and the first pending storage number. Then, the effect control CPU 101 performs a lottery process based on random numbers using the selected final display mode determination table, and determines the final display mode of the latest hold display.

  38 and 39 are explanatory diagrams showing a specific example of the final display mode determination table. As shown in FIGS. 38 and 39, in this embodiment, in the final display mode determination table, as the final display mode of the hold display, normal hold (without special hold), normal hold (with special hold), blue Judgment values are assigned to hold and red hold, respectively. Among these, “normally reserved (with special suspension)” means that temporarily changed to special suspension at the timing of the suspension shift after the starting winning combination, and then, at the timing of the subsequent suspension shift, the vehicle would normally be normally suspended. It is a return, and the final display mode itself is normally on hold, but the on-hold notice effect is executed. On the other hand, “normal hold (without special hold)” does not change to special hold at all, and does not change as normal hold until the hold is digested and the hold indication is erased, It corresponds to the one that does not execute the presentation itself.

  When the first number of pending storages is 2, there is only one opportunity to change the pending display at the timing of the pending shift after the starting winning combination, so there is room to temporarily change the pending display to special pending. Absent. Therefore, in the final display mode determination table for the first number of pending storages “2” shown in FIGS. 38A to 38C, only for normal retention (without special retention), blue retention, and red retention The judgment value is allocated to each, and there is no allocation of the judgment value to the normal hold (with special hold).

  In the case where the hold display can be changed a plurality of times during one variable display or the active display can be displayed, even if the first hold storage count is two, The special hold may be configured to be displayable.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 38 and FIG. 39, in this embodiment, when the change category indicated by the change category command is non-reach out, and super reach is out or super reach jackpot, it is possible to execute the hold notification effect. If it is configured, and the fluctuation category indicated by the fluctuation category command is the other fluctuation category, the effect control CPU 101 sets the final display mode of the hold display as it is to “normal hold (without special hold)”. It decides and it decides not to execute reservation announcement production.

  If the first hold storage number stored in the first hold storage number storage area (see steps S628 and S635) is “2”, the effect control CPU 101 determines that the change category indicated by the change category command is not In the case of reach out of range (variation category 1 shown in FIG. 16), select the final display mode determination table for 2 pending and non-reach out shown in FIG. If the category indicates a super reach loss (fluctuation category 7 shown in FIG. 16), select the 2 pending and super reach loss final display mode determination tables shown in FIG. If the indicated variation category indicates super reach jackpot (variation categories 23, 26 shown in FIG. 17), it is shown in FIG. 38 (C). Hold two and selects a final display mode decision table super reach jackpot. Further, when the first hold storage number stored in the first hold storage number storage area (see steps S628 and S635) is “3” or “4”, the effect control CPU 101 uses the variation category command. If the variation category shown indicates non-reach loss (variation category 1 shown in FIG. 16), the final display mode determination table for non-reach out and 3 to 4 shown in FIG. 39D is selected. If the variation category indicated by the variation category command is the one indicating the super reach loss (variation category 7 shown in FIG. 16), the final display mode for 3 to 4 reservations and the super reach loss shown in FIG. 39 (E) Select the decision table, and the variation category indicated by the variation category command indicates the super reach jackpot (variation categories 23, 26 shown in FIG. 17) If, for selecting a final display mode decision table for pending 3-4 and super reach jackpot shown in FIG. 39 (F). Then, the effect control CPU 101 performs a lottery process based on random numbers using the selected final display mode determination table, and determines the final display mode of the latest hold display.

  As shown in FIG. 38 and FIG. 39, in this embodiment, in the case of a super reach loss or a super reach jackpot, compared to the case of a non-reach loss, finally blue reserved rather than normal reserved. The rate of change to red hold is high. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the hold indication finally changes to blue hold or red hold, the degree of expectation for the super reach (reach reliability) is higher than in the case where the normal hold is finally finally put on hold. It's getting higher.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 38 and 39, in this embodiment, in the case of a super reach jackpot, it is finally blue than normal retention, as compared with the case of non-reach loss or super reach loss. The rate of change to hold or red hold is high. Further, as shown in FIGS. 38 and 39, in this embodiment, in the case of a super reach jackpot, it is finally redder than the blue reserve as compared with the case of the non reach out or the super reach out. The rate of change to pending is even higher. Therefore, in this embodiment, the expectation for the big hit (big hit reliability) is high when the pending display of the advance notice object is finally changed to red hold, and the case where it is finally changed to blue hold is the next big hit The degree of expectation (big hit reliability) for is high, and in the case of a final normal hold, the degree of expectation for big hit (big hit reliability) is low.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 38 and FIG. 39, it is assumed that the suspension notice effect can be executed when the winning determination result is non-reach out, super reach out, and super reach big hit. Although shown, it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, when there is a fluctuation category that can be identified as becoming normal reach, the on-hold notice effect may be executable based on the determination result of winning being a normal reach loss or a normal reach jackpot.

  When it is decided not to execute the reserve announcement effect (N in step S6006), that is, when the final display mode is decided to be normal reserve (without special reserve via), or the variation category indicates super reach loss or super reach jackpot If not, the processing ends. When it is determined to execute the suspension notice effect (Y in step S6006), the effect control CPU 101 displays the suspension target of the notice object based on the received latest variation category command, the first number of suspended memories, and the final display mode. The change pattern of is determined (step S6007). In step S6007, the effect control CPU 101 selects a change pattern determination table for determining a change pattern of the pending display of the notice target based on the latest variation category command, the first pending storage number, and the final display mode. Then, the effect control CPU 101 performs a lottery process based on random numbers using the selected change pattern determination table, and determines a change pattern of the pending display of the notice target.

  40 and 41 are explanatory views showing a specific example of the change pattern determination table. In FIG. 40 and FIG. 41, special △ indicates special holding of triangular display, and special は indicates special holding of rectangular display.

  If the first number of pending storages stored in the first pending storage number storage area (see steps S628 and S635) is “2”, the effect control CPU 101 determines that the final display mode determined in step S6005 is blue. If it is hold, the change pattern determination table for 2 hold and blue hold shown in FIG. 40 (A) is selected, and if the final display mode determined in step S6005 is red hold, it is shown in FIG. 40 (B) The change pattern determination table for 2 pending and red pending is selected.

  As shown in FIG. 40 (A), determination values are assigned to the change pattern determination table for 2 reservations and for blue retention so that the change pattern 21 is determined with a probability of 100%. Further, as shown in FIG. 40 (B), determination values are assigned to the change pattern determination table for the two reserved and red reserve patterns so that the change pattern 22 is determined with a probability of 100%. The change pattern 21 is a change pattern in which the hold display of the advance notice is changed to blue hold at the timing of the hold shift after displaying the hold display of the notice target at the start winning prize in the normal hold. Further, the change pattern 22 is a change pattern in which the hold display of the advance notice is changed to the red hold at the timing of the hold shift after displaying the hold display of the notice target at the start winning prize in the normal hold. That is, the fact that the first number of pending storages is "2" means that there is only one pending shift timing, and therefore the blue display or red pending of the final display mode as it is at the pending shift timing without passing through the special pending Change to

  Further, when the first hold storage number stored in the first hold storage number storage area (see steps S628 and S635) is “3”, the effect control CPU 101 determines the final display mode determined in step S6005. If it is normal hold (with special hold), the three change table determination tables for holding and normal hold shown in FIG. 40C are selected, and if the final display mode determined in step S6005 is blue hold If the final display mode determined in step S6005 is red hold, three hold and three hold shown in FIG. 40 (D) are selected. Select the change pattern determination table for red hold.

  As shown in FIG. 40C, in the change pattern determination table for the three pending and normal retention, determination values are allocated to the change pattern 31 and the change pattern 32, respectively. The change pattern 31 changes the hold display of the notice object to the special hold of the triangle display at the timing of the first hold shift after displaying the hold display of the notice target in the normal hold at the start winning combination. It is a change pattern in which the pending display of the advance notice object is changed to the normal pending again at the timing. In addition, the change pattern 32 changes the hold display of the notice target to the special hold of the rectangular display at the timing of the first hold shift after displaying the hold display of the notice target in the normal hold at the starting winning combination. It is a change pattern that changes the hold indication of the advance notice object to the normal hold again at the timing of the shift.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 40 (D), in the change pattern determination table for holding three pieces and the blue hold, determination values are allocated to the change pattern 33 and the change pattern 34, respectively. In the change pattern 33, after the display of the notice display of the advance notice is displayed as a normal hold at the starting winning combination, the change display of the notice display for notice is changed to the special hold of the triangle display at the timing of the first hold shift. It is a change pattern in which the pending display of the advance notice object is changed to blue pending at the timing. In addition, the change pattern 34 displays the notice display of the notice object in normal hold at the start winning combination, and then changes the notice display of the notice object to special hold of the rectangular display at the timing of the first hold shift. It is a change pattern for changing the hold display of the advance notice object to blue hold at the timing of the shift.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 40 (E), in the change pattern determination table for the three red hold and red hold, determination values are allocated to the change pattern 35 and the change pattern 36, respectively. In the change pattern 35, after displaying the hold display of the advance notice in the normal hold at the start winning combination, change the hold display of the notice target to the special hold of the triangle display at the timing of the first hold shift. It is a change pattern that changes the hold display of the advance notice object to red hold at the timing. In addition, the change pattern 36 changes the hold display of the notice target to the special hold of the rectangular display at the timing of the first hold shift after displaying the hold display of the notice target in the normal hold at the starting winning combination. It is a change pattern for changing the hold display of the advance notice object to red hold at the timing of the shift.

  Furthermore, when the first number of pending storages stored in the first pending storage number storage area (see steps S628 and S635) is “4”, the effect control CPU 101 determines the final display mode determined in step S6005. Is the normal hold (with special hold), the change pattern determination table for the four hold and normal hold shown in FIG. 41F is selected, and the final display mode determined in step S6005 is blue hold 41 (G), and select the change pattern determination table for four hold and blue hold. Also, if the final display mode determined in step S6005 is red reserve, the variation category indicated by the variation category command further indicates non-reach loss or super reach loss (variation category 1 or variation category 7 shown in FIG. 16). If it is), select the change pattern determination table for 4 reservations and non-reach out / super reach out and red retention shown in FIG. 41 (H), and the change category indicated by the change category command indicates the super reach jackpot If it is one (the change categories 23 and 26 shown in FIG. 17), the change pattern determination table for the four hold and super reach big hit and red hold shown in FIG. 41 (I) is selected.

  As shown in FIG. 41 (F), in the change pattern determination table for holding four and for normal holding, determination values are allocated to change pattern 401, change pattern 402, change pattern 403 and change pattern 404, respectively. ing. The change pattern 401 changes the hold display of the notice target to the special hold of the triangle display at the timing of the first hold shift after displaying the hold display of the notice target as the normal hold at the start winning combination. This is a change pattern in which the pending display of the advance notice object is changed to normal hold again at the timing, and the pending display of the advance object is displayed as normal hold at the timing of the third hold shift. In addition, the change pattern 402 changes the hold display of the notice target to the special hold of the triangle display at the timing of the first hold shift after displaying the hold display of the notice target in the normal hold at the starting winning combination. This is a change pattern in which the pending display of the advance notice is displayed as the special hold of the triangle display at the shift timing and the pending display of the notice target is changed to the normal hold again at the timing of the third pending shift. In addition, the change pattern 403 changes the hold display of the notice target to the special hold of the rectangular display at the timing of the first hold shift after displaying the hold display of the notice target in the normal hold at the starting winning combination. This is a change pattern in which the pending display of the advance notice is changed to normal hold again at the timing of the shift, and the pending display of the advance target is displayed as normal hold at the timing of the third hold shift. In addition, the change pattern 404 changes the hold display of the notice target to the special hold of the rectangular display at the timing of the first hold shift after displaying the hold display of the notice target in the normal hold at the starting winning combination. This is a change pattern in which the pending display of the advance notice is displayed as the special hold of the rectangular display at the shift timing and the pending display of the notice target is changed to the normal hold again at the timing of the third pending shift.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 41 (G), in the change pattern determination table for the four hold and blue hold, the determination values for the change pattern 405, the change pattern 406, the change pattern 407, and the change pattern 408 are shown. It is allocated. The change pattern 405 changes the hold display of the notice target to the special hold of the triangle display at the timing of the first hold shift after displaying the hold display of the notice target at the start winning prize in the normal hold, and It is a change pattern in which the pending display of the advance notice object is changed to the blue hold at the timing, and the pending display of the notice object is displayed as the blue hold at the timing of the third pending shift. In addition, the change pattern 406 changes the hold display of the notice target to the special hold of the triangle display at the timing of the first hold shift after displaying the hold display of the notice target in the normal hold at the starting winning combination. This is a change pattern in which the pending display of the advance notice is displayed as a special hold of the triangle display at the timing of the shift and the pending display of the notice target is changed to the blue hold at the timing of the third pending shift. In addition, the change pattern 407 changes the hold display of the notice target to the special hold of the rectangular display at the timing of the first hold shift after displaying the hold display of the notice target in the normal hold at the starting winning combination. It is a change pattern in which the pending display of the advance notice object is changed to blue hold at the timing of the shift, and the pending display of the notice object is displayed as the blue hold at the timing of the third pending shift. In addition, the change pattern 408 changes the hold display of the notice target to the special hold of the rectangular display at the timing of the first hold shift after displaying the hold display of the notice target in the normal hold at the starting winning combination. This is a change pattern in which the pending display of the advance notice is displayed as a special hold of the rectangular display at the shift timing and the pending display of the notice target is changed to blue hold at the timing of the third pending shift.

  Also, as shown in FIGS. 41 (H) and 41 (I), the change pattern determination table for 4 holding and non-reach out / super reach and red holding, and 4 holding and super reach big hit and red holding In the change pattern determination table, determination values are assigned to the change pattern 409, the change pattern 410, the change pattern 411, the change pattern 412, the change pattern 413, and the change pattern 414, respectively.

  The change pattern 409 changes the hold display of the notice target to the special hold of the triangle display at the timing of the first hold shift after displaying the hold display of the notice target as the normal hold at the start winning combination, and the second hold shift It is a change pattern in which the pending display of the advance notice object is changed to red hold at the timing and the pending display of the notice object is displayed in red hold as it is at the timing of the third pending shift. In addition, the change pattern 410 changes the hold display of the notice target to the special hold of the triangle display at the timing of the first hold shift after displaying the hold display of the notice target in the normal hold at the starting winning combination. This is a change pattern in which the pending display of the advance notice is displayed as the special hold of the triangle display at the shift timing, and the pending display of the notice target is changed to red hold at the timing of the third pending shift. In addition, the change pattern 411 changes the hold display of the notice target to the special hold of the triangle display at the timing of the first hold shift after displaying the hold display of the notice target in the normal hold at the starting winning combination. This is a change pattern in which the pending display of the advance notice object is displayed in normal hold again at the timing of the shift, and the pending display of the notice object is changed to red hold at the timing of the third pending shift. In addition, the change pattern 412 changes the hold display of the notice target to the special hold of the rectangular display at the timing of the first hold shift after displaying the hold display of the notice target in the normal hold at the starting winning combination. It is a change pattern in which the pending display of the advance notice object is changed to red hold at the timing of the shift, and the pending display of the notice object is displayed as red hold at the timing of the third pending shift. In addition, the change pattern 413 changes the hold display of the notice target to the special hold of the rectangular display at the timing of the first hold shift after displaying the hold display of the notice target in the normal hold at the starting winning combination. This is a change pattern in which the pending display of the advance notice is displayed as the special hold of the rectangular display at the shift timing and the pending display of the notice target is changed to red hold at the timing of the third pending shift. In addition, the change pattern 414 changes the hold display of the notice target to the special hold of the rectangular display at the timing of the first hold shift after displaying the hold display of the notice target in the normal hold at the starting winning combination. This is a change pattern in which the pending display of the advance notice object is displayed in normal hold again at the timing of the shift, and the pending display of the notice object is changed to red hold at the timing of the third pending shift.

  As shown in FIG. 41, in this embodiment, when the first number of pending storages is “4”, the pending display of the notice object is displayed as normal pending at the start winning, and the timing of the first pending shift is displayed. In the special hold, it is configured to be changeable to normal hold, blue hold, and red hold at the timing of the third and subsequent hold shifts. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the hold display of the notice object is displayed at the fourth position in the first hold storage display section 9a (in the state after the start winning), it is displayed at the third position. When it is (the state after the first hold shift), the hold indication of the notice target does not change from special hold to normal hold, blue hold, or red hold. Further, as shown in FIGS. 40 (C) to (E), in this embodiment, even when the first number of pending storages is “3”, the pending display of the notice object is normally displayed as pending at the start winning prize. Therefore, when the hold display of the notice target is displayed at the third position in the first hold storage display unit 9a (the state after the start winning game), the hold display of the notice target is usually hold from special hold or It does not change to blue hold and red hold. Therefore, in this embodiment, during the period when the hold indication of the notice object is displayed at the fourth and third positions, the hold indication of the notice object is less likely to change from special hold to normal hold . Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being discouraged from changing from special hold to normal hold at an early stage of the pending display of the advance notice object, and to prevent a drop in the rendering effect when executing the on hold advance presentation effect. .

  In addition to the mode shown in this embodiment, for example, special hold, blue hold, and red hold can be displayed immediately upon winning the start, or special hold is displayed before waiting for the next hold shift. Immediately by carrying out the operation effect described later and by changing from special hold to normal hold, blue hold, and red hold, the hold display of the notice object is displayed at the fourth or third position. Even during a certain period, the pending display of the notice target may be configured to be able to change from special hold to normal hold, blue hold, and red hold. However, even in the case of such a configuration, at least the pending display of the notice target changes from the special hold to the normal hold while the pending display of the notice target is displayed at the fourth or third position. It is preferable to configure so that the rate of change is low.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, the effect presentation to be described later can be executed at the timing of the hold shift after the special hold is displayed, and even if the action effect is executed, the hold display of the notice target remains the special hold. And may change to normal hold, blue hold, or red hold. For example, in the change patterns 401 and 403 shown in FIG. 41F, after the special hold is displayed at the timing of the first hold shift, the operation effect is executed at the timing of the second hold shift, and the special hold is performed. It can be changed to normal hold. Also, for example, in the change patterns 402 and 404 shown in FIG. 41F, after the special hold is displayed at the first hold shift timing, the effect presentation is executed at the second hold shift timing. The special hold does not change, and the effect presentation is executed at the timing of the third hold shift, and the special hold can be changed to the normal hold. As such, in this embodiment, not only when a special holding is returned to a normal holding in one operation effect, but also a plurality of effect effects may be executed to return from a special holding to a normal holding, It is possible to improve the rendering effect when executing the on-hold notice rendering.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 40C to 40E and FIGS. 41F to 41I, in this embodiment, two types of special hold of triangle display and special hold of rectangular display are used as special hold. However, when the special display of the rectangular display is displayed, the percentage of displaying the red display as the final display mode is higher than when the special display of the triangular display is displayed. . Also, conversely, when the special display of the triangle display is displayed, the ratio of returning to the normal display as the final display mode is higher than when the special display of the rectangular display is displayed.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 41H and 41I, in this embodiment, red hold is finally displayed even if the special hold is returned to the normal hold (ie, once it is returned to the normal hold, it is disappointing Then, the red reserve is changed and it appears as if it were displayed.) The change pattern (change patterns 411, 414) is provided, and the change pattern 411, 414 of this revival pattern is set only when it is a super reach jackpot. Judgment values are assigned to be determinable. Therefore, in this embodiment, if the red hold is finally made after the special hold is temporarily returned to the normal hold, the jackpot will be determined, rather than the red hold from the special hold. , The expectation (reliability) for the big hit is high.

  It should be noted that the revival pattern change patterns 411 and 414 can be determined with low probability, even if the super reach is not the only one that determines the big hit if the revival pattern change patterns 411 and 414 are determined. May be At least, even when configured as such, if a special hold is once returned to a normal hold and then finally a red hold is made, it will be for a big hit than if a special hold is simply a red hold. It is sufficient if the degree of expectation (reliability) is high.

  Further, in this embodiment, the case where the change patterns 411 and 414 of the resurrection pattern are provided only when the final display mode is red hold is shown, but the same resurrection is also performed when the final display mode is blue hold You may comprise so that the change pattern of a pattern may be provided.

  Further, in this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 41 (H) and (I), the determination result at the time of winning is non-reach out / super reach out or super reach jackpot only when there are four pending and red pending. Although the case where different change pattern determination tables are used depending on whether it is or not is shown, it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, change pattern determination tables for two or three reservations shown in FIGS. 40 (A) to 40 (E), 4 for holding shown in FIGS. 41 (F) and 41 (G) and for normal reservation or blue reservation The change pattern determination table may also be configured to use a different change pattern determination table according to the determination result at the time of winning. In this case, for example, in the case where the change pattern of the resurrection pattern is provided even when the final display mode is blue retention as described above, the non-reach / overlapping is performed by the mode similar to FIGS. It is configured to provide a change pattern determination table for reach loss and a change pattern determination table for super reach jackpot, and when a special hold temporarily returns to a normal hold and then finally becomes a blue hold, a big hit and May be determined, or the expectation (reliability) for the big hit may be configured to be high.

  Further, it may be further subdivided to separately provide a change pattern determination table for non-reach and a change pattern determination table for super-reach.

  Further, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 41H, as a change pattern determination table for four reservations and red retention, a table common to the case of non-reach and the case of super-reach. However, different change pattern determination tables may be used in the non-reach case and the super reach case.

  Furthermore, the example of the change patterns shown in FIGS. 40 and 41 is an example, and various change patterns may be provided. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 40 and FIG. 41, the case of changing from the normal hold to the special hold at the timing of the first hold shift is shown, but the special hold is displayed from the start winning timing or A change pattern may also be provided to change from normal hold to special hold at the timing of the hold shift. Also, for example, a change pattern may be provided that changes to blue retention and then changes to red retention.

  Moreover, although FIG. 40 and FIG. 41 showed the case where only the change pattern in which the special holding of either triangular display or rectangular display is displayed, for example, the special holding of triangular display changes to the special holding of rectangular display Alternatively, it may be configured to provide a change pattern that changes from special storage of rectangular display to special storage of triangular display.

  Then, the effect control CPU 101 stores the final display mode and the change pattern determined in the steps S6005 and S6007 in the pending advance effect setting information storage area provided in the RAM in association with the pending storage of the advance object (step S6008). In this embodiment, it is possible to execute on-hold notice effect in parallel to the plurality of on-hold displays displayed on the first on-hold storage display unit 9a, and the first on-hold storage display unit 9a can be performed at maximum. Since four hold displays can be displayed, four storage areas are provided in the hold notice effect setting information storage area, and the final display mode and the change pattern are stored in association with each hold storage. .

  FIG. 42 is a flow chart showing a fluctuation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800) in the effect control process shown in FIG. In the fluctuation pattern command reception waiting process, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the fluctuation pattern command reception flag is set (step S811). If the fluctuation pattern command reception flag is set, the fluctuation pattern command reception flag is reset (step S812). Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect symbol variation start process (step S801) (step S813).

  FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing the effect symbol variation start process (step S801) in the effect control process shown in FIG. In the effect symbol variation start process, the effect control CPU 101 first reads a change pattern command from the change pattern command storage area (step S8000). Next, the effect control CPU 101 displays the effect pattern (stopped) according to the variation pattern command read in step S8000 and the data stored in the display result specification command storage area (that is, the received display result specification command). The symbol) is determined (step S8001). In addition, when pseudo run is designated by the change pattern command, CPU101 for production control is the chance eye design (for example, "223" and "445" etc.) as a temporary stop symbol of a pseudo run in step S8001. Also, although it is not a reach, a combination of a big hit symbol and a symbol whose one symbol is off is also determined. Note that the effect control CPU 101 stores data indicating the stop symbol of the determined effect symbol in the effect symbol display result storage area.

  FIG. 44 is an explanatory view showing an example of the stop symbol of the effect symbol in the effect display device 9. In the example shown in FIG. 44, when the received display result designation command indicates “normal big hit” (when the received display result designation command is the display result 2 designation command), the effect control CPU 101 stops. Determine the combination of the production design that the 3 designs are aligned with the same even design as the design. In addition, when the received display result designation command indicates "probable big hit" (when the received display result designation command is the display result 3 designation command), the CPU 101 for effect control has 3 symbols as a stop symbol. Determine the combination of the production symbols aligned with the same odd symbols.

  Also, if the received display result specification command indicates "Suddenly positive probability big hit" or "small hit" (if the received display result specification command is the display result 4 specification command or the display result 5 specification command), The effect control CPU 101 determines a combination of effect symbols such as “135” as a stop symbol. Then, in the case of “off” (when the received display result designation command is the display result 1 designation command), a combination of effect symbols other than the above is determined. However, when it is accompanied by the reach effect, the combination of the effect pattern with the two left and right symbols aligned is determined. Further, the combination of three symbols derived and displayed on the effect display device 9 is the "stop symbol" of the effect symbol.

  For example, the CPU for effect control 101 extracts a random number for determining a stop symbol, and uses a stop symbol determination table in which data representing a combination of effect symbols and a numerical value are associated with each other, the stop symbol of the effect symbol decide. That is, the stop symbol is determined by selecting the data indicating the combination of the effect symbols corresponding to the numerical value corresponding to the extracted random number.

  In addition, also about a production pattern, it is called a big hit design the stop pattern (combination of the symbols in which the left middle and the right are all aligned with the same design) that evokes a big hit. In addition, the stop design which reminds of the release is called the release design. In addition, a symbol (in this embodiment, an odd symbol) that reminds of being in a definite variation state is also referred to as a definite variation symbol, and a symbol (in this embodiment, an even symbol) that reminds of not becoming a definite variation condition is not definite symbol It is also called.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether the probability variation state flag or the time saving state flag is set (step S8002). If neither the probability change status flag nor the time saving status flag is set (ie, in the normal status), the CPU 101 for effect control checks whether or not the first symbol variation specification command reception flag is set ( Step S8003). If the first symbol variation specification command reception flag is set (that is, if the variation display of the first special symbol is started), the process moves to step S8004. That is, in this embodiment, as described above, since the on-hold notice effect is executed for the first on-hold storage when the gaming state is the normal state, the processing in steps S8002 and S8003 is performed. Therefore, the processing of steps S8004 to S8010 is executed only when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed when the gaming state is the normal state, and the display is changed to the suspension display for special notice and the special suspension, The effect presentation is configured to be executable.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not there is a display timing of special hold in the first hold storage (step S8004). In addition, whether or not there is a display timing of the special hold, for example, check the change pattern stored in the hold notification effect setting information storage area (see step S6008), start the current change (hold It can be determined by checking whether there is a normal hold → special Δ or special □ at the timing of shift). If there is a special hold display timing, the effect control CPU 101 changes the hold display at the special hold display timing to the special hold in the first hold storage display section 9a (step S8005). . In this case, when the change pattern is normal hold → special △, it is changed to special hold of triangle display, and when normal hold → special □, it is changed to special hold of rectangular display.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 becomes an executable timing of an action effect (implemented in such a manner as to act on the pending display and suggesting that the display mode of the pending display changes) in the first pending storage. It is checked whether there is any (step S8006). It should be noted that whether or not it is an executable timing of the effect presentation, for example, check the change pattern stored in the storage area for holding announcement effect setting information storage (see step S6008), and start the current fluctuation start (hold shift). Special → → Special や or Special → → Normal hold, Special → → Blue hold, Special → → Red hold, Special □ → Special □, Special □ → Normal hold, Special □ → Blue hold, Special □ → Red hold It can be determined by checking whether there is any.

  The executable timing of the effect presentation is not limited to that shown in this embodiment, and the operation presentation may be performed at other timings. For example, even when the normal hold changes to the special hold, it may be determined that the action effect can be executed, and the processing in step S8007 and subsequent steps may be performed to enable the action effect. Further, for example, a special effect may be provided when changing from normal hold to special hold, and even if the special effect is not changed to special hold (case effect effect) It may be configured to have

  If there is a timing at which action presentation can be performed in the first suspension storage, the effect control CPU 101 changes the suspension display as an action presentation determination table for determining the presence and the type of the action presentation. A table corresponding to the mode is selected (step S8007). Then, the effect control CPU 101 performs a lottery process based on random numbers using the selected action effect determination table, and determines the presence / absence and type of action effect (step S8008).

  In this embodiment, the plurality of pending displays displayed on the first pending storage display unit 9a are configured to be able to execute the on-hold notice effect in parallel. It may also occur when there are multiple executables at the same time. In this case, the CPU 101 for effect control determines the presence / absence and type of action effect with priority given to the ones for which fluctuation display is started earlier among the first suspension storages at which the action effect can be executed. The control effect is controlled to be performed only once during one change display. For example, when the first and third hold displays displayed on the first hold storage display unit 9a are at the execution enable timing of the action effect, the first hold display is operated. If it is determined that the presence or absence and the type of the effect are to be performed, and the operation effect is to be executed, the operation effect is executed only for the first hold display.

  In addition, you may comprise not only the aspect shown in this embodiment, but performing operation presentation in multiple times during one fluctuation display, for example by shifting time and performing operation presentation. In addition, although the effect presentation is performed only once during one variation display, it is configured to execute the action presentation in such a manner that the one operation presentation acts on a plurality of suspension displays simultaneously. It is also good.

  45 and 46 are explanatory views showing a specific example of the effect presentation determination table. The effect control CPU 101 selects an action effect determination table for special Δ → normal hold shown in FIG. 45A at the timing when the special display of triangle display changes to normal hold based on the change pattern. In addition, at the timing when the special display of the rectangular display changes to the normal storage, the special effect display table for special storage → normal storage shown in FIG. 45 (B) is selected. In addition, if it is a timing that does not change with the special display of triangular display as it is from the special display of triangular display, the effect presentation determination table for special Δ → special Δ shown in FIG. 45 (C) is selected. If it is a timing which does not change from the special display of the rectangular display as it is with the special display of the rectangular display, the action effect determination table for the special □ → special □ shown in FIG. 45 (D) is selected. If it is the timing at which the special display of the triangle display changes to the blue display, the action effect determination table for the special Δ → blue display shown in FIG. 46 (E) is selected. Further, at the timing when the special display of the rectangular display changes to the blue display, an action / effect determination table for the special □ → blue display shown in FIG. 46 (F) is selected. If it is the timing at which the special display of the triangle display changes to the red display, the action effect determination table for the special Δ → red display shown in FIG. 46 (G) is selected. Further, at the timing when the special display of the rectangular display changes to the red display, an action / effect determination table for the special □ → red display shown in FIG. 46 (H) is selected.

  As shown in FIGS. 45 and 46, in the effect presentation determination table, determination values are assigned to no effect presentation, action presentation A, action presentation B and action presentation C, respectively. In this embodiment, although there are three types of effect effects A to C as types of effect effects, the present invention is not limited to such an aspect, and for example, only two types of effect effects may be used. You may comprise, or you may comprise so that four or more types of effect presentation may be used.

  As shown in FIGS. 45 and 46, in this embodiment, when the action effect A is executed, the determination value is assigned such that the rate of change from special hold to normal hold is high. In addition, when the action effect B is executed, the determination value is assigned such that the rate of non-change with the special hold is high. In addition, when the action effect C is executed, the determination value is assigned such that the rate of change from special hold to blue hold or red hold is high.

  The action / effect determination tables shown in FIGS. 45 (A) and 45 (B) are tables used when changing from special hold to normal hold, and are patterns for lowering the display mode of the hold display to one with a low degree of expectation. It is said that the table is for selecting a table, and in particular, since the selection ratio of action effect A is high, action effect A is an action effect of a pattern that lowers the display mode of the suspension display to a low expectation degree. It can be said (pattern 1). Further, the action and effect determination tables shown in FIGS. 45C and 45D are tables used when the special hold does not change and are tables for selecting a pattern for maintaining the display mode of the hold display. In particular, since the selection ratio of the action effect B is high, it can be said that the action effect B is an action effect of a pattern maintaining the display mode of the hold display as it is (pattern 2). Further, the action effect determination tables shown in FIGS. 46E to 46H are tables used when changing from special hold to blue hold or red hold, and the display mode of the hold display has high expectation. It can be said that it is a table for selecting a pattern to be built up, and in particular, since the selection ratio of the effect stage C is high, the effect stage C has a pattern of displaying the display mode of the suspension display to a high expectation. (Pattern 3).

  And since the above-mentioned pattern 1 and pattern 2 are what make the display mode of a reservation display lower or maintain the present condition, they are patterns for showing a change failure as an operation effect, and the above-mentioned pattern 3 is a display of a reservation display As it is what makes up an aspect, it is a pattern to make it appear to be a successful change as an effect representation. In addition, even if it is a pattern for showing the same change failure, it may be different in how to show the effect presentation between the pattern 1 and the pattern 2 described above. For example, when executing action effects according to pattern 1 above, characters such as "big failure" are displayed, and when operation effects according to pattern 2 above are executed, characters such as "fail" The display may be made different.

  Further, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 45 and FIG. 46, in the case where the presence or absence of the effect presentation and the determination ratio of the type are different depending on which display mode the pending display changes in the current variable display. However, the present invention is not limited to such an aspect. For example, regardless of the change mode of the current variable display, the determination ratio of the presence / absence of the effect and the type may be changed according to which final display mode the pending display changes.

  Also, for example, depending on the display result (for example, whether or not to be a big hit) of the variable display of the advance notice object or the change category (for example, the presence or the type of reach) You may configure it.

  Further, for example, in the case where the display mode of the hold display may be changed from blue hold to red hold, it is possible to execute the action effect even when the blue change is not changed in the current variable display. You may

  In addition, when the display mode of the hold display may be changed from blue hold to red hold as described above, even if the same variable hold changes from the same special hold to the blue hold in this variation display. Depending on whether the final display mode is blue hold or red hold, the execution ratio and type of the effect may be different. For example, the effect presentation may be performed at a higher rate when the final display mode is red hold, or the effect presentation (for example, the effect presentation C) having a high degree of expectation may be performed. Alternatively, conversely, the effect presentation may be performed at a higher rate when the final display mode is blue hold, or the operation presentation (for example, the effect presentation C) having a high degree of expectation may be performed. . With such a configuration, it is possible not only to give a sense of expectation whether the display mode of the hold display changes in the variable display executed this time, but also whether the display mode of the hold display may change thereafter. It can give a sense of expectation.

  If it is determined to execute the action presentation (Y in step S8009), the CPU 101 for production control selects a process table according to the variation pattern and the type of the action presentation determined in step S8008 (step S8010). . Then, the process proceeds to step S8012.

  On the other hand, if the probability change status flag or the time saving status flag is set (Y in step S8002), the first symbol variation designation command reception flag is not set (N in step S8003), the first pending storage is performed. If there is no timing at which the effect presentation can be performed (N in step S8006), or if it is decided not to execute the action presentation (N in step S8009), the CPU 101 for effect control changes A normal process table (a process table without an effect presentation) corresponding to the pattern is selected (step S8011). Then, the process proceeds to step S8012.

  Then, the effect control CPU 101 starts the process timer in the process data 1 of the process table selected in steps S8010 and S8011 (step S8012).

  FIG. 47 is an explanatory view of a configuration example of a process table. The process table is a table in which process data to be referred to when the effect control CPU 101 executes control of the effect device is set. That is, the CPU for effect control 101 controls the effect device (component for effect) such as the effect display device 9 according to the process data set in the process table. The process table is composed of data in which a plurality of combinations of process timer set values, display control execution data, lamp control execution data and sound number data are collected. In the display control execution data, data etc. is described which indicates the aspect of each variation constituting the variation aspect during the variable display time (variation time) of the variable display of the effect pattern. Specifically, data relating to the change of the display screen of the effect display device 9 is described. Moreover, the fluctuation time in the aspect of the fluctuation | variation is set to the process timer set value. The effect control CPU 101 refers to the process table and performs control to display the effect pattern in the variation mode set in the display control execution data only for the time set in the process timer set value.

  The process table shown in FIG. 47 is stored in the ROM of the effect control board 80. Moreover, the process table is prepared according to each fluctuation pattern.

  In the process table used when effect control is executed for the fluctuation pattern with reach effect, the left symbol is stopped and displayed when the predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, and the right symbol is stopped when the predetermined time has elapsed. Process data indicating that it is to be displayed is set. It should be noted that instead of setting symbols to be stopped and displayed in the process table, images for displaying symbols are generated in combination according to the determined stop symbols and the pseudo stop symbols in the pseudo reunion and the slip effect. May be

  In addition, it may be possible to execute notice effects (so-called notice effects for the change) other than the advance notice effect (in this example, the hold notice effect in this example) during the change display of the effect design, in which case the notice at the start of the change When it is determined to execute the effect, the effect control CPU 101 selects a process table corresponding to the determined advance effect in steps S8010 and S8011.

  In addition, the CPU for effect control 101, according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1), the effect device (effects display device 9 as effect parts, effect elements as effect parts Control of the various lamps and the speaker 27) as an effect component is executed (step S8013). For example, in order to display an image according to the fluctuation pattern on the effect display device 9, an instruction is output to the VDP 109. Further, in order to control various lamps to turn on / off, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the lamp driver board 35. In addition, in order to output sound from the speaker 27, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the sound output board 70.

  In this embodiment, the CPU for effect control 101 controls variable display of the effect pattern according to the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation pattern command in a one-to-one manner, but the CPU 101 for effect control controls the fluctuation pattern command The variation pattern to be used may be selected from a plurality of types of variation patterns corresponding to.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 sets a value corresponding to the fluctuation time specified by the fluctuation pattern command in the fluctuation time timer (step S8014).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 stores the start winning winning command stored in the start winning winning command storage area (a symbol designating command, a variation category command, and a pending storage number increment designating command (first pending storage number increment) Deletes one command at the time of starting winning combination stored in the first storage area among the designated command or the second reserved memory number addition specifying command), and shifts the contents of the starting winning time command storage area ( Step S8015).

  Then, the effect control CPU 101 sets the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the effect symbol process (step S802) (step S8016).

  FIG. 48 is a flow chart showing a process during production design fluctuation (step S802) in the production control process. In the effect symbol variation processing, the effect control CPU 101 first subtracts 1 from the value of the process timer (step S8101) and subtracts 1 from the value of the variation time timer (step S8102). When the process timer times out (step S8103), the process data is switched. That is, the process timer set value set next in the process table is set in the process timer (step S8104). Further, the control state of the rendering device is changed based on the display control execution data, lamp control execution data and sound number data set next to the display control execution data (step S8105).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the action effect is being executed and the end timing of the effect effect is reached (step S8106). In addition, it can be specifically determined by checking the value of the fluctuation time timer set in step S8014 whether or not it is the end timing of the effect presentation. If it is the end timing of the action effect, the effect control CPU 101 causes the pending display of the notice object to be blue pending or based on the change pattern stored in the pending advance attraction setting information storage area (see step S6008). It is checked whether it is the timing to change to red hold (step S8107). If it is the change timing to blue hold or red hold, the effect control CPU 101 controls the first hold storage display unit 9a to change the display mode of the hold display of the notice object to blue hold or red hold. The operation is performed (step S8108).

  If it is not time to change to blue hold or red hold, the effect control CPU 101 displays the hold target of the advance notice based on the change pattern stored in the hold advance effect setting information storage area (see step S6008). It is checked whether or not it is the change timing to the normal hold (step S8109). If it is the change timing to the normal hold, the effect control CPU 101 performs control to change the display mode of the hold display of the advance notice object to the normal hold in the first hold storage display unit 9a (step S8110).

  Next, even if the effect control CPU 101 does not come to the end timing of the action effect, it is stored in the other pending storage based on the change pattern stored in the on-hold notice rendering setting information storage area (see step S6008). It is checked whether there is a timing for changing to blue holding or red holding (step S8111). Then, if there is a timing to change to blue hold or red hold (Y in step S8111), the effect control CPU 101 causes the first hold storage display unit 9a to display the display mode of the hold display of the notice object. Is controlled to blue hold or red hold (step S8112). That is, in this embodiment, it may be determined that the effect presentation is not performed even if it is a variable display at which it is time to change from special hold to blue hold or red hold (see steps S8008 and S8009). Even if the effect presentation is not performed, control is performed to change the hold display at the timing of changing from special hold to blue hold or red hold to blue hold or red hold.

  Next, even if the effect control CPU 101 does not come to the end timing of the action effect, it is stored in the other pending storage based on the change pattern stored in the on-hold notice rendering setting information storage area (see step S6008). It is checked whether there is a timing at which change to the normal hold is made (step S8113). Then, if there is a change timing to the normal hold (Y in step S8113), the effect control CPU 101 normally holds the display mode of the hold display of the advance notice object in the first hold storage display unit 9a. Control to change to (step S8114). That is, in this embodiment, even if it is a variable display at which change timing from special hold to normal hold may be determined not to execute the effect presentation (see steps S8008 and S8009) Even when the effect is not executed, control is performed to change the hold display at the change timing from special hold to normal hold to normal hold.

  Then, if the fluctuation time timer has timed out (step S8115), the effect control CPU 101 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the effect symbol fluctuation stop process (step S803) (step S8116).

  FIG. 49 is a flow chart showing the effect symbol fluctuation stop process (step S803) in the effect control process. In the effect symbol fluctuation stop processing, the effect control CPU 101 first confirms whether a stop symbol display flag indicating that the stop symbol of the effect symbol is displayed is set (step S8301). If the stop symbol display flag is set, the process proceeds to step S8305. In this embodiment, when the big hit symbol is displayed as the stop symbol of the effect symbol, the stop symbol display flag is set in step S8304. When the fanfare effect is executed, the stop symbol display flag is reset. Therefore, the fact that the stop symbol display flag is set means that the big hit symbol has been displayed in a stopped state but the fanfare effect has not yet been executed, so the processing to display the stop symbol of the effect symbol in step S8302 is executed Instead, the process proceeds to step S8305.

  If the stop symbol display flag is not set, the effect control CPU 101 performs control to stop and display the determined stop symbol (discard symbol, big hit symbol) (step S8302).

  Next, when neither the big hit symbol nor the small hit symbol is displayed in the process of step S8302 (that is, when the off symbol is displayed) (N in step S8303), the CPU 101 for effect control shifts to step S8311. Do.

  When the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the process of step S8302 (Y in step S8303), the effect control CPU 101 sets a stop symbol display flag (step S8304).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not any of the big hit start designation commands has been received (step S8305). Note that whether or not any jackpot start designation command has been received, specifically, a flag (big hit start designation command reception flag) indicating that the jackpot start designation command set in the command analysis process has been received, This determination can be made by checking whether a flag (small hit / suddenly sudden change big hit start specified command reception flag) indicating that the small hit / sudden sudden change big hit start specification command has been received is set. If one of the big hit start designation commands has been received, the effect control CPU 101 resets the stop symbol display flag (step S8306), and selects the process table according to the fanfare effect (step S8307). If the big hit start designated command reception flag or the small hit / suddenly definite big hit big start designation command received flag is set, the effect control CPU 101 resets the set flag.

  Then, the effect control CPU 101 starts the process timer by setting the process timer set value in the process timer (step S8308), and the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number Control of the rendering device (rendering display device 9 as a rendering component, various lamps as a rendering component, and speakers 27 as a rendering component) is executed according to data 1 and movable member control data 1) (step S8309). Thereafter, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value according to the big hit display process (step S804) (step S8310).

  When it is determined that neither the big hit nor the small hit is made (N in step S8303), the CPU for effect control 101 responds to the fluctuation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800) for the value of the effect control process flag. The value is updated (step S8311).

  Next, a specific example of the effect mode of the on-hold notice effect will be described. FIG. 50 and FIG. 51 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of the effect mode of the on-hold notice effect. Among these, FIG. 50 shows an effect aspect of the on-hold notice effect when the on-hold display of the notice object finally changes to red on-hold. Further, FIG. 51 shows an effect mode of the on-hold notice effect when the on-hold display of the notice object finally returns to the on-hold. In FIGS. 50 and 51, the mode of the effect screen changes in the order of (1) (2) (3).

  First, with reference to FIG. 50, an effect aspect of the on-hold notice effect in the case where the on-hold display of the advance notice object finally changes to red on-hold will be described. As shown in FIG. 50 (1), it is assumed that a start winning on the first start winning opening 13 has newly occurred while the variable display of the left middle right design symbol is being executed on the effect display 9. In this example, it is assumed that the first winning storage number has newly increased to 4 and the first pending storage number has been increased to 4 in the state where the first pending storage number is 3, and the normal pending storage display unit 9a is increased by 1 normally. It shall be done. Further, in this example, it is assumed that the final display mode of the new hold display is determined to be red hold, and the change pattern 410 is determined as the change pattern. Then, based on the end of the fluctuation display time, as shown in FIG. 50 (2), the fluctuation display of the effect pattern is ended in the effect display device 9.

  Next, one pending storage is digested and one pending display is shifted and displayed one by one, and as shown in FIG. 50 (3), the next variable display is started on the effect display device 9. In the example shown in FIG. 50 (3), when the variable display is started, the hold display of the advance notice object is changed from the normal hold to the special hold of the triangle display based on the change pattern 410 (see step S8005). Then, based on the end of the fluctuation display time, as shown in FIG. 50 (4), the fluctuation display of the effect pattern is ended in the effect display device 9.

  Next, one pending storage is digested and one pending display is shifted and displayed, and the next variable display is started on the effect display device 9 as shown in FIG. 50 (5). In the example shown in FIG. 50 (5), when the variable display is started, it is judged that it is the executable timing of the action presentation based on the change pattern 410, and it is decided to execute the action presentation It is assumed that the type is determined to be action effect B (see step S8008). Further, based on the determination result, as shown in FIG. 50 (5), the action effect B is executed in the variable display of the effect pattern (see steps S8010, S8013, and S8105). In the example shown in FIG. 50 (5), a case is shown in which character B appears as the action effect B, and the effect is executed such that the character B throws the ball toward the special hold. Moreover, in the example shown in FIG. 50 (5), the case where the fluctuation display of a production | presentation pattern is shrunkly displayed on the edge part of the display screen of the effect display apparatus 9 is shown during execution of an effect. Next, in the present example, as shown in FIG. 50 (6), even when the effect presentation B ends, the pending display of the advance notice object does not change with the special pending based on the change pattern 410. Then, based on the end of the variation display time, as shown in FIG. 50 (7), the variation display of the effect design is ended in the effect display device 9.

  Next, one pending storage is digested and one pending display is shifted and displayed one by one, and as shown in FIG. 50 (8), the next variable display is started on the effect display device 9. In the example shown in FIG. 50 (8), when the variable display is started, it is determined that it is the executable timing of the effect presentation based on the change pattern 410, and it is decided to execute the effect presentation. It is assumed that the type is determined to be action effect C (see step S8008). Further, based on the determination result, as shown in FIG. 50 (8), the action effect C is executed in the variable display of the effect pattern (see steps S8010, S8013, and S8105). In the example shown in FIG. 50 (8), a case is shown in which the character C appears as the action effect C, and the effect is executed such that the character C throws the ball toward the special hold. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 50 (8), there is shown a case where the variation display of the effect design is reduced and displayed at the end of the display screen of the effect display 9 while the effect is being executed. Next, in the present example, as shown in FIG. 50 (9), when the end timing of the action effect C comes, the hold display of the advance notice object changes from special hold to red hold based on the change pattern 410 (steps S8107 and S8108). reference).

  In the example shown in FIG. 50, a case is shown where a special display of triangle display is displayed as a special display, but if it is determined to be a change pattern for displaying a special display of rectangular display, FIG. 3) The special display of the rectangular display is displayed in (8). Further, in the example shown in FIG. 50, the case where red hold is displayed as the final display mode is shown, but in the case where it is determined to be the change pattern for displaying blue hold as the final display mode, FIG. Change from special hold to blue hold in 9).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 51, an effect aspect of the on-hold notice effect in the case where the on-hold display of the advance notice object is finally returned to the on-hold will be described. As shown in FIG. 51 (1), it is assumed that a start winning on the first start winning opening 13 has newly occurred while the variable display of the left middle right design symbol is being executed in the effect display 9. In this example, it is assumed that the first winning storage number has newly increased to 4 and the first pending storage number has been increased to 4 in the state where the first pending storage number is 3, and the normal pending storage display unit 9a is increased by 1 normally. It shall be done. Further, in this example, it is assumed that the final display mode of the new hold display is determined to be normal hold (with special hold), and the change pattern 402 is determined as the change pattern. Then, based on the end of the fluctuation display time, as shown in FIG. 51 (2), the fluctuation display of the effect pattern is ended in the effect display device 9.

  Next, one pending storage is digested and one pending display is shifted and displayed, and as shown in FIG. 51 (3), the next variable display is started on the effect display device 9. In the example shown in FIG. 51 (3), when the variable display is started, the hold display of the advance notice object is changed from the normal hold to the special hold of the triangle display based on the change pattern 402 (see step S8005). Then, based on the end of the fluctuation display time, as shown in FIG. 51 (4), the fluctuation display of the effect pattern is ended in the effect display device 9.

  Next, one pending storage is digested and one pending display is shifted and displayed, and as shown in FIG. 51 (5), the next variable display is started on the effect display 9. In the example shown in FIG. 51 (5), when the variable display is started, it is judged that it is the executable timing of the action presentation based on the change pattern 402, and it is decided to execute the action presentation It is assumed that the type is determined to be action effect B (see step S8008). Further, based on the determination result, as shown in FIG. 51 (5), the action effect B is executed in the variable display of the effect pattern (see steps S8010, S8013, and S8105). In the example shown in FIG. 51 (5), a case is shown in which character B appears as action effect B, and the effect is executed such that character B throws a ball toward special holding. Moreover, in the example shown in FIG. 51 (5), the case where the fluctuation display of a production | presentation pattern is shrunkly displayed on the edge part of the display screen of the effect display apparatus 9 is shown during execution of an effect production. Next, in the present example, as shown in FIG. 51 (6), even when the effect presentation B ends, the pending display of the advance notice object does not change with the special pending based on the change pattern 402. Then, based on the end of the fluctuation display time, as shown in FIG. 51 (7), the fluctuation display of the effect pattern is ended in the effect display device 9.

  Next, one pending storage is digested and one pending display is shifted and displayed, and as shown in FIG. 51 (8), the next variable display is started on the effect display device 9. In the example shown in FIG. 51 (8), when the variable display is started, it is determined that it is the executable timing of the action presentation based on the change pattern 402, and it is decided to execute the action presentation. It is assumed that the type is determined to be the effect presentation A (see step S8008). Further, based on the determination result, as shown in FIG. 51 (8), the action effect A is executed in the variable display of the effect pattern (see steps S8010, S8013, and S8105). In the example shown in FIG. 51 (8), a case is shown in which character A appears as the action effect A, and the effect is executed such that the character A throws a ball toward special holding. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 51 (8), there is shown a case where the fluctuation display of the effect design is reduced and displayed at the end of the display screen of the effect display 9 while the effect is being executed. Next, in the present example, as shown in FIG. 51 (9), the hold display of the advance notice object changes from special hold to normal hold based on the change pattern 402 when the end timing of the action effect A comes (steps S8109 and S8110). reference).

  In the example shown in FIG. 51, a case is shown where the special display of triangle display is displayed as the special display, but if it is determined to be the change pattern for displaying the special display of rectangular display, FIG. 3) The special display of the rectangular display is displayed in (8).

  In the on-hold notice effect shown in FIGS. 50 and 51, the manner in which the action effect is shown may differ depending on which display mode the on-hold display changes (or does not change). For example, if the hold display does not change with the special hold, it will display characters such as "failure" or if the hold display drops from special hold to normal hold, it will display characters such as "big failure", When the hold display is changed from special hold to blue hold or red hold, characters such as “success” may be displayed.

  Also, for example, in the case where the display mode of the hold display may change from blue hold to red hold, if the hold display changes from blue hold to red hold, a character display such as “success” is displayed. If the hold display changes from special hold to red hold at once, characters such as "very successful" may be displayed.

  As described above, according to this embodiment, it is possible to display the specific display (in the present example, the hold display) corresponding to the variable display, and the specific display by the first aspect (in the present example, the special hold). After displaying the change display effect of changing the display mode of the specific display (in this example, the hold notification effect with the action effect) can be executed. In addition, as the change effect, after the specific display is displayed in the first mode, an effect of changing the display mode of the specific display to the second mode (in this example, blue hold or red hold in the present embodiment) can be performed. When the display mode of the specific display is not changed to the second mode after the specific display is displayed according to the first mode as the change effect, the display mode of the specific display is the third mode (generally, in this example, It is possible to execute an effect of changing to "hold". The specific display displayed in the third mode has a lower rate of change to the second mode than the specific display displayed in the first mode (in this example, as shown in FIGS. 40 and 41, special hold) The change pattern that changes from red to normal hold and then changes to red hold also has only the change patterns 411 and 414 that can be selected only when the first hold memory number is 4 and the super reach jackpot at the start winning combination, There are very few allocations, and the change patterns 31, 32, and 401 to 404, which do not change from normal hold, allocate more judgment values, and after changing from special hold to normal hold, there is no chance to change to red hold. May be). Therefore, it is possible to prevent a drop in the rendering effect when executing the change rendering.

  Further, according to this embodiment, the specific display displayed by the third aspect has a lower degree of advantage than the specific display displayed by the first aspect (in this example, as shown in FIG. 39, special hold) If the status changes from normal to normal (in the case of normal hold (with special hold)), the percentage of super reach jackpots or super reach loss is lower than in the case of blue hold or red hold, and non-reach miss A high percentage of Therefore, it is possible to prevent a drop in the rendering effect when executing the change rendering.

  Specifically, the first aspect (in the present example, the special hold) is continuously displayed even if the action presentation of the failure mode is executed in the hold notification effect, the first aspect (in the present example) There is a possibility that the sense of expectation for the special hold may decrease, but in this embodiment, the first aspect (in this example, the special hold) changes to the third aspect (in the present example, the normal hold). Expectations for the aspect can be enhanced, and a reduction in the rendering effect when executing the change rendering can be prevented.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, the hold display changed from the special hold to the normal hold is shown as the “specific display displayed by the third mode”, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, it may be configured to include what is displayed as normal hold from the beginning without going through special hold as the “specific display displayed according to the third aspect”, and even with such normal hold, special hold and It may be configured to have a low rate of change to blue hold or red hold, or may be configured to have a low degree of advantage.

  As described above, in this embodiment, even when the normal hold is the same, if the special hold is changed to the normal hold, the degree of expectation is lower and the advantage is lower than when the normal hold is displayed from the beginning. It's getting lower.

  In this embodiment, although the case where big hit expectation degree and reach (super reach) expectation degree differ as "the advantage degree" was shown, it is constituted so that probability change expectation degrees may differ not only in such a mode. It is also good.

  Further, according to this embodiment, the display mode of the specific display includes at least the first mode (in this example, special hold, and may be normal hold) and the second mode (in this example) having a high degree of advantage. , Blue hold, red hold). As the change effect, after displaying the specific display in the first mode, it is possible to execute an effect of changing the display mode of the specific display to the second mode, and according to the execution mode of the executed change effect, the change effect It is possible to execute the change presentation according to different proportions after (in this example, even if the action presentation is performed in the hold announcement presentation, if the change remains the special hold, the action presentation is executed again and the special hold is performed) It is possible to change from blue hold to red hold, but when the action effect is executed in the hold notice effect and changes from special hold to blue hold or red hold, the action effect is not executed thereafter). Therefore, attention can be paid to the change presentation that is executed first, and the interest when the change presentation is performed can be improved.

  In this embodiment, in the case where the effect presentation is executed in the suspension announcement effect and the special suspension changes to a blue suspension or a red suspension, a case is shown in which the operation presentation is not executed thereafter. However, the effect may be configured to be executable at a low rate. As such, in the case of "performing change by different proportions after the change effect depending on the execution mode of the change effect that has been executed", the action after that is changed from the special hold to the blue hold or the red hold. The one with a low execution ratio of production is also included.

  Further, according to this embodiment, after the specific indication is displayed in the first mode as the change effect, it is possible to execute an effect of changing the display mode of the specific display to the second mode, and the executed change effect It is possible to execute the change presentation by the different presentation mode after the change presentation according to the execution mode of (in this example, even if the action presentation is executed in the hold announcement presentation, it does not change with the special hold) After that, the effect production is executed again, and it is possible to change from special hold to blue hold or red hold, but when the action effect is executed in the hold preview effect to change from special hold to blue hold or red hold, If the effect presentation is performed in the holding advance presentation effect and the special suspension does not change, then the operation presentation is executed again and the blue suspension from the special suspension is performed. There is the case that change to red hold and if changes, many variations of the representation embodiment.). Therefore, attention can be paid to the change presentation that is executed first, and the interest when the change presentation is performed can be improved.

  Moreover, according to this embodiment, after the specific indication is displayed in the first mode as the change effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the specific indication to the second mode can be executed, and the executed change effect is Depending on the execution mode, the rate at which the change effect is to be performed for the specific display after the change effect is different (in the present example, when a plurality of special reservations are displayed, the action is performed in the on-hold notice effect) If the effect is executed and the first special hold changes to blue hold or red hold, then the effect is executed only for the second or later special hold, and the hold display changes. Although there is no change in the first special hold, the effect presentation is executed for the first special hold and the hold indication can be changed). Therefore, attention can be paid to the change presentation that is executed first, and the interest when the change presentation is performed can be improved.

  Further, according to this embodiment, after the specific display is displayed in the first mode as the change effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the specific display to the second mode can be executed, and a plurality of types of changes can be made. It is possible to execute the effect (in this example, the effect effects A to C can be executed in the hold notification effect), and depending on the execution mode of the executed change effect, any type of change effect after the change effect The ratio of whether to execute is different (in this example, when the effect presentation B is executed, the ratio that does not change with the special hold is high, and when the effect hold with the special hold is not performed. Because there are many cases that change to normal hold, blue hold, and red hold, the ratio of action effect A and action effect C becomes high). Therefore, attention can be paid to the change presentation that is executed first, and the interest when the change presentation is performed can be improved.

  In the case where the effect presentation can be executed even after the special suspension changes to the normal suspension, “any type of change presentation is executed after the change presentation according to the execution mode of the executed change presentation The “proportions of performing” may be different from each other, for example, it may include one in which an action effect (action effect of a gusset) in which the display mode of the hold display does not change is easy to be performed in the action effect performed later.

  Further, according to this embodiment, after the specific display is displayed in the first mode (in this example, the special hold) as the change effect, the display mode of the specific display is the second mode having a high degree of advantage (the present example) In the case where it is possible to execute an effect of changing to blue hold or red hold) and display the specific display according to the first mode as the change effect, the display mode of the specific display is not changed to the second mode, It is possible to execute an effect of changing the display mode of the specific display to the third mode (in this example, normal hold). Then, the display mode of the specific display is changed to the third mode at a different ratio according to the execution mode of the change effect (in this example, as shown in FIG. 45A, the action effect A is executed in the hold notification effect) When the rate of special hold changes to normal hold). Therefore, it is possible to prevent a drop in the rendering effect when executing the change rendering.

  Further, according to this embodiment, there are a plurality of types of the first mode (in this example, special hold for triangle display and special hold for rectangular display), and as a change effect, the first mode (special hold in this example) It is possible to execute an effect of changing the display mode of the specific display to the second mode (in this example, blue hold or red hold in this case) after displaying the specific display by the first display. If the display mode of the specific display is not changed to the second mode after the specific display is displayed according to the mode, the effect of changing the display mode of the specific display to the third mode (in this example, normal hold) can be performed It is. Then, the display mode of the specific display is changed to the third mode by a different ratio according to which type of the first mode is used to display the specific display (as shown in FIG. 39C in this example) When the special display of triangle display is displayed, the ratio of changing from special storage to normal display is higher than when the special display of rectangular display is displayed). Therefore, it is possible to prevent a drop in the rendering effect when executing the change rendering.

  In this embodiment, a case is shown where there are two types of special reservations (triangular display and rectangular display) having different shapes as a plurality of first aspects, but the present invention is not limited to such an aspect, for example, display color There may be a plurality of different types of hold indication (for example, blue and green hold indication) different from each other. Further, for example, the present invention may be configured to have three or more types of first aspects (normal suspension and special suspension), not limited to two types of first embodiments (normal suspension and special suspension).

  Further, according to this embodiment, after the specific display is displayed in the first mode (in this example, the special hold) as the change effect, the display mode of the specific display is the second mode having a high degree of advantage (the present example) In the case where it is possible to execute an effect of changing to blue hold or red hold) and display the specific display according to the first mode as the change effect, the display mode of the specific display is not changed to the second mode, It is possible to execute an effect of changing the display mode of the specific display to the third mode (in this example, normal hold). And in the predetermined period, the ratio of changing the display mode of the specific display to the third mode is low (in this example, in the period when the hold display of the notice object is displayed at the fourth and third positions, It is difficult for the notice display of the notice target to change from special hold to normal hold, and the hold display of the notice target may never change from special hold to normal hold. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a drop in the rendering effect when executing the change rendering.

  Further, according to this embodiment, as the first mode, the specific display is displayed in a special mode (in this example, special hold) different from the normal mode. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a drop in the rendering effect when executing the change rendering.

  It should be noted that in this embodiment, in the case of red hold, the expectation (reliability) for the big hit is high, and in the case of blue hold, the expectation for the big hit (reliability) is high. The expectation (reliability) for the big hit may be the same in the special hold and the special hold, and the special hold may be configured to have a higher expectation (reliability) for the big hit than the normal hold.

  In this embodiment, the special suspension is displayed as the first aspect, and the normal suspension is displayed as the third mode, and the special suspension is changed to the normal suspension, but it is limited to such an embodiment. Absent. For example, a normal hold is displayed in the position of the first mode, and as the third mode, it is indicated that the display mode of the hold display has been changed (eg, a round display including a character display of "ready") May be configured to be displayed. Hereinafter, the modification 1 configured to be able to display the completed hold will be described.

  FIG. 52 is an explanatory view showing an example of the effect mode of the on-hold notice effect in the first modification. In the first modification, the processing performed by the effect control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the effect control CPU 101) is the process shown in FIGS. 37 to 41, 43, 45 to 46, and 48. In the processing and each decision table, it is equivalent to reading a special hold into a normal hold, and replacing a normal hold with a changed special hold into a completed hold.

  In the first modification shown in FIG. 52, too, there are very few allocations for change patterns that change to red hold after changing from special hold to read change pattern 411, 414 shown in FIG. The rate of change to hold is lower than the rate of change from normal hold to red hold, and closed hold has a lower advantage than normal hold.

  In the first modification, as shown in FIG. 52 (1), when the variable display of the left middle right design symbol is being executed in the effect display device 9, a start winning to the first start winning opening 13 newly occurs. It shall be done. In the example shown in FIG. 52, it is assumed that the first winning storage number is newly increased to 4 and the first pending storage number is increased to 4 in the state where the first pending storage number is 3, and the first pending storage display portion 9a is normally suspended. It shall be increased by one. Further, in this example, it is assumed that the final display mode of the new pending display is determined to be the pending status, and the change pattern 402 (however, the change pattern read as the pending status etc.) is determined as the change pattern. Then, based on the end of the fluctuation display time, as shown in FIG. 52 (2), the fluctuation display of the effect pattern is ended in the effect display device 9.

  Next, one pending storage is digested and one pending display is shifted and displayed, and the next variable display is started on the effect display device 9 as shown in FIG. 52 (3). However, in the example shown in FIG. 52 (3), when the variable display is started, the pending display of the advance notice object does not usually change with the pending based on the change pattern 402. Then, based on the end of the fluctuation display time, as shown in FIG. 52 (4), the fluctuation display of the effect pattern is ended in the effect display device 9.

  Next, one pending storage is digested and one pending display is shifted and displayed, and the next variable display is started on the effect display 9, as shown in FIG. 52 (5). In the example shown in FIG. 52 (5), when the variable display is started, it is judged that it is the executable timing of the action presentation based on the change pattern 402, and it is decided to execute the action presentation It is assumed that the type is determined to be action effect B (see step S8008). Further, based on the determination result, as shown in FIG. 52 (5), the action effect B is executed in the variable display of the effect pattern (see steps S8010, S8013, and S8105). In the example shown in FIG. 52 (5), when the character B appears as the action effect B and the effect is executed such that the character B throws the ball toward the hold display (normal hold) of the advance notice object. Is shown. Moreover, in the example shown in FIG. 52 (5), the case where the fluctuation display of a production | presentation pattern is shrunkly displayed on the edge part of the display screen of the effect display apparatus 9 is shown during execution of an effect production. Next, in the present example, as shown in FIG. 52 (6), even when the end effect of the action effect B comes, the pending display of the advance notice object does not change as usual, based on the change pattern 402. Then, based on the end of the fluctuation display time, as shown in FIG. 52 (7), the fluctuation display of the effect pattern is ended in the effect display device 9.

  Next, one pending storage is digested and one pending display is shifted and displayed one by one, and as shown in FIG. 52 (8), the next variable display is started on the effect display device 9. In the example shown in FIG. 52 (8), when the variable display is started, it is judged that it is the executable timing of the action presentation based on the change pattern 402, and it is decided to execute the action presentation and It is assumed that the type is determined to be the effect presentation A (see step S8008). Further, based on the determination result, as shown in FIG. 52 (8), the action effect A is executed in the variable display of the effect pattern (see steps S8010, S8013, and S8105). In the example shown in FIG. 52 (8), when the character A appears as the action effect A, and the effect is executed such that the character A throws the ball toward the hold display (normal hold) of the advance notice object. Is shown. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 52 (8), there is shown a case where the fluctuation display of the effect design is reduced and displayed at the end of the display screen of the effect display 9 while the effect is being executed. Next, in the present example, as shown in FIG. 52 (9), when the end timing of the action effect A comes, the pending display of the advance notice object changes from normal pending to completed pending based on the change pattern 402 (steps S8109 and S8110). reference).

According to the first modification shown in FIG. 52, the specific display is displayed in the normal mode (normal suspension) as the first mode. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a drop in the rendering effect when executing the change rendering.

  In this embodiment, the expression “normal mode (normal hold)” is used, but the normal mode (normal hold) means, for example, a display mode of a hold display that is displayed when the hold notification effect is executed. The display mode that is most frequently displayed among the above is a display mode that suggests no possibility of jackpot or reach or is relatively low.

  Further, in this embodiment, the case of performing the on-hold notice effect so that only the on-hold indication can be changed is shown, but the invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, in the gaming machine configured to be able to display the active display corresponding to the currently executing variable display by the display mode that has taken over the display mode of the hold display, the hold display is digested and the variable display of the advance object is being executed. Even in the case where it becomes, the display mode of the active display may be configured to be changeable. That is, not only when the pending display is configured to be changeable as the specific display, but also the active display may be configured to be changeable as the specific display. A second modification in which the display mode of the active display is also changeable will be described below.

  FIG. 53 is an explanatory view showing an example of the effect mode of the on-hold notice effect in the second modification. In the second modification, the processing performed by the effect control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the effect control CPU 101) is performed in each of FIGS. 37 to 41, 43, 45 to 46, and 48. In the processing and decision tables, add the processing to display the active display, and also configure the display similar to the normal hold, special hold, blue hold, red hold, etc. in the active display to change the display mode of the active display The change pattern may be configured as much as possible.

  In the second modification, as shown in FIG. 53 (1), when the variable display of the left middle right design symbol is being executed in the effect display device 9, a start winning to the first start winning opening 13 newly occurs. It shall be done. In this example, it is assumed that the first winning storage number has newly increased to 3 and the first pending storage number has increased to 3 in the state where the first pending storage number is 2, and the normal pending storage display unit 9a is increased by one for normal retention. It shall be done. Further, it is assumed that an active display unit 9F is provided on the display screen of the effect display device 9, and an active display corresponding to the currently displayed variable display is displayed on the active display unit 9F. Also, in this example, it is assumed that the final display mode of the new hold display is determined to be normal hold (with special hold), and the change pattern 402 (but with the active display also changed to be changeable) as the change pattern. It shall be decided. Then, based on the end of the fluctuation display time, as shown in FIG. 53 (2), the fluctuation display of the effect pattern is ended in the effect display device 9.

  Then, one pending storage is digested and one pending display is shifted and displayed, and the next variable display is started on the effect display device 9 as shown in FIG. 53 (3). In the example shown in FIG. 53 (3), when the variable display is started, the hold display of the advance notice object is changed from the normal hold to the special hold of the triangle display based on the change pattern 402 (see step S8005). Then, based on the end of the fluctuation display time, as shown in FIG. 53 (4), the fluctuation display of the effect pattern is ended in the effect display device 9.

  Next, one pending storage is digested and one pending display is shifted and displayed, and as shown in FIG. 53 (5), the next variable display is started on the effect display 9. In the example shown in FIG. 53 (5), when the variable display is started, it is judged that it is the executable timing of the effect presentation based on the change pattern 402, and it is decided to execute the effect presentation. It is assumed that the type is determined to be action effect B (see step S8008). Further, based on the determination result, as shown in FIG. 53 (5), the action effect B is executed in the variable display of the effect pattern (see steps S8010, S8013, and S8105). In the example shown in FIG. 53 (5), a case is shown in which character B appears as the action effect B, and the effect is executed such that the character B throws the ball toward the special hold. Moreover, in the example shown in FIG. 53 (5), the case where the fluctuation display of a production | presentation pattern is shrunkly displayed by the edge part of the display screen of the effect display apparatus 9 is shown during execution of an effect. Next, in the present example, as shown in FIG. 53 (6), even if the end timing of the action effect B comes, the pending display of the advance notice object does not change with the special pending based on the change pattern 402. Then, based on the end of the fluctuation display time, as shown in FIG. 53 (7), the fluctuation display of the effect pattern is ended in the effect display device 9.

  Next, one pending storage is digested, and the next variation display is started on the effect display device 9 as shown in FIG. 53 (8). Further, based on the start of the change display of the advance notice object, as shown in FIG. 53 (8), the active display of the display mode similar to the special hold corresponding to the change display of the notice object currently being executed. It is displayed on the active display unit 9F. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 53 (8), when the variable display is started, it is judged that it is the executable timing of the action presentation based on the change pattern 402, and it is decided to execute the action presentation It is assumed that the type of effect is determined to be the effect effect A (see step S8008). Further, based on the determination result, as shown in FIG. 53 (8), the action effect A is executed in the variable display of the effect pattern (see steps S8010, S8013, and S8105). In the example shown in FIG. 53 (8), a character A appears as the action effect A, and the effect is executed such that the character A throws the ball toward the active display of the same display mode as the special hold The case is shown. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 53 (8), there is shown a case where the fluctuation display of the effect design is reduced and displayed at the end of the display screen of the effect display 9 while the effect is being executed. Next, in this example, as shown in FIG. 53 (9), when the end timing of the action effect A comes, the active display of the display mode similar to the special hold based on the change pattern 402 is the display mode similar to the normal hold. The display changes to the active display (see steps S8109 and S8110).

  When the blue or blue display is determined as the final display mode, the active display may change to the active display of the same display mode as blue hold or red hold in FIG. 53 (9).

  Further, according to this embodiment, the action and effect performed by the aspect acting on the specific display displayed in the first aspect (in this example, FIG. 50 (5), FIG. 50 (8), FIG. 51), it is possible to execute a change effect including the operation effect of the aspect shown in FIG. 51 (8). In addition, it is possible to execute the action effect a plurality of times for the specific display displayed by the first aspect of 1 (in this example, in the change patterns 402 and 404 shown in FIG. After the special hold is displayed at the timing of the second hold shift, the effect hold is executed but the special hold does not change, and the effect hold is performed at the third hold shift timing and the special hold is performed. Can change from normal to on hold). Therefore, the rendering effect in the case of executing the change rendering can be improved.

  In this embodiment, the case is shown where the change pattern capable of performing the action effect at most twice is provided, but the change pattern capable of executing the action effect three times or more is provided. It is also good.

  Further, according to this embodiment, when the display mode of the specific display displayed in the third mode changes to the second mode, the display mode of the specific display displayed in the first mode is the second mode. In this example, as shown in FIG. 41, a change pattern (change patterns 411 and 414) in which the red hold is finally displayed even if the normal hold returns from the special hold as shown in FIG. Change patterns 411 and 414 can be determined only in the case of a super reach jackpot). Therefore, the sense of expectation for the specific display displayed by the third aspect can be enhanced.

  In this embodiment, assuming that "the display mode of the specific display displayed in the third mode changes to the second mode", the case in which the hold display changed from special hold to normal hold is further changed to red hold Although shown, it may be configured to have a high degree of advantage also when, for example, the hold display displayed from the beginning on normal hold changes to red hold, not limited to such content.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, the final display mode and change pattern of the suspension display are determined at the start winning combination, and thereafter, the presence or absence and the type of the effect presentation are determined for each variable display. Not limited. For example, without using a change pattern, it is configured to determine the presence or absence and type of effect presentation each time the variable display, and to determine whether to change from special hold to normal hold, blue hold, or red hold. May be

Second Embodiment
In the gaming machine shown in the first embodiment, when the special hold is changed to the normal hold, the other hold display changes from the special hold to the normal hold until the hold display changed to the normal hold is digested. It may be configured to limit things. The second embodiment for restricting the change from special hold to normal hold will be described below.

  In this embodiment, the detailed description of the parts having the same configuration and processing as the first embodiment will be omitted, and the parts different from the first embodiment will be mainly described.

  FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing pending notification effect setting processing (step S800A) in the second embodiment. In this embodiment, in addition to the processing shown in the first embodiment, the processing of steps S6009 and S6010 is executed in the suspension announcement rendering setting processing. In step S6009, the effect control CPU 101 determines which of the change patterns 401 to 404, 412, and 414 (change pattern including a change from special hold to normal hold) the change pattern of the hold display determined in step S6007X. Whether or not it is confirmed (step S6009). If one of the change patterns 401 to 404, 412, and 414, the effect control CPU 101 sets a restriction flag indicating restriction of changing from special hold to normal hold (step S6010).

  In addition, when the limit display set in step S6010 changes from special hold to normal hold when the hold display is digested, it starts when the variation display corresponding to the hold display starts or ends. It is reset in processing and the effect design fluctuation stop processing.

  In this embodiment, in the process of step S6005X, the final display mode of the suspension display is determined using the final display mode determination table different from the process of step S6005 shown in the first embodiment (step S6005X) .

  55 and 56 are explanatory diagrams showing a specific example of the final display mode determination table in the second embodiment. However, when the first number of pending storages is 2, the effect control CPU 101 determines the final display mode of the pending display using the same final display mode decision table as in FIGS. 38 (A) to (C). Do.

  In this embodiment, if the first hold storage number stored in the first hold storage number storage area (see steps S628 and S635) is “3” or “4”, the effect control CPU 101 If the variation category indicated by the variation category command indicates non-reach loss (variation category 1 shown in FIG. 16), the hold 3 shown in FIG. 55 (D-1) if the restriction flag is not set. If the final display mode determination table for ~ 4 and the non-reach out and limit flag off is selected and the limit flag is set, the 3 to 4 reservations shown in FIG. 55 (D-2) and the non-reach out And the final display mode decision table for the limit flag ON is selected. Also, if the variation category indicated by the variation category command indicates a super reach loss (variation category 7 shown in FIG. 16), and if the restriction flag is not set, it is shown in FIG. 55 (E-1). If the final display mode determination table for 3 to 4 pending and the super reach is out and the limit flag off is selected, and the limit flag is set, 3 to 4 pending and the super shown in FIG. 55 (E-2) The final display mode determination table for reach out and limit flag on is selected. Further, if the variation category indicated by the variation category command indicates the super reach big hit (variation categories 23 and 26 shown in FIG. 17), if the restriction flag is not set, FIG. 56 (F-1). If the final display mode determination table for the 3 to 4 and the super reach big hit and the restriction flag off is selected and the restriction flag is set, the 3 to 4 reservations shown in FIG. 56 (F-2) And select a final display mode determination table for super reach jackpot and limit flag on. Then, the effect control CPU 101 performs a lottery process based on random numbers using the selected final display mode determination table, and determines the final display mode of the latest hold display.

  Further, in this embodiment, in the process of step S6007X, the change pattern of the suspension display is determined using the change pattern determination table different from the process of step S6007 shown in the first embodiment (step S6007X) .

  FIG. 57 is an explanatory diagram of a specific example of the change pattern determination table in the second embodiment. However, for the change pattern determination tables shown in FIGS. 40 (A) to (E) and FIGS. 41 (F) to 41 (H), the effect control CPU 101 changes those patterns shown in the first embodiment. A change pattern of the pending display is determined using a table similar to the determination table.

  In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 101 is configured such that the first pending storage number stored in the first pending storage number storage area (see steps S628 and S635) is “4”, and the variation indicated by the variation category command If the category indicates a super reach jackpot (the change categories 23, 26 shown in FIG. 17) and red hold is determined as the final display mode, hold 4 if the restriction flag is not set. If you select the change pattern determination table for individual and super reach big hit and red hold and limit flag off, and the limit flag is set, change pattern determination for 4 pending and super reach big hit and red hold and limit flag on Select a table

  As shown in FIGS. 55 and 56, in this embodiment, when the restriction flag is set (that is, when the hold indication changed from the special hold to the normal hold is displayed), the normal hold ( It is configured not to decide via special hold). Further, as shown in FIG. 57, in this embodiment, when the restriction flag is set, change patterns 411 and 414 including a change from special hold to normal hold are not determined. . With such a configuration, in this embodiment, when the special hold is changed to the normal hold, the other hold indication changes from the special hold to the normal hold until the hold indication changed to the normal hold is digested. There is no limit.

  In this embodiment, when the restriction flag is set (when the hold display changed from special hold to normal hold is displayed), the other hold display may change from special hold to normal hold. Although the case is shown in which there is no restriction, it is also possible to limit by limiting the rate at which other hold indication changes from special hold to normal hold, not limited to such an aspect.

  As described above, according to this embodiment, the number of specific displays displayed according to the third aspect is limited (in this example, when the restriction flag is set (that is, special hold to normal hold) In the case where the pending display changed to is displayed, the change patterns 411 and 414 including the change from normal hold (with special hold) and special hold to normal hold are not determined). Therefore, it is possible to prevent a drop in interest for the game when the change effect is executed.

Third Embodiment
In the first embodiment, the hold display is changed to a display mode (blue hold or red hold) having a higher degree of expectation than the normal mode, but the hold display can be changed to a display mode indicating the content of the effect You may configure it. Hereinafter, a third embodiment will be described in which the hold display can be changed to the display mode that suggests the contents of the effect.

  In this embodiment, the detailed description of the parts having the same configuration and processing as the first embodiment will be omitted, and the parts different from the first embodiment will be mainly described.

  In the first embodiment, the first hold storage display unit 9a and the second hold storage display unit 9b are provided. However, in this embodiment, the total number of pending storages is displayed instead of these. It is assumed that a total hold storage display unit is provided. In addition to the mode shown in this embodiment, the configuration shown in this embodiment is applied to the gaming machine provided with the first hold storage display unit 9a and the second hold storage display unit 9b. It is also good.

  Also, in the first embodiment, there is shown the case where the big hit type is usually big hit, positive variation big hit, and sudden positive variation big hit as a big hit type, but in this embodiment, instead of these, 15R true variation big hit, 8R Suppose that a definite big hit and a sudden big hit are provided.

  In the present embodiment, as a display mode of the hold display displayed in the total hold storage display unit, a normal display mode showing a reliability for becoming a 15R / 8R probability variation big hit, and a production suggestion suggesting the execution of a predetermined production A display mode is provided.

  The normal display mode includes "white" displayed in white, "red" displayed in red, and "gold" displayed in gold, and the reliability with respect to the 15R / 8R probability variation big hit Is gold> red> white.

  In the effect suggestion display mode, the first special suggestion mode that indicates that the special zone effect is to be notified by displaying the characters “special”, and the special zone effect by displaying the characters “special?” Displaying a second special suggestion mode that indicates that the subject is an advance notice, and a pseudo link suggestion mode that indicates that the pseudo ream is to be executed by displaying the letter “NEXT”; and a letter “SP” And SP suggestive mode suggesting development to super reach. The first special suggestion mode is a display mode that can be selected only when the special zone effect announcement is targeted, while the second special suggestion mode is selected regardless of whether the special zone effect is an advance objective or not It is a display mode to obtain. Also, the pseudo link suggestion mode is a display mode that can be selected only when performing pseudo link, and the SP suggestion mode is a display mode that can be selected only when developing into super reach.

  The special zone effect is an effect of displaying a special background different from the normal background by one change or a plurality of continuous changes. In addition, the special zone effect has a configuration in which the reliability against the 15R / 8R probability variation big hit is higher as the number of times of execution is larger. Hereinafter, starting the execution of the special zone effect is sometimes referred to as "entering the special zone". Immediately before entering the special zone, a rush success effect is performed. The rush success effect indicates that the entry into the special zone is decided after the entry into the special zone is suggested (for example, as shown in FIGS. 64 (4) and (5) described later, “special After displaying “zone chance!”, “Success!” Is displayed. In addition, when the player does not enter the special zone, the player may sometimes execute a rush failure effect which gives the player a sense of expectation by suggesting that the player enters the special zone. For example, after suggesting to enter the special zone as in the rush success presentation, an effect indicating that the special zone is not entered (for example, “special zone chance!” Is displayed and then “fail ...” is displayed. The effect can be implemented as a rush failure effect. Hereinafter, the rush success staging and the rush failure staging may be collectively referred to as “a rush notice presentation”. The rush advance presentation effect is an effect that is performed for three seconds from the start of the change. Then, when entering into the special zone, special zone effect is started 3 seconds after the start of fluctuation (at the end of the rush success effect). If the fluctuation time of the fluctuation for executing the rush advance presentation effect is shorter than 3 seconds, it is assumed that the rush advance announcement effect is forcibly terminated one second before the fluctuation stop. At that time, when entering into the special zone, the rush success effect is forcibly ended and the special zone effect is started.

  Further, in the present embodiment, while the pending display for pending storage for which no change has been performed is performed in the total pending storage display unit, and from the start to the end of the variable display for the pending storage, The hold display for the hold storage is continuously displayed on the active display unit different from the total hold storage display unit. That is, in the active display unit, the active display (the variable display corresponding image) corresponding to the variable display being executed is displayed. The active display is an image that shows the confidence that a big hit will occur based on the running variation. As the display mode of the active display, the same display mode as the above-described hold display ("white", "red", "gold" which is the normal display mode, the first special suggestion mode and the second special mode which is the production indication display mode) Suggestion aspect, pseudo link suggestion aspect, SP suggestion aspect) is provided.

  In the present embodiment, the display mode of the hold display and the active display is determined when the corresponding hold storage occurs (at the time of the start winning). Specifically, when the starting winning combination occurs, first, the change mode (the hold change pattern and the change timing to be described later) of the normal display mode is determined, and then it is determined whether to display in the effect suggestion display mode Do. When it is determined not to display in the effect suggestion display mode, the hold display is started in the normal display mode from the timing of the start winning combination. Moreover, when it is decided to display in the production indication display mode, the display of the suspension display is started in the presentation display mode from the timing at the start winning combination, and the presentation of the suggestion content is executed (for example, 5 seconds after starting special zone effects, 5 seconds after re-fluctuation in pseudo ream, 5 seconds after starting super reach), or when it is decided not to execute (for example, rush failure) When rendering is performed), it usually changes to a suggestion display mode.

  Further, in this embodiment, in the effect control process (step S 705), the suspension display control process for performing control relating to the suspension display is executed. 58 and 59 are flowcharts showing the hold display control process in the third embodiment. In the hold display control process, the effect control CPU 101 first executes a hold change pattern determination lottery for determining a hold change pattern of the hold display for the newly generated hold storage (step S3701). Specifically, the pending change pattern is determined using the pending change pattern determination table shown in FIG. 60 (A).

  FIG. 60 (A) is an explanatory view showing the hold change pattern determination table. In each of the pending change pattern determination tables shown in FIG. 60 (A), a decision value corresponding to the pending change pattern is assigned according to the determination result at the time of winning (15R probability variation big hit or 8R probability variation big hit, super reach deviation, etc.) However, in the example shown in FIG. 60 (A), the proportion of assigned judgment values is shown to simplify the description. For example, the effect control CPU 101 extracts a random number for the hold change pattern determination lottery, and determines the determination item to which a determination value that matches the extracted random number is assigned.

  For example, if the winning determination result is 15R probability variation big hit or 8R probability variation big hit, P01 at 10% ratio, P02 at 15% ratio, P02 at 20% ratio, P03 at 25% ratio, P04 at 25% ratio, P05 is determined as a pending change pattern at a rate of 30%.

  For example, if the result at the time of winning determination is a super reach loss, P01 at 70% ratio, P02 at 15% ratio, P03 at 7% ratio, P03 at 5% ratio, P04 ratio at 3% P05 is determined as the pending change pattern.

  For example, when the winning determination result is other than that, P01 is determined as the pending change pattern at a rate of 100%.

  By determining the holding change pattern at such a ratio, the reliability of the display mode of the holding display or the active display for becoming a 15R probability variation big hit or an 8R probability variation big hit is white <red <gold.

  In addition, the pending change pattern in the present embodiment does not become “red” (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “without red”, for example, P01.), And the pending change pattern becomes “red” (below, There are cases in which there are cases where there is red, for example, other than P01). Therefore, selection ratios with red and without red are shown in FIG. 60 (B).

  As shown in the figure, when the winning determination result is a 15R positive variation or a 8R positive variation, the red is selected at a rate of 90% and the red is selected at a percentage of 10%. If the winning determination result is out of the super reach, the red is selected at a rate of 30%, and the red is not selected at a rate of 70%. If the result at the time of winning determination is other, select 100% of no red.

  In this embodiment, when the selection ratio of the special zone effect execution and the selection ratio with red shown in FIG. 60 (B) are compared, when the winning determination result is 15R positive variation big hit or 8R positive variation big hit, If the selection ratio with red is higher than the ratio to execute special zone effects, but the result at the time of winning determination is a super reach loss, the selection ratio with red is lower than the ratio to execute special zone effects It has become. Therefore, in the case where red is selected, the reliability against being a 15R probability variation big hit or an 8R probability variation big hit is higher than when it is selected to execute the special zone effect. That is, in the present embodiment, it is configured that the display of the pending display or the active display with the display mode of “red” is higher in reliability than the special zone effect.

  In the present embodiment, although it is possible to select P02 to P05 only when the determination result at the time of winning is a 15R probability variation big hit, an 8R probability variation big hit or a super reach deviation, it is not limited to this. For example, it may be possible to select P02 to P05 even if the determination result at the time of winning is a sudden change big hit, a small hit, a normal reach or a non-reach out.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 stores the data indicating the pending change pattern determined in step S3701 in the storage area in the start winning command storage area (the storage area according to the total number of pending storages) by changing the pending change. The pattern is stored (step S3702). If the stored change pattern is the change pattern without change (P01 or P03), the process proceeds to step S3710. If the stored change pattern is any change pattern (P02, P04, P05), a change timing determination lottery is performed to determine the change timing (step S3704). Specifically, the change timing is determined using the first change timing determination lottery table shown in FIG. 61 (A) or the second change timing determination lottery table shown in FIG. 61 (B).

  FIG. 61 (A) is an explanatory view showing a first change timing determination lottery table. FIG. 61 (B) is an explanatory view showing a second change timing determination lottery table. In each of the change timing determination lottery tables shown in FIGS. 61A and 61B, a determination value corresponding to the change timing is assigned for each total number of pending storages, but the determination values are shown in FIGS. 61A and 61B. In the example, the proportion of assigned judgment values is shown to simplify the explanation. For example, the effect control CPU 101 extracts a random number for the change timing determination lottery, and determines the determination item to which a determination value that matches the extracted random number is assigned.

  First, the case where a change timing determination lottery is performed using the first change timing determination lottery table shown in FIG. 61A will be described. The first change timing determination lottery table is a change timing determination lottery table used when the winning determination result is a big hit.

  For example, when the total number of pending storages is “1”, the active timing is determined at a rate of 60%, and the active start time is determined as a change timing at a rate of 40%.

  For example, when the total number of pending storages is “2”, the active timing is determined at a 50% rate, the active start time at a 30% rate, and the first at a 20% rate as the change timing.

  For example, when the total number of pending storages is "3", active at 40%, active start at 30%, first at 20%, two at 10% The eye is determined as the change timing.

  For example, when the total number of pending storages is "4", active at 30% rate, active start time at 25% rate, 1 at 20% rate, 2 at 15% rate The third eye at a rate of 10% is determined as the change timing.

  For example, when the total number of pending storages is "5", the active start at 22%, the active start time at 20%, the first at 18%, two at 16% The eye is determined as the change timing of the third at a rate of 14% and the fourth at a rate of 10%.

  For example, when the total number of pending storages is "6", the active start at 22%, the active start time at 18%, the first at 16%, two at 14% The eye is determined as the change timing of the third at 12%, the fourth at 10%, and the fifth at 8%.

  For example, when the total number of pending storages is "7", active at 20% rate, active start time at 18% rate, 1 at 16% rate, 2 at 14% rate The change timing is determined as the change timing of the third at 12%, the fourth at 10%, the fifth at 6%, and the sixth at 4%.

  For example, when the total number of pending storages is "8", active at 20% rate, active start time at 18% rate, first at 16% rate, two at 14% rate Eyes: 3 in 12%, 4 in 8%, 5 in 6%, 6 in 4%, 7 in 2% The eye is determined as the change timing.

  Next, the case where a change timing determination lottery is performed using the second change timing determination lottery table shown in FIG. 61 (B) will be described. The second change timing determination lottery table is a change timing determination lottery table which is used when the determination result at the time of winning is a super reach loss.

  For example, when the total number of pending storages is “1”, the active timing is determined at a rate of 40%, and the active start time is determined as a change timing at a rate of 60%.

  For example, when the total number of pending storages is “2”, the active timing is determined at a rate of 20%, the active start time at a rate of 30%, and the first one at a rate of 50%.

  For example, when the total number of pending storages is "3", active at 10% rate, active start time at 20% rate, 1 at 30% rate, 2 at 40% rate The eye is determined as the change timing.

  For example, when the total number of pending storages is "4", active at 10%, active at 15%, first at 20%, two at 25% The third eye at a rate of 30% is determined as the change timing.

  For example, when the total number of pending storages is "5", the active start at 10%, the active start time at 14%, the first at 16%, two at 18% The eyes are determined as change timings at a rate of 20% for the third and at a rate of 22% for the fourth.

  For example, when the total number of pending storages is "6", active at a rate of 8%, active start time at a rate of 10%, first at a rate of 12%, two at a rate of 14% The eyes are determined as change timings at a rate of 16% for the third, 18% for the fourth, and 22% for the fifth.

  For example, when the total number of pending storages is "7", the active start at 4%, the active start time at 6%, the first at 10%, two at 12% The eyes are determined as change timings at the rate of 14%, the third at 16%, the fourth at 18%, the fifth at 18%, and the sixth at 20%.

  For example, when the total number of pending storages is "8", active at 2% rate, active start time at 4% rate, first at 6% rate, 2 at 8% rate Eyes: 3 in 12%, 4 in 14%, 5 in 16%, 6 in 18%, 7 in 20% The eye is determined as the change timing.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, it is easier to determine, as the change timing, an earlier timing after the start of the on-hold display, in the case of the off state than in the case of the big hit. Therefore, as for the timing at which the display mode of the hold display or the active display changes, the reliability against the big hit is higher at a later time after the start of the hold display. On the contrary, the configuration may be such that the reliability against the big hit is higher as early as the start of the hold display, and the change timing may not show the reliability against the big hit.

  In the present embodiment, when it is determined that the winning determination result is neither a big hit nor a super reach (others), only P01 can be selected as the pending change pattern, and thus the change timing for the other use. Although the determination lottery table is not provided, it is assumed that the change timing determination lottery table for other is provided if it is configured to be able to select the pending change pattern in which the display mode changes even if it is otherwise. It is also good.

  Thereafter, the effect control CPU 101 stores the determined change timing in the start winning game command storage area (step S3705). If the pending change pattern stored in step S3702 is the pending change pattern with two changes (ie, P04) (Y in step S3706), the change timing determination lottery is performed again (step S3707), If the changed change timing is different from the change timing stored in step S3705 (N in step S3708), the change timing determined in step S3707 is stored in the start winning command storage area (step S3709). If the change timing determined in step S3707 is the same as the change timing stored in step S3705 (Y in step S3708), a change timing determination lottery until a change timing different from the change timing stored in step S3705 is determined Step S3707) is repeatedly executed. Thus, two different change timings are determined. A plurality of combination patterns of two change timings may be provided, and two change timings may be determined collectively by selecting one of them.

  After that, the effect control CPU 101 executes processing (steps S3710 to S3725) related to displaying the on-hold display in the effect indication display mode. In the processing, specifically, a first process (steps S3710 to S3713) related to displaying the suspension display in the first special suggestion mode and a second process related to displaying the suspension display in the second special suggestion mode A process (steps S3714 to S3717), a third process (steps S3718 to S3721) related to displaying the suspension display in the pseudo link suggestion mode, and a fourth process (steps related to displaying the suspension display in the SP suggestion mode) S3722 to S3725).

  Hereinafter, the hold indication in the first special indication mode is "first special indication hold", the hold indication in the second special indication mode is "second special indication hold", and the hold indication in the pseudo continuous suggestion mode is "pseudo continuous suggestion hold" In the SP indication mode, the hold indication may be referred to as "SP suggestion hold".

  First, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not the new pending storage is about to enter the special zone to be notified (step S3710). For example, a flag is set when it is determined to enter the special zone, and if the flag is set, it is determined that a new pending storage is about to enter the special zone to be notified. .

  If the new pending storage is scheduled to enter the special zone to be notified, a first special suggestion execution lottery is performed to determine whether to display the first special suggestion pending (step S3711). Specifically, it is determined whether or not to execute the first special suggestion hold using the first special suggestion execution lottery table shown in FIG. 62 (A).

  FIG. 62 (A) is an explanatory view showing a first special suggestion execution lottery table. In the first special suggestion execution lottery table shown in FIG. 62 (A), a determination value corresponding to the presence / absence of the display of the first special suggestion hold is assigned to each of the winning determination result and the pending change pattern. In the example shown in FIG. 62 (A), in order to simplify the description, the proportion of assigned judgment values is shown. For example, the effect control CPU 101 extracts a random number for the first special suggestion execution lottery, and determines it as a determination item to which a determination value that matches the extracted random number is assigned.

  For example, when the determination result at the time of winning is a 15R probability variation big hit or an 8R probability variation big hit, if the suspension change pattern is P01, it is possible to execute the display of the first special suggestion suspension at a ratio of 40% at a ratio of 60% It is determined not to perform the display of the first special suggestion hold. In addition, it is determined that performing the display of the first special suggestion hold at a rate of 80% does not execute the display of the first special suggestion hold at a rate of 20% if the change in hold pattern is other than P01. Ru.

  For example, when the determination result at the time of winning is a super reach loss, if the pending change pattern is P01, it is possible to execute the display of the first special suggestion pending at the rate of 30%, the first special suggestion at the rate of 70% It is decided not to carry out a pending indication. In addition, it is determined that performing the display of the first special suggestion hold at a rate of 60% does not execute the display of the first special suggestion hold at a rate of 40% if the change in hold pattern is other than P01. Ru.

  If it is determined to execute the display of the first special suggestion hold, the display of the first special suggestion hold is started as a hold display for a new hold storage (step S3713).

  If it is determined in step S3710 that the new hold storage is not scheduled to enter the special zone to be notified, or if the display of the first special suggestion hold is not performed in step S3712, the effect control CPU 101 determines that the new hold is a rush for the notification target. When the advance notice effect is executed (if it is planned to shift to the special zone (if the rush success effect is scheduled to be executed), and if it is not planned to shift to the special zone, it is planned to execute the rush failure effect (Step S3714). For example, when it is decided to enter the special zone, a flag is set, and if the flag is set, it is determined that the new pending storage is to execute the entry success effect of the notice target. It is. Also, for example, when it is decided to execute the rush failure effect, a flag is set, and if the flag is set, it is assumed that the new pending storage is to execute the rush failure effect of the notice target. It is to judge.

  When it is planned to execute the rush advance announcement effect, a second special suggestion execution lottery is performed to determine whether or not to display the second special suggestion hold (step S3715). Specifically, it is determined whether or not to display the second special suggestion hold using the second special suggestion execution lottery table shown in FIG. 62 (B).

  FIG. 62 (B) is an explanatory view showing a second special suggestion execution lottery table. In the second special suggestion execution lottery table shown in FIG. 61 (B), a rush success effect is executed as a determination value corresponding to the presence / absence of the display of the second special suggestion hold for each winning determination result and hold change pattern. In the example shown in FIG. 62 (B), in order to simplify the description, the ratio of the assigned judgment value is shown, although different values are assigned in the case of performing the rush failure effect and in the case of There is. For example, the effect control CPU 101 extracts a random number for the second special suggestion execution lottery, and determines it as a determination item to which a determination value that matches the extracted random number is assigned.

  First, the case where the determination result at the time of winning is a 15R probability variation big hit or an 8R probability variation big hit will be described.

  For example, when it is intended to execute the rush success effect (when it is planned to shift to a special zone), if the pending change pattern is P01, the second special suggestion pending display may be executed at a rate of 40%. It is decided not to execute the display of the second special suggestion hold at a rate of 60%. In addition, it is determined that performing the display of the second special suggestion hold at a rate of 80% does not execute the display of the second special suggestion hold at a rate of 20% if the change in hold pattern is other than P01. Ru.

  For example, when it is intended to execute rush failure effect (when it is not planned to shift to a special zone), if the pending change pattern is P01, the display of the second special suggestion pending may be performed at a rate of 80%. It is decided not to carry out the display of the second special suggestion hold at a rate of 20%. In addition, it is determined that performing the display of the second special suggestion hold at a rate of 40% does not execute the display of the second special suggestion hold at a rate of 60% if the change in hold pattern is other than P01. Ru.

  Next, the case where the determination result at the time of winning is out of the super reach will be described.

  For example, when it is intended to execute rush success effect (when it is planned to shift to a special zone), if the pending change pattern is P01, the display of the second special suggestion pending may be performed at a rate of 30%. It is decided not to carry out the display of the second special suggestion hold at a rate of 70%. In addition, it is determined that performing the display of the second special suggestion hold at a rate of 60% does not execute the display of the second special suggestion hold at a rate of 40% if the change in hold pattern is other than P01. Ru.

  For example, when it is intended to execute rush failure effect (when it is not planned to shift to a special zone), if the pending change pattern is P01, the display of the second special suggestion pending may be performed at a rate of 60%. It is decided not to carry out the display of the second special suggestion hold at a rate of 40%. In addition, it is determined that performing the display of the second special suggestion hold at a rate of 30% does not execute the display of the second special suggestion hold at a rate of 70% if the change in hold pattern is other than P01. Ru.

  Finally, the case where the winning determination result is other will be described.

  For example, when it is planned to execute rush failure effect (when it is not planned to shift to a special zone), the display of the second special suggestion hold is not performed at a rate of 100%, regardless of any hold change pattern. Is determined. In the present embodiment, the special zone is not entered if the determination result at the time of winning is other, so the presence or absence of the display of the second special suggestion hold when executing the entry success effect is The judgment value to decide is not allocated.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, it is determined that the hold display can be displayed in the second special suggestion mode only when the winning determination result is the 15R probability variation hit, the 8R probability variation hit, or the super reach loss. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and even if it is possible to display the pending display in the second special suggestion mode even when the result of the winning determination is the probability variation big hit, small hit, normal reach out, or non reach out. Good.

  In addition, as described above, when the pending change pattern is other than P01, the second special suggestion pending display is executed at a higher rate in the case of executing the entry success effect than in the case of performing the entry failure effect. It is configured. That is, when the display of the second special suggestion hold is executed, the display mode is more likely to change to “red” when entering the special zone than when not entering the special zone. The display mode may not be changed to "red" when the special zone is not entered.

  Here, the second special suggestion execution lottery table shown in FIG. 62 (B) is compared with the selection ratio of red reserve shown in FIG. 60 (B). For example, when the winning determination result is a 15R probability variation big hit or an 8R probability variation big hit, while the selection ratio with red is 90% (see FIG. 60B), the execution ratio of the second special suggestion hold is 90 It is less than% (see FIG. 62 (B)). In addition, for example, when the winning determination result is the super reach loss, while the selection ratio with red is 30% (see FIG. 60B), the execution ratio of the second special suggestion hold is 30% or more (See FIG. 62 (B)). Therefore, the reliability for becoming a 15R probability variation big hit or an 8R probability variation big hit is red retention> second special suggestion retention.

  If it is decided to execute the display of the second special suggestion hold, the display of the second special suggestion hold is started as a hold display for the new hold storage (step S3717).

  If the new hold storage does not execute the advance notice effect of the advance notice in step S3714, or if the display of the second special suggestion hold is not performed in step S3716, the CPU 101 for effect control adds a pseudo link to the new hold memory. It is determined whether or not pseudo linked hold (step S3718). If it is a pseudo run hold, a pseudo run suggestion lottery is performed to determine whether or not to display the pseudo run suggestion hold (step S3719). Specifically, it is determined whether or not to display the pseudo connected suggestion hold using the pseudo connected suggestion execution lottery table shown in FIG. 62 (C).

  FIG. 62 (C) is an explanatory view showing a pseudo connected suggestion execution lottery table. In the pseudo linked suggestion execution lottery table shown in FIG. 62 (C), a decision value corresponding to the presence / absence of display of the pseudo linked suggestive hold is assigned to each of the winning determination result and the pending change pattern, but FIG. In the example shown in (C), the proportion of assigned judgment values is shown to simplify the explanation. For example, the effect control CPU 101 extracts a random number for the pseudo continuous suggestion execution lottery, and determines the determination item to which a determination value that matches the extracted random number is assigned.

  For example, when the winning determination result is a big hit, if the pending change pattern is P01, performing the display of pseudo linked suggestions at a rate of 20%, displaying the pseudo linked suggestions at a rate of 80% It is decided not to carry out. In addition, if the pending change pattern is other than P01, it is determined that executing the pseudo linked suggestion pending display at a rate of 30% does not execute the pseudo linked suggestion pending display at a rate of 70%.

  For example, when the determination result at the time of winning is a loss, if the pending change pattern is P01, executing the display of pseudo linked suggestions at a rate of 10% displays the linked linked suggestions pending at a rate of 90% It is decided not to carry out. In addition, if the pending change pattern is other than P01, it is determined that performing the display of the pseudo continuous suggestion at a rate of 20% does not execute the display of the pseudo continuous posting at a rate of 80%.

  If it is decided to execute the display of the pseudo connected suggestion hold, the display of the pseudo connected suggestive hold is started as the hold display for the new pending storage (step S3721).

  When the new hold storage is not the pseudo run hold in step S3718, or when the display of the pseudo run suggestion hold is not performed in step S3720, the effect control CPU 101 is the SP reach hold where the new hold storage develops into super reach. It is determined whether or not it is (step S3722). When SP reach hold is made, an SP suggestion execution lottery is performed to determine whether or not to display the SP suggestion hold (step S 3723). Specifically, it is determined whether or not to display the SP suggestion suspension using the SP suggestion execution lottery table shown in FIG. 62 (D).

  FIG. 62 (D) is an explanatory view showing an SP suggested execution lottery table. In the SP suggested execution lottery table shown in FIG. 62 (D), a determination value corresponding to the presence / absence of the display of the SP suggested hold is allocated for each of the winning determination result and the pending change pattern. In the example shown in), the proportion of assigned judgment values is shown in order to simplify the explanation. For example, the effect control CPU 101 extracts a random number for SP suggestion execution lottery, and determines it as a determination item to which a determination value that matches the extracted random number is assigned.

  For example, when the winning determination result is a big hit, if the pending change pattern is P01, executing the SP suggestion pending display at a rate of 30% does not execute the SP suggestion pending display at a rate of 70% Is determined. In addition, if the pending change pattern is other than P01, it is determined that executing the SP suggested pending display at a rate of 40% does not execute the SP suggested pending display at a rate of 60%.

  For example, when the determination result at the time of winning is a removal, if the pending change pattern is P01, executing the display of the SP suggestion suspension at a rate of 20% does not execute the display of the SP suggestion suspension at a rate of 80% Is determined. In addition, if the pending change pattern is other than P01, it is determined that executing the SP suggested pending display at a rate of 30% does not execute the SP suggested pending display at a rate of 70%.

  When it is determined to execute the hold display in the SP suggestion mode, the display of the SP suggestion hold is started as the hold display for the new hold storage (step S3725).

  Here, comparing the simulated association suggestion execution lottery table shown in FIG. 62C with the SP suggested execution lottery table shown in FIG. The execution rate of the indication of indication hold and the indication rate of the indication of SP indication hold differ. That is, the effect suggestion display aspect is changed to "red" at different rates based on the type of the effect suggestion display aspect. Thereby, the type of the effect indication display mode can be noticed.

  If the new hold storage is not the SP reach hold in step S3722, or if the display of the SP suggestion hold is not executed in step S3724, the effect control CPU 101 performs the display mode according to the hold change pattern stored in step S3702. The display of the hold display for the new hold storage is started (step S3726). Specifically, the hold display is started at "white" if any of P01, P02 and P04, and the hold display is started at "red" if P03 or P05.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in steps S3710 to S3725, the display timing of the suspension display of the effect suggestion mode is set to the start winning combination, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it may be possible to display the hold indication or the active indication of the presentation mode at any timing such as shifting of the hold indication, during the variable indication, or during the active indication.

  Moreover, in the present embodiment, the execution priority (that is, the execution frequency) is the first special suggestion mode by executing the processing in the order of the first processing, the second processing, the third processing, and the fourth processing. Special Suggestion Mode> Pseudo-Suggestive Suggestion Mode> It is conceivable that it becomes an SP suggestive mode. Therefore, it is possible to collectively determine, for example, which of the first special suggestion mode, the second special suggestion mode, the pseudo link suggestion mode, and the SP suggestion mode the pending indication or the active indication is to be displayed. By providing such a table, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of bias in the execution priority (execution frequency). Alternatively, even in the case where it is randomly lottery whether or not to execute the hold display or the active display in each effect suggestion display mode as in the present embodiment, the execution ratio is lower as the lottery is performed earlier. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of bias in the execution priority (execution frequency) by performing (to increase the execution ratio as the lottery is performed later).

  Further, in the present embodiment, the hold display can be displayed only in a single effect indication display mode among a plurality of effect indication display modes, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the hold display may be displayed in a plurality of effect indication display modes. For example, when it is determined to execute the hold display in the first special suggestion display mode and the SP suggestion display mode, the hold display including the characters "special" and the characters "SP" is displayed. It is also good. Specifically, it may be possible to display the hold display in a plurality of effect indication display modes by independently executing the first to fourth processes described above. In addition, since the advance notice effects suggested by the first special suggestion display mode and the second special suggestion display mode are both special zone effects, the hold indication is displayed in both the first special suggestion display mode and the second special suggestion display mode. It may be configured not to execute. For example, the hold display of the first special suggestion display mode may be displayed preferentially to the hold display of the second special suggestion display mode.

  FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing a process (step S802) during effect design variation in the third embodiment. It is determined whether or not it is the change timing of the active display in the process of rendering symbol variation (step S4701). Specifically, in the above-described active information storage area, active is stored as change timing, and when a predetermined time (for example, 13 seconds) has elapsed from the start of fluctuation, it is determined that it is the change timing of active display. . As described above, although active is stored as the change timing, if the change time of the corresponding change is shorter than 13 seconds, 1 second before the change stops is determined as the change timing of the active display. It shall be. If it is the change timing of the active display, the display mode of the active display is changed with reference to the hold change pattern in the active information storage area (step S4702). For example, if the pending change pattern is P02, it is changed to "red", and if it is P04 or P05, it is changed to "gold".

  In addition, when the hold display or the active display is displayed in the first special suggestion mode (Y in step S4703), it is determined whether it is the end timing of the rush success effect (step S4704). Specifically, when the rush success effect is started in a fluctuation having a fluctuation time of 3 seconds or more, it is determined that the timing at which 3 seconds have passed since the start of the rush success effect is the end timing of the rush success effect. When the rush success effect is started during the fluctuation having a fluctuation time of less than 3 seconds, it is determined that the timing one second before the fluctuation stop is the end timing of the rush success effect. If it is the end timing of the rush success effect, the display mode of the hold display or the active display displayed in the first special suggestion mode is changed to the display mode according to the hold display pattern after 5 seconds (step S4705). Specifically, if the hold change pattern is P01, it will be "white", if it is P02, it will be "white" if it is before change timing, and if it is after change timing, it will be "red", "Red" for P03, "White" for both change timings before P04, "Red" for one change timing or later but the other change timing If it is P05, it is changed to "red" if it is before the change timing, and if it is P05, it is changed to "red" if it is after the change timing.

  In addition, when the fluctuation time of the change which performed rush success production is less than 8 seconds (period (3 seconds) for executing rush success production and display of pending display or active display after the rush success production is finished) When the variation time is shorter than the total period with the waiting period (5 seconds) before changing the aspect, the display mode of the hold display or the active display is changed 1 second before the fluctuation stop.

  In addition, when the hold display or the active display is displayed in the second special suggestion mode (Y in step S4706), it is whether or not it is the end timing of the rush advance notice effect (rush success effect or rush failure effect) Is determined (step S4707). Specifically, when the rush advance notice effect is started in the fluctuation having a fluctuation time of 3 seconds or more, it is determined that the timing at which 3 seconds have passed since the start of rush advance effect production is the end timing of the rush advance effect production. If the rush advance notice effect is started during a fluctuation having a fluctuation time of less than 3 seconds, it is determined that the timing one second before the fluctuation stop is the end timing of the rush notice effect. If it is the end timing of the rush advance presentation effect, the display mode of the hold display or the active display displayed in the second special suggestion mode is changed to the display mode according to the hold display pattern after 5 seconds (step S4708). Specifically, if the hold change pattern is P01, it will be "white", if it is P02, it will be "white" if it is before change timing, and if it is after change timing, it will be "red", "Red" for P03, "White" for both change timings before P04, "Red" for one change timing or later but the other change timing If it is P05, it is changed to "red" if it is before the change timing, and if it is P05, it is changed to "red" if it is after the change timing.

  In addition, when the fluctuation time of the change which performed rush advance presentation production is less than 8 seconds (period (3 seconds) for executing rush advance presentation production, and display of pending display or active display after rush announcement production is completed) When the variation time is shorter than the total period with the waiting period (5 seconds) before changing the aspect, the display mode of the hold display or the active display is changed 1 second before the fluctuation stop.

  When the active display is displayed in the pseudo link suggestion mode (Y in step S4709), it is determined whether it is the start timing of the pseudo link (step S4710). Specifically, although it is general that in the pseudo ream, the re-variation is started after the chance symbol design is stopped and displayed, but in step S4710, the first re-variation timing is determined as the start timing of the pseudo ream . The stop timing of the first chance symbol may be determined as the start timing of the pseudo ream.

  If it is the start timing of the pseudo run, the display mode of the active display displayed in the pseudo run suggestion mode is changed to the display mode according to the hold display pattern after 5 seconds (step S4711). Specifically, if the hold change pattern is P01, it will be "white", if it is P02, it will be "white" if it is before change timing, and if it is after change timing, it will be "red", If it is P03, it is "red". If it is P04, it is after one change timing, but if it is before the other change timing, it is "red". If it is after both change timings, it is "gold". If it is P05, it is changed to "red" if it is before the change timing, and it is changed to "gold" if it is after the change timing.

  It should be noted that a variation pattern is provided in which the variation ends before 5 seconds have elapsed from the start timing of the pseudo run, and in the case of changing the display mode of the active display during the variation of the variation pattern, The display mode of the active display may be changed before time (for example, 1 second).

  When the active display is displayed in the SP suggestion mode (Y in step S4712), it is determined whether it is the start timing of the super reach effect (step S4713). Specifically, the timing determined in advance for each fluctuation pattern is determined as the start timing of the super reach effect. If it is the start timing of the super reach effect, the display mode of the active display displayed in the SP suggestion mode is changed to a display mode according to the hold display pattern after 5 seconds (step S4714). Specifically, if the hold change pattern is P01, it will be "white", if it is P02, it will be "white" if it is before change timing, and if it is after change timing, it will be "red", If it is P03, it is "red". If it is P04, it is after one change timing, but if it is before the other change timing, it is "red". If it is after both change timings, it is "gold". If it is P05, it is changed to "red" if it is before the change timing, and it is changed to "gold" if it is after the change timing.

  It should be noted that a fluctuation pattern is provided in which the fluctuation ends before 5 seconds elapse from the start timing of the super reach effect, and when changing the display mode of the active display during the fluctuation of the fluctuation pattern, It is also possible to change the display mode of the active display a predetermined time ago (for example, one second ago).

  Thereafter, the effect control CPU 101 subtracts one from the value of the process timer (step S8101) and subtracts one from the value of the fluctuation time timer (step S8102). When the process timer times out (step S8103), the process data is switched. That is, the process timer set value set next in the process table is set in the process timer (step S8104). Further, the control state of the rendering device is changed based on the display control execution data, lamp control execution data and sound number data set next to the display control execution data (step S8105).

  Then, if the fluctuation time timer has timed out (step S8115), the effect control CPU 101 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the effect symbol fluctuation stop process (step S803) (step S8116).

  FIG. 64 and FIG. 65 are explanatory views showing a display example in the case of displaying the hold display in the second special suggestion mode in the third embodiment. First, (1) while the active indication and the two pending indications are displayed, (2) a new pending storage occurs and the pending indication corresponding to the pending storage is the second special suggestion mode (“ Special? ”Is displayed. At this time, it is decided to execute the special zone effect that makes the reserved storage the advance notice target, and that “3” is set as the number of executions K and “3” is set as the remaining number of times R. Further, it is assumed that P04 is determined as the pending change pattern, and the first and second ones are determined as the change timing.

  Then, the change ends at (3) deviation, and (4) the next change is started. At this time, the active display corresponding to the new fluctuation is displayed, and the hold display is shifted. Then, since the remaining number of times R is “2” and the value obtained by adding “1” to the remaining number of times R becomes equal to the number of times of execution K, the rush advance announcement effect is executed. If 3 seconds have passed since then, it is informed that (5) it was a rush success effect, and rushes into the special zone. At the timing 5 seconds after that, (6) the display mode of the suspension display displayed in the second special suggestion mode changes to "red" (see step S4708).

After that, the change ends at the deviation point of (7), and (8) the next change is started. At this time, the active display corresponding to the new fluctuation is displayed, and the hold display is shifted. Then, since the hold change pattern of the hold display displayed in “red” is P 04 and the first change timing includes the change timing, the display mode changes to “gold”.

  As described above, according to this embodiment, the gaming machine is capable of executing variable display, and at least at least the specific display corresponding to the variable display (in this example, the hold display and the active display), An aspect (in this example, "white"), a first specific aspect (in this example, "red") having a higher degree of expectation than the normal aspect, and a second specific aspect (in this example, presentation) Specific display means (in this example, for effect control) that can be displayed in any of the display modes including the first special suggestion mode (the second special suggestion mode, the second special suggestion mode, the pseudo link suggestion mode, the SP suggestion mode)) A portion of the microcomputer 100 which executes steps S3713, S3717, S3721, S3725, S3726, S4702, S4705, S4708, S4711 and S4714) and a specific display of the second specific mode Effect executing means capable of executing effects of the suggested content (in this example, processing similar to steps S8013 and S8105 according to the process table selected in the processing similar to steps S8010 and S8011 in the microcomputer 100 for effect control) By performing the special zone effect, the pseudo link, and the portion capable of performing the super reach effect), and the specific display means displays the specific display in the second specific mode, and When the effect of the content suggested by the specific indication is executed (in this example, 5 seconds after the effect of the suggested content is executed), the display mode of the specific indication is the second specific aspect to the first specific aspect (In this example, the effect control microcomputer 100 performs steps S4702, S4705, S4708, and S47). When one of P02 to P05 is selected as the hold change pattern by executing 1, S 4714, the hold display or the active display displayed in the presentation suggestion display mode which is the second display mode. , Which can be changed to "red" which is the first specific aspect. This can enhance the sense of expectation for the specific aspect.

  When the configuration shown in this embodiment is applied to the gaming machine shown in the first embodiment, for example, the first specific mode or the second specific mode shown in this embodiment is the first embodiment. To display the specific indication according to the first aspect (special hold), and then change from the first aspect (special hold) to the first specific aspect or the second specific aspect. It is possible to configure.

  Further, it is also possible to configure a gaming machine by appropriately combining the configurations shown in the first to third embodiments described above. That is, the configurations shown in any one of the first to third embodiments described above may be combined as appropriate, or the configurations shown in all the embodiments may be combined. A gaming machine may be configured.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the variation time and the type of reach effect, the presence or absence of pseudo-series (effect of temporary stop and re-variation of one or more symbols being executed during one variable display), etc. In order to notify the microcomputer 100 for effect control of the fluctuation pattern indicating the fluctuation aspect, an example is shown in which one fluctuation pattern command is transmitted when the fluctuation is started, but the fluctuation pattern is produced by two or more commands. The control microcomputer 100 may be notified. Specifically, when notified by two commands, before the game control microcomputer 560 reaches reach, such as presence or absence of pseudo reciprocation, presence or absence of slip rendition as the first command (in the case where it does not reach, so-called Send a command indicating the fluctuation time and fluctuation mode before the second stop, and as the second command after reaching a reach (such as reach type or presence / absence of re-lottery effect) (when it does not reach, so-called A command indicating a fluctuation time or a fluctuation mode) after the second stop may be transmitted. In that case, the effect control microcomputer 100 may perform effect control in the variable display (variable display) based on the fluctuation time derived from the combination of two commands. The game control microcomputer 560 may notify the fluctuation time by each of the two commands, and the effect control microcomputer 100 may select a specific fluctuation mode to be executed at each timing. . When transmitting two commands, two commands may be transmitted within the same timer interrupt, and after a first command has been transmitted, a predetermined period has elapsed (for example, the next The second command may be transmitted in the timer interrupt). Note that the variation mode indicated by each command is not limited to such an example, and the order of transmission may be changed as appropriate. By notifying the variation pattern with two or more commands in this way, it is possible to reduce the amount of data that needs to be stored as the variation pattern command.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, "the proportions are different" means that the proportions are different only in relation such as A: B = 70%: 30% or A: B = 30%: 70%. , A: B = 100%: 0%, and the like is also a concept including ones with different proportions (ie, one with 100% allocation and the other with 0% allocation).

  In each of the above-described embodiments, for example, the case of variably displaying a plurality of types of special symbols, effect symbols, and normal symbols of “1” to “9” and deriving and displaying the display result has been shown. It is not limited to such an aspect. For example, the symbol to be variably displayed and the symbol to be derived and displayed do not necessarily have to be the same, and a symbol different from the symbol displayed to be variably displayed may be derived and displayed. Moreover, it is not necessary to variably display a plurality of types of symbols, and variable display may be performed using only one type of symbol. In this case, for example, the variable display may be performed by alternately repeating lighting and blinking of the one type of symbol display. And even in this case, one kind of symbol used for the variable display may be derived and displayed at the end, or a symbol different from the one kind of symbol is finally derived and displayed It may be one.

  In each of the above embodiments, a pachinko machine has been exemplified as a gaming machine, but according to the present invention, a plurality of types of medals are inserted to set a predetermined bet number, and a plurality of types according to the operation of the control lever by the player. Is applied to a slot machine where a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player when the combination of the stop symbols becomes a combination of specific symbols when the symbol is turned according to the operation of the stop button by the player and the combination of the stop symbols becomes a specific symbol combination. It is also possible.

  In addition, the gaming machine according to the present invention is not limited to a gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of prizes as gaming media, but is a type that encloses gaming media such as gaming balls and gives a score when prize giving conditions are satisfied. It can also be applied to a game machine of the formula type.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the gaming machine is controlled to be in a definite changing state after the big hit game based on the fact that there is a definite variation big hit as a big hit type or a normal big hit, and the big hit type is determined as a positive variation big hit. However, it is not limited to such gaming machines. For example, a special variable winning prize ball device having a predetermined probability variation area provided therein (a probability variation area may be provided in a special variable prize winning ball device provided with only one, or a plurality of special variable winning prize balls provided The probability change area may be provided in a part of the device, and the probability change is determined based on the fact that the game ball has passed the probability change area in the special variable winning prize ball device during the big hit game, the big hit game The configurations shown in the above-described embodiments can also be applied to gaming machines that are controlled to a definite change state after the end.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the game control microcomputer 560 determines whether or not to be a big hit, and determines when winning the variation pattern type (prefetching determination), and indicates the result of the winning determination (design designation) Although the command for transmitting the command (the variation category command) is executed and the microcomputer 100 for effect control executes the on-hold notice effect based on the command indicating the result of the winning determination, the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, the effect control microcomputer 100 may be configured to perform the winning determination (pre-reading determination). In this case, for example, the microcomputer 560 for gaming control transmits a command specifying only the value of the jackpot determination random number (random R) or the variation pattern type determination random number (random 2) extracted at the occurrence of the start winning. Then, the effect control microcomputer 100 may be configured to perform the winning determination (pre-reading determination) based on the value of the random number designated by the command.

  The present invention is not limited to the one described above. Further, the specific configuration is included in the present invention even if there are changes and additions within the scope of the present invention in addition to the above-described embodiment and other embodiments described later.

  In addition, all or a part of the configurations shown in the embodiment and the modifications described above, and the configurations shown in the later-described form examples and the modifications may be arbitrarily combined.

  It should be understood that the above-described embodiment disclosed this time and the form described below are illustrative and non-restrictive in every respect. The scope of the present invention is shown not by the above description and the following description but by the claims, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope equivalent to the claims.

  The gaming machine of the present invention is also a gaming machine capable of performing variable display, and is capable of displaying a specific display corresponding to the variable display (for example, a hold display or an active display). A change in which the display mode of the specific display is changed after the specific display is displayed by the display means (for example, the first hold storage display unit 9a, the second hold storage display unit 9b) and the first mode (for example, special hold) A change effect executing means capable of executing effects (for example, pending announcement effects accompanied by action effects) (for example, portions for executing steps S800A, S8004 to S8010, S8106 to S8114 in microcomputer 100 for effect control) The effect executing means, as the change effect, displays the specific display according to the first mode, and then displays the display mode of the specific display in a second mode (for example, a high degree of advantage) It is possible to execute an effect of changing to blue hold or red hold) (for example, change patterns 33 to 36 shown in FIGS. 40 (D) and (E) and change patterns 405 to 45 shown in FIGS. 41 (G) to (I) In the case where the display mode of the specific display is not changed to the second mode after displaying the specific display according to the first mode as the change effect, together with the suspension notice effect based on S414 is executable) It is possible to execute an effect of changing the mode to the third mode (for example, normal retention) (for example, based on change patterns 31 and 32 shown in FIG. 40C and change patterns 401 to 404 shown in FIG. During the predetermined period, the rate at which the display mode of the specific display is changed to the third mode is low (for example, the fourth and the three suspension displays for the notice object). In the period displayed in the position of, it is difficult to change the hold display of the notice target from special hold to normal hold, even if the hold display of the notice target does not change from special hold to normal hold at all. Furthermore, a first indication that the display size is the first size (FIG. 78 (a)), as an indication indicating the expectation of control to an advantageous state (big hit gaming state etc.) advantageous to the player. And the second suggested display (the second size display shown in FIG. 78 (d)) and the second suggested display whose display size is the second size Provided with display means (microcomputer 90100 for effect control, effect display device 909 etc.) capable of displaying the display by reach title image 9095 etc.) The row has a plurality of different types of elements (element E 901 (banana), element E 902 (melon), element E 903 (apple), element E 904 (watermelon), element E 905 (strawberry) shown in FIG. 78 (a), (d). And the like) can be displayed (the fruit pattern etc. shown in FIG. 78 (a), (d)) can be displayed, and the first indication display and the second indication display in the pattern including the specific image Even when any is displayed, a plurality of elements are displayed so as to be included in both the first indication display and the second indication indication (shutter image 9094 shown in FIGS. 78 (a) and (d), reach title A game machine is included such as displaying so that elements E901 to E905 are included in any of the images 9095. According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a drop in the rendering effect when executing the change rendering. In addition, the specific image can be suitably displayed regardless of the display size of the suggestion display. This makes it possible to accurately convey that a specific image has been displayed.

  Note that the specific display means for displaying the specific display and the display means for performing the suggested display may be configured by the same display device (for example, an effect display device capable of image display) or may be configured by separate display devices. Good. In addition, in the case of configuring with a separate display device, the specific display means for displaying the specific display may be configured with a light emitting device (for example, full color LED), and the change effect may be performed by changing the light emission color and the blink speed. Good. In addition, even in the case of being configured by separate display devices, each display device may be configured by an effect display device capable of image display, and specific display and suggestion display may be performed on each effect display device. In addition, when each display device is configured by the effect display device capable of image display, the specific display and the suggestion display may be performed by each effect display device, or the specific display is performed (the suggestion display is not performed) The display device may be combined with the effect display device that performs suggestion display (does not perform specific display). In addition, when each display device is configured by an effect display device capable of image display, an effect display device that performs specific display and suggestion display, an effect display device that performs specific display (does not perform suggestion display), or indication display And (not performing specific display) may be combined with each other.

  Furthermore, it is possible to prevent a drop in the rendering effect in the case of executing the change presentation, and also to preferably display the specific image regardless of the display size of the suggestion display, and to be accurate that the specific image is displayed An example of the form of a gaming machine that can be transmitted to a player is a gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 901 etc.) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (such as a big hit gaming state) advantageous to the player, As a suggested indication that suggests the degree, a first suggested display (the display by the shutter image 9094 of the first size displayed at the time of the shutter effect shown in FIG. 78A, etc.) whose display size is the first size; A display capable of displaying the second suggested display (the second size reach title image 9095 etc. displayed at the time of the reach title effect shown in FIG. 78 (d)) having two sizes A stage (microcomputer 90100 for effect control, effect display device 909, etc.) is provided, and the display means is a plurality of types of elements different in aspect (element E 901 (banana) shown in FIGS. 78 (a), (d) It is possible to display a specific image (fruit pattern shown in FIGS. 78 (a) and (d)) including melon, element E 903 (apple), element E 904 (watermelon), element E 905 (strawberry), etc. Yes, when displaying either the first indication display or the second indication display in the pattern including the specific image, the display is made so that plural kinds of elements are included in both the first indication display and the second indication display Game machine (such as displaying so that elements E901 to E905 are included in both the shutter image 9094 and the reach title image 9095 shown in FIGS. 78A and 78D). It is. Below, an example of this embodiment of the gaming machine will be described as another embodiment.

(Other embodiments)
Hereinafter, other embodiments will be described with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of a pachinko gaming machine 901, which is an example of a gaming machine, will be described. This other embodiment may be referred to as an "embodiment". FIG. 66 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 901 as viewed from the front. FIG. 67 is a hit classification table.

  The pachinko game machine 901 is a game machine in which a game is performed by striking a game ball as a game medium into the game area 907. The pachinko gaming machine 901 is configured of an outer frame (not shown) formed in a vertically long rectangular shape and a game frame attached to the inside of the outer frame so as to be openable and closable. In addition, the pachinko gaming machine 901 has a glass door frame 902 formed in the shape of a frame provided so as to be openable and closable in the game frame. The play space is a front frame (not shown) installed openably and closably with respect to the outer frame, a mechanism board (not shown) to which mechanism parts and the like are attached, and various parts attached to them (games described later And the board 906). In the pachinko game machine 901, a game is performed by driving a game ball as a game medium into the game area.

  On the lower surface of the glass door frame 902 is a striking ball supply plate (upper plate) 903. Under the hitting ball supply tray 903 are provided a surplus ball receiving tray 904 for storing gaming balls which can not be accommodated in the hitting ball supply tray 903 and a hitting operation handle (operation knob) 905 for firing the hitting ball. Further, on the back of the glass door frame 902, a game board 906 is removably attached. The game board 906 is a structure including a plate-like body that constitutes it and various components attached to the plate-like body. In addition, on the front of the game board 906, a game area 907 is formed in which the inserted game balls can flow down.

  The member forming the surplus ball tray (lower plate) 904 is, for example, in a stick shape (rod shape) at a predetermined position on the front side of the upper surface of the lower plate main body (for example, the central portion of the lower plate). A stick controller 90122 is attached which can be held and tilted in a plurality of directions (front and rear, left and right). In the stick controller 90122, the player holds the operating stick of the stick controller 90122 with an operating hand (for example, the left hand) and performs predetermined operations by pushing and pulling with a predetermined operating finger (for example, forefinger etc.) A trigger button 90125 (see FIG. 68) which can perform an instruction operation is provided, and a trigger sensor 90121 (FIG. 68) which detects a predetermined instruction operation by pushing or pulling the trigger button 90125 inside the operation stick of the stick controller 90122 (FIG. See) is built-in. In addition, a tilting direction sensor unit 90123 (see FIG. 68) for detecting a tilting operation on the operating rod is provided in the lower body inside the lower portion of the stick controller 90122 or the like. Further, the stick controller 90122 incorporates a vibrator motor 90126 (see FIG. 68) for vibrating the stick controller 90122.

  On the member forming the striking ball supply plate (upper plate) 903, the player performs a predetermined instruction operation, for example, by pressing the predetermined position on the front side of the upper surface of the upper plate main body (for example, above the stick controller 90122). A possible push button 90120 is provided. The push button 90120 may be configured to be able to mechanically, electrically or electromagnetically detect a predetermined instruction operation by the player or the like. A push sensor 90124 (see FIG. 68) for detecting the operation performed by the player on the push button 90120 may be provided inside the body of the upper tray at the installation position of the push button 90120. In the configuration example shown in FIG. 66, the mounting positions of the push button 90120 and the stick controller 90122 are in the vertical positional relationship in the central portions of the upper and lower dishes. On the other hand, the mounting positions of the push button 90120 and the stick controller 90122 may be shifted to either the left or the right in the upper and lower plates while maintaining the upper and lower positional relationship. Alternatively, the mounting positions of the push button 90120 and the stick controller 90122 may not be in the vertical positional relationship, but may be in the horizontal positional relationship, for example. As the operation means, a lever switch and other operation means such as a jog dial may be provided.

  In the vicinity of the center of the game area 907, an effect display device 909 as display means capable of fluctuating display (also referred to as variable display) of effect symbols as plural types of identification information capable of identifying each of them is provided. On the right side of the effect display device 909 in the game area 907, a first special symbol indicator (first variation display unit) 908a that variably displays first special symbols as plural types of identification information that can identify each of the first special symbols. A second special symbol display (second variation display unit) 908b is provided which variably displays a second special symbol as a plurality of types of identification information capable of identifying each.

  Each of the first special symbol display 908a and the second special symbol display 908b is configured by a simple and small display (for example, 7-segment LED) capable of variably displaying numbers and characters. The effect display device 909 is configured of a liquid crystal display (LCD), and provided on the display screen is a effect symbol display area for performing variable display of the effect symbol synchronized with the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Be In the effect symbol display area, symbol display areas are formed in which, for example, three effect symbols for decoration (for effect) on the left, middle and right are variably displayed.

  Hereinafter, the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be collectively referred to as a special symbol, and the first special symbol indicator 908a and the second special symbol indicator 908b are generically referred to as a special symbol indicator (variation indicator) There is something to do.

  Although this embodiment shows the case where two special symbol displays 908a and 908b are provided, the gaming machine may have only one special symbol display.

  Each of the first special symbol display 908a and the second special symbol display 908b is controlled by the game control microcomputer mounted on the main board (game control board). The effect display device 909 is controlled by the effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board. When the variable display of the first special symbol is being executed by the first special symbol display 908a, the effect display is executed by the effect display device 909 along with the variable display, and the second special symbol display 908b is performed by the first special symbol display (2) When the variable display of the special symbol is being executed, the effect display is executed by the effect display device 909 along with the variable display, so it is possible to easily grasp the progress of the game.

  More specifically, the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is satisfied with the first start condition or the second start condition which is the execution condition of the variable display (for example, the game ball is the first start winning opening 9013 Or after passing through (including winning) the second start winning opening 9014, the start condition of the variable display (for example, when the number of reserved memories is not 0, the change of the first special symbol and the second special symbol It is started based on the fact that the display is not executed and the jackpot game is not executed), and the display result (stop symbol) is derived and displayed when the fluctuation display time (variation time) has elapsed. Do. The game ball passing means that the game ball has passed through an area defined as a winning area such as a winning opening or a gate in advance, and includes the concept that the gaming ball has entered the winning opening (winning). It is. Furthermore, deriving and displaying a display result means to stop and display a symbol (example of identification information).

  When the big hit display result (big hit symbol) as a specific display result is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display 908a, or the big hit display result (big hit symbol) as a specific display result on the second special symbol display 908b When it is derived and displayed, the big hit display result (combination of big hit symbols) as the specific display result is also derived and displayed on the effect display device 909. As described above, when the specific display result is displayed as the display result of the variable display, it is controlled to the specific gaming state (big hit gaming state) as the advantageous state in which the player is given an advantageous value (favorable value).

  Further, in the effect display device 909, symbols other than the symbol to be the final stop symbol (for example, middle symbol among left and right middle symbols) continue for a predetermined time, and the big hit symbol (for example, left middle right symbol is aligned with the same symbol) Stop, swing, zoom in / out or deform in the state that matches the combination of symbols, or display multiple symbols in synchronization with the same symbol, or change the position of the display symbol Then, an effect performed in a state where the possibility of the occurrence of a big hit continues before the final result is displayed (hereinafter, these states are referred to as a reach state) is called reach effect.

  Here, in the reach state, when the effect pattern stopped and displayed in the display area of the effect display device 909 constitutes a part of the big hit combination, the fluctuation display of the effect pattern which is not yet stopped is continued. The display state or the display state in which all or part of the effect symbols are variably displayed synchronously while constituting all or part of the big hit combination. In other words, reach refers to a state in which identification information constitutes a specific display result in a plurality of variable display areas, but at least a part of the variable display areas is in a variable display mode. In this embodiment, the reach state is formed, for example, in a state in which the same symbol stops in the left and right symbol display areas, and the symbol does not stop in the middle symbol display area. The symbols stopped in the left and right symbol display areas when the reach state is formed are called reach formation symbols or reach symbols.

  And the display production in the reach state is reach production display (reach production). In addition, at the time of reach, there are times when the effect which is different from usual is done with the lamp and the sound. This effect is called reach effect. In addition, at the time of reach, a character (effect display imitating a person etc. and different from a symbol (effect pattern etc)) is displayed, or a display mode (for example, color etc.) of a background image of the effect display device 909 ) May be changed. This change in the display of the character and the display mode of the background is called reach effect display. In addition, some reach are set so that a big hit is more likely to occur when they appear, as compared to the normal reach. Such special reach is called super reach.

  Below the effect display device 909, a winning device having a first start winning opening 9013 is provided. The game ball that has won the first start winning opening 9013 is guided to the back of the game board 906, and is detected by the first start opening switch 9013a.

  Further, a variable winning ball device 9015 having a second starting winning opening 9014 capable of winning a game ball is provided below the winning device having the first starting winning opening (first starting opening) 9013. The game ball that has won the second starting winning opening (second starting opening) 9014 is guided to the back of the game board 906, and is detected by the second starting opening switch 9014a. The variable winning ball device 9015 is opened by the solenoid 9016. When the variable winning ball device 9015 is in the open state, the gaming ball can be won in the second starting winning opening 9014 (it becomes easy to start winning), which is advantageous for the player. When the variable winning ball device 9015 is in the open state, the game ball is more likely to win the second starting winning hole 9014 than the first starting winning hole 9013. Also, in a state where the variable winning ball device 9015 is in the closed state, the gaming ball does not win the second start winning opening 9014. Therefore, in the state where the variable winning ball device 9015 is in the closed state, the gaming ball is more likely to win the first starting winning hole 9013 than the second starting winning hole 9014. In the state where the variable winning ball device 9015 is in the closed state, although it is difficult to win, it may be configured to be able to win (that is, it is difficult for the gaming ball to win). Hereinafter, the first starting winning opening 9013 and the second starting winning opening 9014 may be collectively referred to as a starting winning opening or a starting opening.

  Above the second special symbol display 908b, there is a second special symbol hold storage indicator 9018b consisting of four indicators for displaying the number of activated winning balls that have entered the second start winning opening 9014, that is, the second reserve memory number. It is provided. The second special symbol hold storage indicator 9018b increases the number of lighted indicators by one each time there is a valid start winning. Then, every time variable display on the second special symbol display 908b is started, the number of lighted indicators is reduced by one.

  Further, above the second special symbol suspension storage indicator 9018b, the number of activated winning balls entering the first starting winning opening 9013, that is, the first suspension storage number (pending storage is also referred to as start storage or start winning storage). A first special symbol hold storage indicator 9018a consisting of four indicators for displaying) is provided. The first special symbol hold storage indicator 9018a increases the number of lighted indicators by one each time there is a valid start winning. Then, whenever the variable display on the first special symbol display 908a is started, the number of lighted indicators is reduced by one.

  In the game machine, a ball hitting and firing device (not shown) which drives a drive motor in response to the player operating the ball hitting operation handle 905 and uses the rotational force of the drive motor to launch the game ball into the game area 907 ) Is provided. The game balls fired from the hit ball launching device enter the game area 907 through the ball hitting rails formed in a circular shape so as to surround the game area 907, and then descend the game area 907. If the game ball enters the first starting winning opening 9013 and is detected by the first starting opening switch 9013a, then it is possible to start variable display of the first special symbol (for example, the variable display of the special symbol ends, the first The start condition of 1 is satisfied), the variation display (variation) of the first special symbol is started in the first special symbol display 908a, and the variation display of the effect symbol is started in the effect display device 909. That is, the variable display of the first special symbol and the effect symbol corresponds to the winning of the first start winning opening 9013. If it is not in a state where variable display of the first special symbol can be started, the first number of pending storages is increased by 1 on the condition that the number of first pending storages has not reached the upper limit value.

  If the game ball enters the second starting winning opening 9014 and is detected by the second starting opening switch 9014a, if it is in a state where it can start the variable display of the second special symbol (for example, the variable display of the special symbol ends, the second The start condition of 2) is satisfied, and the second special symbol display 908b starts variable display (variation) of the second special symbol, and the effect display device 909 starts variable display of the effect symbol. That is, the variable display of the second special symbol and the effect symbol corresponds to the winning of the second start winning opening 9014. If it is not in a state where variable display of the second special symbol can be started, the second pending storage number is increased by one on the condition that the second pending storage number has not reached the upper limit value.

  The effect display device 909 is for decoration (for effect) during the fluctuation display time of the first special symbol by the first special symbol display 908a and during the fluctuation display time of the second special symbol by the second special symbol display 908b. Perform variable display of the effect pattern as the symbol of. The variation display of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display 908a and the variation display of the effect symbol in the effect display device 909 are synchronized. Further, the variation display of the second special symbol in the second special symbol display 908b and the variation display of the effect symbol in the effect display device 909 are synchronized with each other. In addition, when the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the first special symbol display 908a, and when the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the second special symbol display 908b, a rendering symbol that evokes a big hit in the effect display device 909 The combination of is displayed stopped.

  In addition, a hold storage display unit (total hold storage display unit) displaying the total number of the first hold memory number and the second hold memory number (total hold memory number) at the lower position on the display screen of the effect display device 909 , Reserve display area, not shown). In the total holding storage display unit, the holding storage number can be specified as the holding storage display, for example, by the display number of the predetermined image (by displaying one holding storage image corresponding to each of the holding storage information, Specify the number of pending storages) is displayed. As described above, by providing the combined hold storage display unit for displaying the total number, it is possible to easily grasp the total number of formation of execution conditions for which the variable display start condition is not satisfied. In each of the first special symbol hold storage indicator 9018a, the second special symbol hold storage indicator 9018b, and the effect display device 909, the light emission display and the image display for indicating the number of hold storages is a hold display or hold It is called memory display.

  As shown in FIG. 66, a special variable winning ball device 9020 is provided below the variable winning ball device 9015. Special variable winning ball device 9020 has an open / close plate, and when the specific display result (big hit symbol) is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display 908a, the specific display result (big hit symbol) on the second special symbol display 908b In the specific gaming state (big hit gaming state) that occurs when the display is derived, the opening / closing plate is controlled to the open state by the solenoid 9021 so that the big winning opening serving as the winning area is opened. The game ball that has won the special winning opening is detected by the count switch 9023.

  In the jackpot gaming state, the special variable winning ball device 9020 is repeatedly and continuously controlled to repeat the open state and the closed state. The state in which the special variable winning prize ball device 9020 is open in the repeated continuation control is called a round. Thus, the repeat continuation control is also referred to as round control. In the present embodiment, a plurality of jackpot types are provided, and when it is determined to be a jackpot, any jackpot type is selected.

  On the left side of the effect display device 909, an ordinary symbol display 9010 is provided which variably displays an ordinary symbol capable of identifying each. In this embodiment, the normal symbol display 9010 is realized by a simple and small display (for example, 7-segment LED) capable of fluctuating display of the numbers 0-9. That is, the normal symbol display 9010 is configured to variably display the numbers 0 to 9 (or symbols). Moreover, the small display is formed, for example, in a square shape.

  When the game ball passes through the gate 9032 and is detected by the gate switch 9032a, the variable display of the display of the normal symbol display 9010 is started. Then, when the stop symbol in the normal symbol display 9010 is a predetermined symbol (hit symbol. For example, symbol "7"), the variable winning ball device 9015 is closed for a predetermined time, which is disadvantageous for the predetermined number of times. Changes to a player's open position. In the vicinity of the normal symbol display 9010, a normal symbol hold storage indicator 9041 having a display unit with four LEDs for displaying the number of winning balls having passed through the gate 9032 is provided. Every time the game ball passes to the gate 9032, that is, whenever the game ball is detected by the gate switch 9032a, the normal symbol hold storage indicator 9041 increases the number of LEDs to be turned on by one. Then, whenever variable display of the normal symbol display 9010 is started, the number of LEDs to be lit is reduced by one.

  Also, above the effect display device 909, a role item 9012 is provided. The character 9012 is located between the game board 906 and the effect display device 909, and can be displaced by the character motor 9017. The accessory 9012 is normally located at a position where it is difficult for the player to visually recognize, and moves to a position (for example, a position in front of the effect display device 909) visible to the player when a predetermined effect is performed.

  At the lower part of the game board 906, there is an out port 9026 where a non-winning hit ball is taken. Further, on the upper left and right upper and lower left and right sides of the game area 907, four speakers 9027 for producing sound effects and sounds as predetermined sound outputs are provided. On the outer periphery of the game area 907, a frame LED 9028 provided on the front frame is provided.

  In addition, a prepaid card unit (hereinafter, also simply referred to as a "card unit") that enables ball lending by inserting a prepaid card is installed adjacent to the pachinko gaming machine 901 (not shown).

  In the hit type table in FIG. 67, for each hit type in the big hit, the big hit probability after the end of the big hit gaming state, the base after the end of the big hit gaming state, the fluctuation time after the big hit gaming state end, the number of times open in big hit ( The number of rounds) and the open time of each round are shown.

  Specifically, in the big hit gaming state, after the special variable winning prize ball device 9020 is put in the open state, a predetermined open state end condition (in the open state for a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds) has elapsed, or, In response to the establishment of the open end condition that a predetermined number (for example, 10) of winning balls are generated, the closed state is established. Then, when the open end condition is satisfied, the continuation right is generated, and the special variable winning prize ball device 9020 is opened again. The generation of the continuation right is repeated until the number of times of opening in the jackpot gaming state reaches 15 rounds (final round) where the predetermined upper limit is reached.

  Of the "big hit", after being controlled to the big hit gaming state, there is a high probability of being determined to be a big hit as a special gaming state as compared to the normal state (a normal gaming state which is not a definite change state) The type (classification) of the jackpot that shifts to (abbreviation of probability fluctuation state, also referred to as high probability state) is called “probability variation jackpot”. Further, in the present embodiment, when the special gaming state is controlled to be in a short time state in which the variation time (variation display period) of the special symbol or the representation pattern is shortened as compared with the non-time-short state in addition to the probability variation state. There is. Note that the special game state may be controlled to be in the time saving state independently of the probability change state.

  In this way, by shifting to the time saving state, the fluctuation time of the special symbol and the rendering symbol is shortened, so when it becomes the time saving state, the effective start winning is likely to occur and the big hit game may be performed. Increase. In addition, the type (class) of the big hit which does not shift to a definite change state after being controlled by the big hit game state of 15 rounds among "big hit" is called "usually big hit".

  Further, as the special gaming state, the frequency of the game ball entering the variable winning ball device 9015 is increased by increasing the frequency at which the variable winning ball device 9015 is in the open state accompanying the probability changing state or the short time state. There is a case where it is controlled to the electronic control unit control state which facilitates (higher approach, higher frequency) winning on the variable winning ball device 9015. Since the electronic control support state is a high base state as described later, it will be mainly referred to as a high base state in the following description.

  Here, the electronic Chu support control will be described. As the electric chew support control, the control (normal symbol shortening control) to reduce the fluctuation time of normal symbol (time from the start of fluctuation display to the derivation display of display result) and derive the display result early (normal symbol shortening control), ordinary symbol Control to increase the probability that the stop symbol will hit the symbol (normal symbol probability change control), control to lengthen the opening time of the variable winning ball device 9015 (opening time extension control), and increase the number of opening of the variable winning ball device 9015 Control (control to increase the number of times of release) is performed. When such control is performed, the time ratio in which the variable winning ball device 9015 is in the open state is higher than when the control is not performed, and therefore, the frequency of winning on the second start winning opening 9014 As a result, the game ball is more likely to be activated for starting (the condition for executing variable display on the special symbol displays 908a and 908b and the effect display device 909 is more likely to be established). By this control, the winning frequency of the second start winning opening 9014 is increased, so that the establishment frequency of the second starting condition and / or the execution frequency of the variable display of the second special symbol is increased.

  The state (high frequency state) in which the winning frequency to the second starting winning opening 9014 is increased by the electric chew support control is the ratio of the number of gaming balls to be paid out as the winning balls according to the winning to the number of firing balls The "base" is referred to as the "high base state" because it is in a higher state than when the control is not performed. Also, when such control is not performed, it is called "low base state". In addition, such control is a variable winning ball device 9015, that is, a control for facilitating a winning on the variable winning ball device 9015 by supporting winning by the electric tulip, and is called "electric chew support control".

  In this embodiment, the term "high probability state (probability state)" and "low probability state (non-probability state)" are used as terms indicating the state of the big hit probability, and terms as a combination of base states are indicated. , "High base state (power chew support control state)" and "low base state (non-power chew support control state)" are used.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, the terms “low probability low base state”, “low probability high base state”, and “high probability high base state” are used as terms indicating the combination of the jackpot probability state and the base state. Use. The "low probability low base state" is a state indicating that the state of the jackpot probability is a low probability state and the base state is a low base state. The “low probability high base state” is a state indicating that the state of the jackpot probability is a low probability state and the base state is a high base state. The “high probability high base state” is a state indicating that the state of the jackpot probability is a high probability state and the base state is a high base state.

  As shown in FIG. 67, as the big hit of 15 rounds, a plurality of big hits of normal big hit and definite variation big hit are provided. Usually, the big hit is a big hit controlled to the non-probability state, the short time state, and the high base state (low probability high base state) after the end of the 15 round big hit gaming state. In the normal big hit, the condition that the non-probability state continues until the next big hit occurs, and the time saving state and the high base state are executed a predetermined number of times of the variable display 100 times, and the next big hit And the condition until the condition occurs, whichever is earlier, until the condition is satisfied. The normal jackpot may be controlled to be a jackpot controlled to the non-probability state, the non-time-short state, and the power-less support control state (low probability low base state).

  The probability variation big hit is a jackpot in which control to shift to a probability variation status, a short time status, and a high base status (high probability high base status) is performed after the end of the 15 rounds of jackpot gaming status. In the big change big hit, the condition that the high probability high base state of this kind, until the variable indication is executed predetermined number of times a predetermined number of times or the condition that until the next big hit occurs, the earlier condition is satisfied Continue for a period of time.

  FIG. 68 is a block diagram showing an example of the circuit configuration of the main board (game control board) and the effect control board. Note that FIG. 68 also shows a payout control board 9037 and the like. On the main substrate 9031 is mounted a microcomputer for game control (corresponding to game control means) 90560 which controls the pachinko game machine 901 according to a program. The game control microcomputer 90560 includes a ROM 9054 for storing a program for game control (game progression control), a RAM 9055 as a storage means used as a work memory, a CPU 9056 for performing control operations according to the program, and an I / O port unit Including 9057. The game control microcomputer 90560 is a one-chip microcomputer in which the ROM 9054 and the RAM 9055 are built. The game control microcomputer 90560 further includes a random number circuit 90503 that generates hardware random numbers (random numbers generated by a hardware circuit).

  The RAM 9055 is a backup RAM as a non-volatile storage means backed up by a backup power source, a part or all of which is created in a power source substrate (not shown). That is, even if the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped, the content of part or all of the RAM 9055 is saved for a predetermined period (until the capacitor as the backup power supply discharges and the power supply of the backup power supply becomes impossible). In particular, data indicating at least the gaming state (i.e., the special symbol process flag etc.) according to the control state of the gaming control means and the data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are stored in the backup RAM.

  Note that, since the CPU 9056 executes control according to the program stored in the ROM 9054 in the game control microcomputer 90560, the game control microcomputer 90560 (or CPU 9056) executes (or performs) in the following. Specifically, the CPU 9056 executes control in accordance with a program. The same applies to a microcomputer mounted on another substrate other than the main substrate 9031.

  The random number circuit 90503 is a hardware circuit used to generate a random number for determination to determine whether or not to make a big hit according to the display result of the variation display of the special symbol. The random number circuit 90503 updates the numerical data in accordance with the set update rule within the numerical range in which the initial value (for example, 0) and the upper limit (for example, 65535) are set, and generates at random timing. It has a random number generation function in which the numerical data to be read out is a random number value based on the fact that the start winning is when the numerical data is read out (extracted). The game control microcomputer 90560 has a function of setting an initial value of the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 90503.

  Further, an input driver circuit 9058 for giving a detection signal from the gate switch 9032a, the first start opening switch 9013a, the second start opening switch 9014a, and the count switch 9023 to the game control microcomputer 90560 is also mounted on the main substrate 9031. In addition, a solenoid 9016 that opens and closes the variable winning ball device 9015, and an output circuit 9059 that drives a solenoid 9021 that opens and closes the special variable winning ball device 9020 that forms the big winning opening in accordance with a command from the game control microcomputer 90560. It is mounted on a substrate 9031.

  In addition, the microcomputer for gaming control 90560, the first special symbol display 908a, the second special symbol display 908b, and the normal symbol display 9010, the first special symbol hold memory that changes and displays the special symbol. Display control of the display 9018a, the second special symbol hold storage indicator 9018b and the normal symbol hold storage indicator 9041 is performed.

  The effect control board 9080 has an effect control microcomputer 90100, a ROM 90102, a RAM 90103, a VDP 90109, an I / O port unit 90105, and the like. The ROM 90102 stores programs and data for effect control such as display control. The RAM 90103 is used as a work memory. The ROM 90102 and the RAM 90103 may be incorporated in the effect control microcomputer 90100. The VDP 90109 cooperates with the effect control microcomputer 90100 to perform display control of the effect display device 909.

  The effect control microcomputer 90100 instructs effect contents from the game control microcomputer 90560 through the relay board 9077 which allows the signal to pass only in one direction from the main board 9031 to the effect control board 9080. Is received, and variable display control of the effect display device 909 is performed, and display control of the frame LED 9028 provided on the frame side is performed via the lamp driver substrate 9035, and from the speaker 9027 via the audio output substrate 9070. Perform various kinds of effect control such as controlling the sound output of

  Further, the effect control CPU 90101 receives an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that the player's operation on the trigger button 90125 of the stick controller 90122 has been detected, from the trigger sensor 90121 to the input port of the I / O port unit 90105. Enter through. Further, the effect control CPU 90101 inputs an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that the player's operation on the push button 90120 has been detected, from the push sensor 90124 via the input port of the I / O port unit 90105. Do. The effect control CPU 90101 also receives an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that the player's operation with respect to the operation stick of the stick controller 90122 has been detected, from the tilt direction sensor unit 90123 to the input of the I / O port unit 90105 Enter via port. Further, the effect control CPU 90101 causes the stick controller 90122 to vibrate by outputting a drive signal to the vibrator motor 90126 via the output port of the I / O port unit 90105. The effect control CPU 90101 drives the accessory motor 9017 via a motor drive circuit (not shown) to operate the accessory 9012.

  FIG. 69 is an explanatory view of each random number. In FIG. 69, the type of random number, the update range, the application, and the addition condition are shown. Each random number is used as follows.

  (1) Random R ': A random counter for hit determination that determines whether or not to make a big hit. The random R ′ is updated one by one at 10 MHz, added and updated from 0, added and updated up to its upper limit of 65535, and then added and updated from 0 again. (2) Random 1 '(MR1'): Determine the type of big hit (type, normal big hit, and any kind of probability variation big hit) and the big hit symbol (for big hit type determination, for big hit symbol determination). (3) Random 2 '(MR 2'): Determine the type (type) of variation pattern (for variation pattern type determination). (4) Random 3 '(MR3'): A variation pattern (variation time) is determined (for variation pattern determination). (5) Random 4 '(MR 4'): It is determined whether or not to generate a hit based on a normal symbol (for normal symbol hit determination). (6) Random 5 '(MR 5'): The initial value of random 4 'is determined (for random 4' initial value determination).

  In this embodiment, as a big hit that is a specific gaming state, a plurality of types, usually a big hit and a probability variation big hit, are included. Therefore, when it is determined to be a big hit based on the value of the big hit determination random number (random R '), the type of the big hit is any of these based on the value of the big hit type determination random number (random 1') It is decided on the big hit type of. Furthermore, when the jackpot type is determined, the jackpot symbol is also determined based on the value of the jackpot type determination random number (random 1 ') at the same time. Therefore, the random 1 'is also a jackpot symbol determination random number.

  In addition, first, the variation pattern type is determined using the variation pattern type determination random number (random 2 ') and included in the determined variation pattern type using the variation pattern determination random number (random 3'). To determine which variation pattern. As such, in this embodiment, the fluctuation pattern is determined by the two-step lottery process. The variation pattern type is one in which a plurality of variation patterns are grouped according to the feature of the variation mode. One or more fluctuation patterns belong to the fluctuation pattern type. The variation pattern type may be called a variation type.

  In this embodiment, the fluctuation patterns are classified into a normal fluctuation pattern type which is a fluctuation pattern type without a reach and a reach fluctuation pattern type which is a fluctuation pattern type with a reach.

  Such a variation pattern type is set to be different because the selection ratio of the variation pattern type is different between the time saving state and the time non-saving state, when the display result is a loss. , The fluctuation time is shortened compared to when not in the time saving state. For example, in the time saving state, the fluctuation time of the predetermined fluctuation pattern is set shorter than that in the time shortening, in order to shorten the average time of fluctuation time as compared with the time not being time saving state. The rate at which the variation pattern type with a short time is selected increases, and even when the reach type is selected, the rate at which the variation pattern of normal reach with the shortest variation time is selected among the variation pattern types is set to be high. By doing this, the average time of the fluctuation time becomes shorter than when not in the short time state.

  In addition, such fluctuation pattern classification is set by the fact that the selection ratio differs when the number of pending storages of each special symbol which fluctuates indicates more than predetermined number and when it is less than predetermined number, When the number of pending storages of each special symbol to display variable is more than a predetermined number, compared to the case where the number of pending storages of each special symbol is less than a predetermined number, the control for reducing the number of holdings is performed. You may do it. For example, in the pending number reduction control state, the rate at which the variation pattern type having a short variation display time such as the normal variation pattern type is selected is set to be higher than in the non-pending number reduction control state. The average time of the variable display time may be shorter than in the non-holding number reduction control state. Further, in the pending number reduction control, the variation display time itself of the variation pattern type may be shortened even when the same variation pattern type is selected, as compared with the case where the pending number reduction control state is not set.

  The variation pattern is not a two-step determination method of determining the variation pattern after determining the variation pattern type, but may be a one-step determination method in which the variation pattern is determined by one random number lottery.

  FIG. 70 is an explanatory diagram of a big hit determination table and a big hit type determination table. FIG. 70 (A) is an explanatory view showing a big hit determination table. The jackpot determination table is a group of data stored in the ROM 9054 and is a table in which a jackpot determination value to be compared with the random R ′ is set. The jackpot determination table includes a jackpot determination table used in a normal state (a gaming state which is not a definite change state, that is, a non-probability change state), a big hit determination table used in a normal state (at a non definite change), and a definite change time jackpot determination table used in a definite change state.

  In the normal jackpot determination table, each numerical value described in the left column of FIG. 70 (A) is set as a jackpot determination value, and in the probability variation jackpot determination table, it is described in the right column of FIG. 70 (A) Each value is set as a big hit judgment value. The big hit judgment value set in the big change judgment big hit judgment table is changed to the big hit judgment value (usually called the big hit judgment value or the 1st big hit judgment value) common to the big hit judgment value set in the normal time big hit judgment table Due to the addition of the unique big hit judgment value, a large number (10 times the number) of big hit judgment values (referred to as a positive change time jackpot judgment value or a second big hit judgment value) greater than the probability change time big hit judgment table is set. . As a result, in the probability change state, it is determined that the jackpot is a big hit with a higher probability than the normal state.

  The CPU 9056 extracts the count value of the random number circuit 90503 at a predetermined time and compares the extracted value with the value of the big hit determination random number (random R '), but the big hit determination random number value is as shown in FIG. If it matches any of the jackpot judgment values shown in, it is decided to make a jackpot (usually a jackpot or a probability variable jackpot) for the special symbol. The “probability” shown in FIG. 70A indicates the probability (percentage) of becoming a big hit.

  FIGS. 70B and 70C are explanatory diagrams showing the jackpot type determination table stored in the ROM 9054. FIG. FIG. 70 (B) shows a case where the jackpot type is determined using the suspension storage (also referred to as the first suspension storage) based on the game ball winning the first start winning opening 9013 (variation display of the first special symbol is Is a first special symbol jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol) to be used). FIG. 70 (C) shows a case where the jackpot type is determined using the suspension storage (also referred to as a second suspension storage) based on the game ball winning the second start winning opening 9014 (variation display of the second special symbol is Is a second special symbol jackpot type determination table used when it is performed).

  70 (B), and each of the first and second special symbol big hit classification determination tables in FIG. 70 (C), when it is determined that the variation display result is a big hit design, for the big hit classification determination Based on the random number (random 1 '), the type of the big hit is determined to be either "normal big hit" or "probably big hit" and is referred to determine the big hit symbol.

  The first special symbol jackpot type determination table in FIG. 70 (B) is a numerical value to be compared with the value of random 1 'and is a judgment value corresponding to “normal big hit” and “probable variation big hit” (big hit type Judgment value is set. The second special symbol jackpot type determination table of FIG. 70 (C) is a numerical value to be compared with the value of random 1 'and is a judgment value corresponding to each of “normal big hit” and “probable variation big hit” (big hit type Judgment value is set.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 70 (B) and 70 (C), the big hit type determination value is also used as a determination value (big hit symbol determination value) for determining the big hit symbols of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. The determination value corresponding to "normally big hit" is also set as the determination value corresponding to "3" of the big hit symbol of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. The determination value corresponding to the "probable variation big hit" is also set as the determination value corresponding to "7" of the big hit symbol of the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

  Using the jackpot classification determination table, the CPU 56 determines the classification corresponding to the jackpot classification judgment value in which the value of the random 1 'matches as the jackpot classification, and the jackpot symbol in which the value of the random 1' matches as the jackpot symbol Decide. Thereby, the big hit type and the big hit symbol corresponding to the big hit type are determined at the same time.

  The first special symbol big hit classification determination table of FIG. 70 (B) and the second special symbol big hit classification determination table of FIG. 70 (C) have the same proportion determined as the probability variation big hit. In such a case, it is not necessary to divide the big hit classification determination table by the first special symbol and the second special symbol. Also, when selecting a big hit type from among a plurality of big hits of different maximum round numbers in the big hit gaming state as the big hit type, the second special symbol big hit type determination table of FIG. 70 (C) is shown in FIG. 70. The ratio in which the jackpot type having a large number of rounds is selected may be set to be higher than the first special symbol jackpot type determination table of (B). In this way, in the high base state, the type selection of the big hit becomes advantageous to the player, and the interest of the game can be improved. Also, the second special symbol big hit classification determination table of FIG. 70 (C) may have a higher probability of being determined as a probability variation big hit than the first special symbol big hit classification determination table of FIG. 70 (B) . By doing so, the variation display of the second special symbol can increase the ratio of the probability variation big hit as compared to the variation display of the first special symbol. Further, the ratio of the first special symbol jackpot classification determination table to be determined as the probability variation jackpot may be higher than that of the second special symbol jackpot classification determination table.

  Next, a variation pattern table used to select and determine variation patterns of special symbols and effect symbols in the gaming control microcomputer 90560 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 71 is a diagram showing, in the form of a table, a variation pattern table used to determine a variation pattern.

  In FIG. 71, (a) shows a judgment table at the time of normal state deviation, and (b) shows a judgment table at the time of short time state. Also, (c) is a normal big hit time determination table, and (d) is a probability variable big hit time determination table. Each determination table of FIGS. 71 (a) to 71 (d) is stored in the ROM 9054, is selected according to the game state, and is used to determine (determine) the fluctuation pattern type and the fluctuation pattern.

  The determination table shown in FIG. 71 includes a variation pattern type determination table indicating the relationship between random 2 'and variation pattern types, and a variation pattern determination table indicating the relationship between random 3' and variation patterns belonging to each type for each variation pattern type. And.

  In the column of “variation pattern type” or “variation pattern” in each table of FIG. 71, “normal” or “normal variation” indicates a normal variation pattern that is not a reach.

  Also, “normal reach” in each table in FIG. 71 indicates a variation pattern of normal reach that does not execute particularly flashy effects when reaching the reach state. "Super reach" indicates a variation pattern for performing reach effect for displaying a special effect image when reaching the reach state.

  Further, as described above, “super reach” is a variation pattern in which the proportion to be selected as a big hit is high compared to “normal reach” and the reliability as a big hit is high. Furthermore, “super reach” is a change pattern in which the change time is longer (for example, normal reach 10 seconds, super reach 50 seconds to 80 seconds) compared to “normal reach”. In addition, four types of fluctuation patterns are set in the super reach, and the big hit expectation degree (big hit is achieved because the first super reach <second super reach <third super reach <fourth super reach). Indicates that the possibility is high.

  "Expected degree" is a concept including an expected degree for a big hit, an expected degree for a definite change, and the like. Specifically, the degree of expectation for the big hit (also referred to as the degree of reliability) is the degree of expectation for the big hit (proportion of becoming the big hit) when each reach variation pattern is selected, and for example, the reach variation is performed 100 times If the jackpot hits 60 times, the expectation for the jackpot becomes 60% (the appearance rate (probability) that the jackpot appears 60%). Further, the degree of expectation for the probability change means the degree of expectation (probability change ratio) to shift to the probability change state.

  In pachinko gaming machine 901, a predetermined effect is displayed in effect display device 909 until the display result is derived and displayed after variable display of each of the effect pattern as identification information and the first and second special symbols is started. There may be a case where an effect called a pseudo-sequence as an aspect (hereinafter, referred to as a pseudo-sequence effect) is performed. A pseudo ream is an effect display that shows what is originally a single change corresponding to one hold storage as if a plurality of changes corresponding to a plurality of hold storage are being performed continuously. It is an abbreviation showing continuous fluctuation.

  In addition, within the fluctuation time which was decided vis-a-vis the 1 start winning a prize, in order to make it appear as if the variable indication (variable display) of the plural times of the symbol was executed vis-a-vis the starting winning a prize with 1 It refers to a special variation pattern (also referred to as a variation display pattern) in which temporary stop and re-variation are performed (repeated) a predetermined number of times for all symbol rows (left, middle, right). For example, the larger the number of repetitions of re-variation (the number of total variations including the first variation and the subsequent re-variation, and also referred to as the pseudo-series variation number), the more likely it will be the jackpot reliability (big jackpot) The degree of the proportion selected when the big hit is made with respect to all the selected proportions including the time, the degree of the big hit proportion, that is, the degree of the reliability that becomes the big hit becomes high. More specifically, by increasing the ratio selected when determined to be a big hit, it is suggested by a pseudo-series effect whether it will be a big hit gaming state. In the fluctuation pattern of the pseudo ream, the pseudo reaming symbol (for example, a symbol (a numeral or the like with a predetermined character or a character is not included) is not included in the effect design that is normally fluctuated (basically fluctuated) in the effect display device 909 Symbols not attached are also referred to as "semi-continuous dedicated symbols")) temporarily stop. In addition, in pseudo ream, a production symbol (a number symbol in the present embodiment) which is usually subjected to variable display (basically variable display) may be temporarily stopped. The combination of symbols temporarily stopped in the effect display device 909 is called a combination of temporary stop symbols. The combination of temporary stop symbols is determined from any of a plurality of chances (hereinafter referred to as "simulated consecutive eyes (simulated consecutive chance eyes)" consisting of a combination of symbols other than a combination of big hit symbols) It should be done.

  In addition, in the pachinko gaming machine 901, there may be an effect that the effect pattern slips. Here, the term “slip” means effect display in which the symbol is slipped from the predicted stop position immediately before the stop of the symbol in the variable display. In the second super reach, then reach out (reach) by stopping after one of the two rendering symbols that had been temporarily stopped at the outset eyes (combination of the out symbols) in the left and right symbol display areas A combination of symbols is formed, and it is such an effect that reach effect is executed.

  Note that the fluctuation pattern shown in the judgment table at the time of disconnection is a fluctuation pattern in which the final display result of the fluctuation display is the display result of “off”. The fluctuation pattern shown in the normal jackpot determination table is a fluctuation pattern in which the final display result of the fluctuation display is the display result of “normal jackpot”. The variation pattern shown in the probability variation big hit determination table is a variation pattern in which the final display result of the variation indication is the display result of “probability variation big hit”.

  Based on these pieces of information, for example, the fluctuation pattern “fourth super reach (80 seconds)” shown in the “variation pattern” column of FIG. It is shown that it is "the fluctuation pattern of the 4th super reach performed in seconds."

  The columns described as "random 2 'range" and "variation pattern type" in the table of FIG. 71 indicate the relationship between "random 2' range" and "variation pattern type" as a variation pattern type determination table unit It is a column showing a function. For example, taking FIG. 71 (a) as an example, all the values of random 2 '(1 to 251) are assigned to each of a plurality of fluctuation pattern types such as "normal", "normal reach" and "super reach". It is divided into multiple numerical ranges. For example, taking FIG. 71 (a) as an example, the value of random 2 'extracted at a predetermined timing matches any one of the judgment values allocated to 140 to 229 among the random numbers from 1 to 251. Then, "normal reach" is determined as the variation pattern type.

  Also, the fields described as “random 3 'range” and “variation pattern” in the table of FIG. 71 indicate a function as a variation pattern determination table unit that indicates the relationship between “random 3' range” and “variation pattern”. Is a column indicating. The variation patterns indicated correspondingly to the various types of the variation pattern type determination table are the variation patterns belonging to each type. For example, taking Fig. 71 (a) as an example, the variation patterns belonging to the type of "super reach" are "first super reach", "second super reach", "third super reach", and "third 4 super reach.

  All values of random 3 '(1 to 220) are divided into a plurality of numerical value ranges and allocated to each of a plurality of fluctuation patterns corresponding to each fluctuation pattern type. For example, taking FIG. 71 (a) as an example, when it is determined that the variation pattern type of "super reach" is selected, random 3 'extracted at a predetermined timing is a random value of 1 to 220, If it matches with one of the numerical values of the judgment values assigned to 1 to 70, it is determined that a fluctuation pattern of "first super reach (50 seconds)" is set.

  When the variation display result for the first special symbol or the second special symbol is out, in order to determine the variation pattern, the determination table is selected as follows. In the non-time-short state, when the fluctuation display result is released, the normal state-off-time determination table in FIG. 71A is selected. On the other hand, when the fluctuation display result is lost in the time saving state, the time saving state determination table of FIG. 71 (b) is selected. By using the determination tables of FIG. 71A and FIG. 71B, the reach ratio at the time of the normal state shift and at the time shift state is fixed regardless of the number of reservations.

  When the variation display result is a big hit for the first special symbol or the second special symbol regardless of whether or not the time saving state, in order to determine the variation pattern, the determination table is selected as follows. When the variation display result is usually a big hit, the normal big hit determination table of FIG. 71 (c) is selected. When the variation display result is a probability variation big hit regardless of whether the time saving state or not, the probability variation big hit judging table of FIG.

  71B, the fluctuation time of the normal fluctuation is set to be shorter in the judgment table for determination of deviation when time saving state is compared with the judgment table for when out of normal state in FIG. 71A. Then, in the time reduction state determination table of FIG. 71 (b), the variation time is shorter than reach variation (including normal reach variation and super reach variation) as compared with the normal state removal determination table of FIG. 71 (a). The ratio determined by normal fluctuation (non-reach is not a deviation fluctuation (a fluctuation resulting in deviation display result)) is high, and the ratio by which fluctuation time is longer than normal fluctuation is determined as a reach fluctuation is low. Data is set.

  As a result, as compared with the non-time-short state (normal state), since the ratio in which the fluctuation pattern having a short fluctuation time is selected is higher in the time-short state, the non-time-short state is the one in the time-short state. The fluctuation display is performed with the fluctuation time shorter on average than at the time of. By selecting the determination table in this manner, the time saving state can be realized. In addition, by setting the fluctuation time to be shorter in the time-shortened state than in the non-time-shortened state, it is possible to shorten the reserve digestion in the time-shortened state.

  71 (a) and 71 (b), which are selected when they become out of place, the data is set so that the selection ratio of reach type is selected according to the height relationship such that normal reach> super reach It is done. On the other hand, in the determination tables of FIG. 71 (c) and FIG. 71 (d) selected when a big hit is made, the selection ratio of reach type is selected according to the height relationship of the ratio such as normal reach <super reach. Data is set. As a result, when reaching a big hit, the ratio at which the reach effect of the super reach is performed (the ratio of the reach effect of the super reach when the reach is selected) becomes higher than at the time of the disengagement. The presentation can increase the player's sense of expectation.

  Also, in the determination table of FIG. 71 (d) selected when the big hit is a definite variation big hit, compared to the determination table of FIG. 71 (c), which is usually selected when the big hit is a big hit, The data is set such that the rate at which the type of super reach effect is selected is high. As a result, the ratio at which the reach effect of the super reach is performed (the ratio of the reach effect of the super reach at the time the reach is selected) becomes higher when the probability change big hit becomes, compared to the time when the big hit normally occurs. The reach effect of the reach can be performed to increase the player's expectation for the probability variation big hit.

  In addition, such fluctuation pattern, when the sum total reservation memory number (total value) of the 1st special symbol and the 2nd special symbol to display variable is more than predetermined number (for example, the total number of reservation memory is 3 or more) By setting the selection ratio to be different when it is less than the predetermined number, when the total number of pending storages is equal to or greater than the predetermined number, the fluctuation time is shorter than when the total number of pending storages is less than the predetermined number. It is also possible to execute the pending number shortening control in which However, even under conditions where the number-of-holds reduction control is executed (for example, the total number of held memories is 3 or more), the sense of reach can be maintained by making the ratio of reach (including normal reach and super reach) constant. In addition, among the reach, only the super reach may not be shortened, and the on-hold time reduction control may be performed. Furthermore, the pending number time reduction control may be executable by selecting the fluctuation time as a short percentage of normal fluctuation with a short fluctuation time, or may be performed by shortening the fluctuation time of each fluctuation pattern itself, The combination may be sufficient.

  FIG. 72 is an explanatory view showing an example of contents of effect control command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 90560. As shown in FIG. In the game control microcomputer 90560, as shown in FIG. 72, various effect control commands are transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 90100 according to the game control state.

  Main commands in FIG. 72 will be described. The command 80XX (H) is a production control command (variation pattern command) for specifying a variation pattern of the production design that is variably displayed on the presentation display device 909 corresponding to the variation display of the special symbol (each corresponding to the variation pattern XX ). That is, when a unique number is assigned to each of the variation patterns which can be used as shown in FIG. 71, there is a variation pattern command corresponding to each of the variation patterns specified by the number. "(H)" indicates that it is a hexadecimal number. Further, the effect control command for specifying the fluctuation pattern is also a command for specifying the start of fluctuation. Therefore, when the command 80XX (H) is received, the effect control CPU 90101 controls the effect display device 909 to start variable display of the effect symbol.

  The commands 8C01 (H) to 8C03 (H) are display result specification commands indicating whether or not to make a big hit, and a big hit type.

  The command 8D01 (H) is a first symbol variation designation command indicating that the variation display of the first special symbol is started. The command 8D02 (H) is a second symbol variation designation command indicating that the variation display of the second special symbol is started. The command 8F00 (H) is a command (design confirmation designation command) for designating the end of the variation of the first and second special symbols.

  The command A 001 to A 002 (H) is a jackpot start designation command for designating a jackpot game state start for each jackpot type (usually a jackpot or a probability variation jackpot).

  The command A1XX (H) is a large winning opening open designation command indicating a display of the number of times (round) of the special winning opening opening indicated by XX. A2XX (H) is a designated command after opening a big winning opening, which indicates after opening (closing) a special winning opening of the number (round) indicated by XX.

  The commands A301 to A302 (H) are jackpot end designation commands for designating a jackpot gaming state end for each jackpot type (normal jackpot or probability variation jackpot).

  Command A 401 (H) is a first start prize designation command for designating that there has been a first start prize. The command A 402 (H) is a second start prize designation command for designating that there has been a second start prize.

  The command B 000 (H) is a normal state designation command which designates that the gaming state is the normal state (low probability state). The command B 001 (H) is a time saving state designating command specifying that the gaming state is the time saving state (high base state). The command B 002 (H) is a definite change state designation command which specifies that the gaming state is a definite change state (high probability state).

  The command C0XX (H) is a combined holding storage number specifying command indicating the total number of pending storages. The command C100 (H) is a total storage total storage number subtraction designation command indicating that the total total storage storage number is decremented by one. In this embodiment, the combined holding and storing number specifying command is used at the start winning of the game ball to the first starting winning opening 9013 or the second starting winning opening 9014 (for example, at the time of execution of starting opening switch passing processing described later). , It is sent to the microcomputer 90100 for effect control. Further, the total reserve storage number subtraction designation command is sent to the effect control microcomputer 90100 at the start of the variable display (for example, at the time of executing the special symbol change display process described later). The combined hold storage specification command and the storage storage number subtraction specification command may be combined. For example, the total pending storage number specification command may be used as a command that can specify the pending storage number after subtraction. It should be noted that a command capable of specifying the first pending storage number and the second pending storage number is transmitted as the total pending storage number, and the effect control microcomputer 90100 transmits the first pending storage number and the second pending storage number. The total value of the sums may be specified as the total pending storage number.

  The command C2XX (H) and the command C3 XX (H) are the winning determination results such as the big hit determination, the big hit type determination, the variation pattern type determination at the time of starting winning to the first starting winning opening 9013 or the second starting winning opening 9014 It is an effect control command indicating the content. Among these, the command C2XX (H) is a symbol designating command indicating whether or not to be a big hit among the winning determination results, and a determination result of the type of the big hit. Further, command C3XX (H) is a variation type command indicating the determination result (determination result of variation pattern type) of which determination value range the value of the random number for variation pattern type determination is among the winning determination results. It is.

  In this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 90560 determines whether or not the jackpot will occur at the start winning, the type of the jackpot, and the range of the judgment value ranges of the variation pattern type determination random numbers. . Then, a value for designating a big hit and a value for designating a type of big hit are set in the EXT data of the symbol designation command, and control to transmit to the effect control microcomputer 90100 is performed. A value designating the range of the judgment value as the judgment result of the fluctuation pattern type is set in the EXT data of the fluctuation type command, and control to transmit to the effect control microcomputer 90100 is performed. In this embodiment, the effect control microcomputer 90100 can recognize whether the display result is a big hit or not, and the type of the big hit at the start winning, based on the value set in the symbol designation command. The fluctuation pattern type can be recognized based on the fluctuation type command.

  Next, a configuration example of an area (hold storage buffer) for storing data (hold storage data) such as random numbers corresponding to hold storage on the game control microcomputer 90560 side will be described. The pending storage buffer is provided in the RAM 9055.

  In the first pending storage buffer, a saving area corresponding to the upper limit (4 in this example) of the first pending storage number is secured. In the second hold storage buffer, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit (4 in this example) of the second hold storage number is secured. In the first hold storage buffer and the second hold storage buffer, a big hit determination random number (random R ') which is a hardware random number, a big hit type determination random number (random 1') which is a software random number, fluctuation pattern type determination The random number (random 2 ') and the variation pattern determination random number (random 3') are stored.

  The CPU 9056 extracts such random number values from the random number circuit 90503 and the random counter for generating the software random number based on the winning on the first start winning opening 9013 or the second starting winning opening 9014, and (1) A process of saving (storing) in the save area of the pending storage buffer or the second pending storage buffer is executed. Specifically, based on the winning on the first start winning opening 9013, these random number values are extracted and stored in the first hold storage buffer. Also, based on the winning on the second start winning opening 9014, these random number values are extracted and stored in the second hold storage buffer.

  It may be indicated as "stored on hold" that the information on the start winning combination as described above is stored in the first held storage buffer or the second held storage buffer. The random number for fluctuation pattern type judgment (random 2 ') and the random number for fluctuation pattern judgment (random 3') are not extracted at the start winning and stored in advance in the storage area, but fluctuation pattern setting processing described later You may make it extract (at the time of the fluctuation start of a special symbol).

  The data stored in the reserve storage buffer in this way is read out at the start winning combination and used for preview advance notice effect as described later, and also read out at the start of variable display and used for variable display.

  When there is a start winning on the first starting winning opening 9013 or the second starting winning opening 9014, it is referred to as a symbol designating command, a variation type command, a first (second) starting winning designating command, and a combined holding memory number specifying command. Such a command indicating the determination result of the start winning determination process is transmitted from the main substrate 9031 to the effect control substrate 9080. In the start winning combination reception command buffer provided in the RAM 90103 of the effect control microcomputer 90100, the received symbol specification command, variation type command, first (second) start winning combination specification command, and combined hold storage number specification command And the like, so that a storage area for storing data that can specify the received command is secured so that various commands such as can be stored in association with each other.

  In this embodiment, the effect control pattern of the effect pattern performed corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol corresponds to the change pattern of the plural types, the change display operation of the effect pattern, reach It is comprised from the data etc. which show the control content of various performance operation | movements, such as a production | presentation display operation in production etc. or various production | production operation | movement which does not accompany the fluctuation | variation display of a production | presentation pattern. Further, the notice effect control pattern is composed of data etc. indicating the control content of the effect operation to be the notice effect to be executed corresponding to the notice pattern in which a plurality of patterns are prepared in advance. The various effect control patterns correspond to various effect operations performed in accordance with the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 901, and are composed of data indicating the control content.

  Next, the operation of the pachinko gaming machine 901 will be described. In the pachinko gaming machine 901, when the game control microcomputer 90560 on the main substrate 9031 executes a predetermined main process, a timer interrupt is periodically taken at predetermined time intervals (for example, 2 ms), and the timer interrupt process is executed. As a result, various game control can be performed.

  In the main processing, for example, necessary initialization processing, initialization processing at normal time, gaming state recovery processing at times other than normal, random number circuit setting processing (initial setting of random number circuit 90503), random number update processing for display (variation pattern The determination of the type of the object, the update process of various random numbers such as the change pattern determination), and the update process of the initial value random number (update process of the initial value of the count value of the random number generation counter for determination per symbol).

  FIG. 73 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing. When a timer interrupt occurs, the CPU 9056 executes the timer interrupt process of steps S9020 to S9034 shown in FIG. 73 (hereinafter simply referred to as "S"). In the timer interrupt process, first, a power-off detection process is performed to detect whether or not the power-off signal is output (is turned on or not) (S20). Next, detection signals of the gate switch 9032a, the first start port switch 9013a, the second start port switch 9014a, and the count switch 9023 are input through the input driver circuit 9058, and the status of those is determined (switching process: S9021) .

  Next, the CPU 9056 is a first special symbol display 908a, a second special symbol display 908b, an ordinary symbol display 9010, a first special symbol hold storage indicator 9018a, a second special symbol hold storage indicator 9018b, an ordinary symbol A display control process is performed to control the display of the hold storage indicator 9041 (S9022). With regard to the first special symbol display 908a, the second special symbol display 908b and the normal symbol display 9010, control to output the drive signal to each display according to the contents of the output buffer set in S9032, S9033. Run.

  In addition, processing is performed to update the count value of each counter for generating random numbers for determination such as a random number per symbol for determination and a random number for big hit type determination used for game control (random number update processing for determination: S9023) . The CPU 9056 further performs processing of updating the initial value random number and the count value of the counter for generating the display random number (initial value random number updating process, display random number updating process: S9024, S9025).

  Further, the CPU 9056 performs special symbol process processing (S9026). In the special symbol process processing, the corresponding processing is executed according to the special symbol process flag for controlling the first special symbol display 908a, the second special symbol display 908b and the special winning opening in a predetermined order, and the special symbol process is performed. The value of the flag is updated according to the game state.

  Next, a normal symbol process process is performed (S9027). In the normal symbol process processing, the CPU 9056 executes the corresponding processing according to the normal symbol process flag for controlling the display state of the normal symbol display 9010 in a predetermined order, and changes the value of the normal symbol process flag to the gaming state Update accordingly.

  Further, the CPU 9056 performs a process of sending out the effect control command to the effect control microcomputer 90100 (effect control command control process: S9028). Further, the CPU 9056 performs information output processing for outputting data such as big hit information, start information, probability fluctuation information and the like supplied to the hole management computer, for example (S9029).

  The CPU 9056 executes an award ball process for setting the number of award balls based on detection signals of the first start opening switch 9013a, the second start opening switch 9014a, and the count switch 9023 (S9030).

  In this embodiment, the RAM area (output port buffer) corresponding to the output state of the output port is provided, but the CPU 9056 relates to the ON / OFF of the solenoid in the RAM area corresponding to the output state of the output port. The content is output to the output port (S9031: output processing).

  The CPU 9056 also performs special symbol display control processing for setting special symbol display control data for performing special symbol display according to the value of the special symbol process flag in the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data ( S9032).

  Furthermore, the CPU 9056 performs normal symbol display control processing of setting normal symbol display control data for performing effect display of normal symbols according to the value of the normal symbol process flag in the output buffer for setting normal symbol display control data ( S9033). Further, the CPU 56 executes the effect display of the normal symbol in the normal symbol display 9010 by outputting the drive signal in S9022 according to the display control data set in the output buffer.

  Thereafter, the interrupt enabled state is set (S9034), and the process ends. By the above control, in this embodiment, the game control process is activated every predetermined time.

  FIG. 74 is a flowchart showing special symbol process processing (S9026). In the special symbol process processing, processing for controlling the first special symbol display 908a or the second special symbol display 908b and the special winning opening is executed. In the special symbol process processing, start opening switch passage processing is executed (S90312). Then, depending on the internal state, any one of the processes of S90300 to S90307 is performed.

  In the gaming control microcomputer 90560, as described above, the RAM 9055 stores pending storage data (first pending storage data) such as a jackpot determination random number obtained based on the starting winning to the first starting winning opening 9013. And a second holding storage buffer for storing holding storage data (second holding storage data) such as a jackpot determination random number obtained based on the start winning for the second start winning opening 9014. Is provided. A storage area corresponding to the upper limit value (4 in this example) of the number of storages of each pending storage is secured in each of these pending storage buffers.

  In the starting opening switch passing process, if the first starting opening switch 9013a is turned on, the number of first holding storage data stored under the condition that the first number of holding storages has not reached the upper limit value (for example, 4). The value of the first reserved memory number counter that counts the number is incremented by 1, and numerical data from the random number circuit 90503 or a counter for generating software random numbers (for example, a big hit determination random number, a variation pattern type determination random number, and a variation pattern determination Processing for extracting (random numbers) and storing them in the storage area of the first pending storage buffer. Furthermore, the value of the combined pending storage number counter is increased by 1, and processing is performed to save (store) data indicating “first” in the pending specific area corresponding to the value of the combined pending storage number counter after summation. On the other hand, if the second start port switch 9014a is turned on, the number of second pending storage data stored is counted on condition that the second pending storage number has not reached the upper limit (for example, 4). Increase the value of the pending storage number counter by 1, and extract numerical data (for example, a big hit determination random number, a variation pattern type determination random number, and a variation pattern determination random number) from the random number circuit 90503 or a counter for generating software random numbers And store them in the storage area of the second pending storage buffer. Further, the value of the total hold storage number counter is increased by 1, and processing is performed to save (store) data indicating “second” in the hold specific area corresponding to the value of the total hold storage number counter after the addition.

  The processes of S90300 to S90307 are as follows. The special symbol normal process (S90300) is a process of determining whether or not the display result of the variable display is to be a big hit, and determining the big hit type in the case of a big hit. The variation pattern setting process (S90301) counts the variation time according to the determination of the variation pattern (determination of the variation pattern type determination random number and the variation pattern determination random number) and the determined variation pattern Is a process for controlling the start of counting of the fluctuation time timer.

  The display result designation command transmission process (S90302) is a process for performing control to transmit a display result designation command to the effect control microcomputer 90100. The special symbol variation process (S90303) is a process for advancing the process to the special symbol stop process when the variation time of the variation pattern selected in the variation pattern setting process has elapsed. Special symbol stop processing (S90304), when the lapse of the fluctuation time corresponding to the determined fluctuation pattern is timed by the fluctuation time timer, the fluctuation display in the first special symbol display 908a or the second special symbol display 908b A process of stopping and deriving and displaying a stop symbol.

  The special winning opening opening pre-processing (S90305) is processing for performing control to open the special winning opening in the special variable winning prize ball device 9020 according to the type of the big hit. During the big winning opening open process (S90306), control to transmit the production control command for the round display production in the big hit gaming state to the microcomputer 90100 for effect control, and confirms the establishment of the closing condition of the big winning opening It is a process which performs processing etc. If the closing condition of the special winning opening is satisfied and there are still remaining rounds, the process proceeds to the special winning opening opening pre-processing (S90305). In addition, when all the rounds are finished, it moves to the big hit end processing (S90307). The big hit end process (S90307) is a process for performing control or the like to cause the effect control microcomputer 90100 to perform display control to notify the player that the big hit gaming state has ended.

  Next, the operation of the effect control microcomputer 90100 will be described. FIG. 75 is a flowchart showing effect control main processing executed by the effect control microcomputer 90100 (specifically, effect control CPU 90101) mounted on the effect control substrate 9080.

  When the power is turned on, the effect control CPU 90101 starts executing the effect control main process. In the effect control main processing, first, initialization processing is performed to clear the RAM area, set various initial values, and initialize the timer for determining the start interval (for example, 2 ms) of effect control (S90701) ). Thereafter, the effect control CPU 90101 shifts to loop processing for monitoring the timer interrupt flag (S90702). When a timer interrupt occurs, the effect control CPU 90101 sets a timer interrupt flag in the timer interrupt process. In the effect control main process, when the timer interruption flag is set, the effect control CPU 90101 clears the flag (S90703), and executes the following effect control process.

  In the effect control process, the effect control CPU 90101 first analyzes the received effect control command, and sets data such as a flag that can specify what the received effect control command indicates. Processing (for example, processing for storing data capable of specifying the received command in various command storage areas provided in the RAM 90103) is performed (command analysis processing: S90704). Next, the effect control CPU 90101 performs effect control process processing (S90705). In the effect control process, in order to perform various effects such as fluctuation display of the effect design on the effect display device 909 according to the contents of the effect control command analyzed in S90704, the current control of each process according to the control state The process corresponding to the state (effect control process flag) is selected to execute effect control.

  Next, random numbers used by the microcomputer for effect control 90100 (SR1'-1 for determining the left stop symbol of the design symbol, SR1'-2 for determining the middle symbol of the production symbol, SR1'-2 for determining the left symbol for the production symbol, SR1 for determining the right stop symbol for the production symbol A random number updating process is performed to update the count value of the counter for generating '-3 etc.) (S90706). Each of such random numbers SR1'-1 to SR1'-3 is generated by the count of a random counter that updates the count value by software, and is cyclically updated within a predetermined range for each, It is used as a random number by being extracted at the timing defined for each.

  Next, a hold storage display control process is performed to control the display state of the hold display in the hold display area (move, delete, etc. of the hold display) (S90707).

  By executing such effect control main processing, the effect control microcomputer 90100 transmits the effect display device 909, various lamps, and the various effects according to the effect control command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 90560 and received. By controlling the effect devices such as the speakers 9027L and 9027R, various effect controls are performed according to the game state.

  FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing an effect control process (S90705) in the effect control main process shown in FIG. In the effect control process, after the effect control CPU 90101 executes the pre-reading effect process (S90700) for determining whether or not to execute pre-reading effect, and selecting the type of pre-reading effect, the value of the effect control process flag One of the processes in S90800 to S90807 is performed in accordance with the above.

  In the effect control process, the following process is performed. In the effect control process, the display state of the effect display device 909 is controlled, and the variable display of the effect symbol is realized, but the control regarding the variable display of the effect symbol synchronized with the change of the first special symbol is also the second special symbol The control regarding the fluctuation display of the production design synchronized with the fluctuation of is also executed in one production control process process.

  The pre-reading effect process (S90700) is a process for performing pre-reading determination such as whether or not pre-reading effect is to be performed, and determining a presentation mode when performing pre-reading effect. With pre-reading effect, before the order of the fluctuation display (pattern fluctuation) of the special symbol based on certain holding information (holding memory information) arrives, the holding information is prefetched and the special symbol fluctuation based on the holding information It is rendering technology such as giving notice at a stage prior to the determination of the content of the display and what will be the fluctuation display of the special symbol in the future. For example, when the hold information is a big hit, it is possible that a big hit may occur later based on the display mode of the hold display corresponding to the hold information before the variable display by the hold information is executed. An effect such as giving notice is performed as a pre-reading effect. Hereinafter, the variable display based on the hold information targeted for the pre-reading effect will be referred to as “target variable display”.

  The fluctuation pattern command reception waiting process (S90800) is a process for performing a process of confirming whether or not the fluctuation pattern command is received from the game control microcomputer 90560. If the variation pattern command has been received, the process shifts to rendering symbol variation start processing.

  The effect symbol variation start process (S90801) is a process for controlling so that the variable display of the effect symbol (decorative pattern) is started. The effect symbol variation process (S90802) is a process for controlling the switching timing of each variation state (variation speed) constituting the variation pattern. The effect symbol fluctuation stop process (S90803) is a process for stopping the fluctuation display of the effect symbol (decoration pattern) and performing control for deriving and displaying the display result of the fluctuation display (final stop symbol).

  The big hit display process (S90804) is a process for performing display control such as control for displaying a fanfare effect for notifying the occurrence of a big hit on the effect display device 909 after the fluctuation time ends. The during-round process (S90805) is a process for performing display control during the round. When the round end condition is satisfied, if the final round is not ended, the process proceeds to the round post-processing, and if the final round is ended, the process proceeds to the big hit end processing. The post round process (S90806) is a process of performing display control between rounds. When the round start condition is satisfied, the processing shifts to the processing during the round. The jackpot end effect processing (S90807) is processing for performing display control to notify the player that the jackpot gaming state has ended in the effect display device 909.

  The effect control CPU 90101 is a process stored in the ROM 90102 during a predetermined effect control period from the start of the variable display to the stop of the variable display and from the start of the big hit gaming state to the end of the big hit gaming state. Control of a rendering device (component for rendering) such as the rendering display device 909 is performed according to the process data set in the table.

  The process table is configured of process timer set values and data in which a plurality of combinations of display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data are collected. In the display control execution data, data etc. is described which indicates the aspect of each variation constituting the variation aspect during the variation time (variation display time) of the variation display of the rendering symbol (decor pattern). Specifically, data relating to the change of the display screen of the effect display device 909 is described. Moreover, the fluctuation time in the aspect of the fluctuation | variation is set to the process timer set value. The effect control CPU 90101 refers to the process table and performs control to display the effect pattern in the variation mode set in the display control execution data for the time set in the process timer set value. Such a process table is prepared according to each variation pattern.

  FIG. 77 is a flowchart of the effect symbol variation start process (S90801) in the effect control process process. In the effect symbol variation start process, the effect control CPU 90101 performs the following process.

  In the effect symbol variation start process, it is confirmed whether or not it is determined that the variation display result is to be out (S90601). Whether or not it is determined to be out of place is determined, for example, by whether or not a display result 1 designation command is stored in the display result designation command storage area. If it is determined to be out of order, it is checked whether a command corresponding to the non-reach fluctuation pattern has been received as the fluctuation pattern command (S90602). Whether or not the command corresponding to the non-reach variation pattern is received is determined by, for example, data stored in the variation pattern command storage area.

  When it is determined that the command corresponding to the non-reach fluctuation pattern is received, the display result of out-of-reach is determined as the final stop of the effect pattern using the out-of-pattern determination data table stored in the ROM 90102 (S90604) , S90616. In the off symbol determination data table, numerical data of SR1'-1 to SR1'-3 are associated with each of a plurality of types of effect symbols.

  In the process of S90604, numerical data (random numbers) are extracted from each of SR1'-1 to SR1'-3 at predetermined timings, and the symbols corresponding to the extracted numerical data are respectively left , Middle, is determined as a combination of stop symbols that will be the result of fluctuating display of the right representation symbols. Thus, when determining the combination of non-reach losing symbols, if the stop symbol corresponding to the extracted random number accidentally matches the combination of the big hit symbols, the correction is made to become the combination of the missing symbols (for example, Each stop symbol is determined by correcting the right symbol by shifting one symbol). Also, if the stop symbol corresponding to the extracted random number happens to be the reach symbol, it is corrected so that it becomes a combination of non-reach out-of-out symbols (for example, correction for shifting the right symbol by 1 symbol) and each stop symbol Is determined.

  If it is determined in the process of S90602 that it is not a non-reach variation pattern (if it is determined that it is a reach variation pattern), the stop symbol of the rendering symbol constituting the combination of reach symbols is determined (S90605), and the process proceeds to S90616. In the process of S90605, numerical data (random numbers) are extracted from each of SR1'-1 to SR1'-3 at predetermined timings, and a data table for determining a lost pattern is used to correspond to the random numbers extracted from SR1'-1. The symbol to be determined is determined as the stop symbol of each of the left and right effect symbols that form the reach state, and the symbol corresponding to the random number that matches the value of the counter extracted from SR1'-2 is determined as the symbol of the middle symbol Ru. Also in this case, when it happens to be a combination of big hit symbols, each stop symbol is determined by correcting (for example, correcting the middle symbol by one symbol) so as to become the combination of the out symbols.

  Further, when it is not determined to shift in the process of S90601 (when it is determined to be a big hit) (N in S90601), the effect control CPU 90101 selects a big hit symbol according to the type of the big hit. The stop design of the production design which constitutes combination is decided (S90603), it advances to S90616.

  In S90603, the combination of symbols is determined according to the type of the big hit as follows. The type of big hit from among the probability variation big hit and the normal big hit based on which display result specification command of the display result 2 specification command and the display result 3 specification command is stored in the display result specific command storage area When it is determined that it is decided to make a probability variation big hit, numerical data (random numbers) are extracted from SR1'-1 at a predetermined timing, and a combination of SR1'-1 and a probability variation big hit symbol (for example, Using a data table (table for determining the probability of big win symbol design) in which the relationship with the left, middle, right is an odd number combination of “7, 7, 7” etc.) is used, any positive variation from the extracted value Select and decide the combination of jackpot symbols. Also, when it is determined that it is determined to be a big hit normally, numerical data (random numbers) is extracted from SR1'-1 at a predetermined timing, and a combination of SR1'-1 and a big hit symbol (for example, left, etc. Using the data table (usually a big hit design table for determination) with the relationship between the middle and the right set the relationship with an even number of square eyes such as "4, 4, 4" etc., any of the normal big hit symbols from the extracted value Select and decide the combination of The symbol determined in this manner is used as a final stop symbol which is a variable display result before being controlled to the big hit gaming state.

[Suggestive production]
Next, various effects performed in the present embodiment will be described. In the present embodiment, there may be a case where a suggestive effect of performing a suggestion display that suggests an expectation of control to an advantageous state such as a big hit gaming state is executed. The suggested effects include a first suggested effect (shutter effect) and a second suggested effect (reach title effect). In the shutter effect as the first suggested effect, an effect of covering the screen with the shutter display after the start of the change is performed. Further, in the reach title effect as the second suggested effect, an effect of displaying a reach title indicating the development destination of the reach effect after the reach is executed. When displaying either the shutter display or the reach title display, a specific image may be included and displayed.

[Specific image]
The specific image is an image with a high expectation of jackpot which is displayed including a plurality of types of elements in the image. The plural types of elements include a banana image of element E901, a melon image of element E902, an apple image of element E903, a watermelon image of element E904, and a strawberry image of element E905. The fruit pattern image configured to include these elements E901 to E905 is a specific image. In both the shutter display and the reach title display, all of the elements E901 to E905 are displayed so as to be visible. Further, the display sizes of the elements E901 to E905 constituting the specific image are changed and displayed according to the difference in display size between the shutter display and the reach title display. In addition, all of the elements E901 to E905 are displayed so as to fit in each of the shutter display and the reach title display.

  When the shutter effect is executed after the start of the fluctuation, when the fruit pattern image is displayed, the big hit expectation is higher than the time when the fruit pattern image is not displayed. Also, when the reach title display is small at the bottom right of the screen or the like during reach effect execution, when the display is made with the fruit pattern image, the big hit expectation is higher than when the display is not made with the fruit pattern image . When the fruit pattern is not displayed, for example, a plain image which does not include the elements E901 to E905 is displayed. In addition, the pattern of images other than a fruit pattern image may be prepared as an image which shows the big hit expectation degree when the shutter production and the reach title production are performed. For example, white images <blue images <red images <fruit pattern images may be prepared in the order of the jackpot expectation (for example, a red shutter, a reach title of red characters, etc.). Then, depending on whether or not the display result of the variable display is a big hit, any one image pattern may be selected in a predetermined random number lottery.

[Common notification]
When performing a shutter display and a reach title display, even when a fruit pattern is displayed, notification of outputting a common sound (melody) by the speakers 9027L and 9027R is performed and notification by light emission of the effect lamp is performed. The effect lamp is provided at a position above the effect display device 909 (not shown). The light emission control of the common sound and the effect lamp indicates to the player that the fruit pattern is a special image. In performing such shutter display and reach title display, common notification on the fruit pattern is executed. In the reach title display, a specific sound (voice) is further output after the common notification. The output period of the common sound and the specific sound may partially overlap.

  FIG. 78 is a display screen diagram when the shutter effect and the reach title effect are performed. FIGS. 78 (a) to 78 (f) are examples in which the shutter effect and the reach title effect are executed when the fourth super reach is executed.

  As shown in FIG. 78 (a), when the shutter effect is executed, a shutter image 9094 is displayed on the screen. In the shutter image 9094, an image of a fruit pattern including all of the elements E901 to E905 is displayed. Further, at the time of the shutter effect execution, the notification to output the common sound (melody) by the speakers 9027L and 9027R is executed and the notification by the light emission of the effect lamp is executed. When the shutter which has been closed is opened, the variable display of the symbol is started as shown in FIG. 78 (b). The downward arrow shows the variation display of the left, middle and right symbols. When the fluctuation display of the left symbol and the right symbol is temporarily stopped, as shown in FIG. 78 (c), the reach state is reached.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 78 (d), the super reach effect is started. The variable display is displayed small at the upper right of the screen, and the character is displayed on the left side of the screen. At the lower right of the screen, a reach title image 9095 is displayed, and the content of the super reach to be executed from now is displayed as a reach title display. In the reach title image 9095, an image of a fruit pattern including all of the elements E901 to E905 is displayed. In the reach title image 9095, characters of "battle reach" indicating that battle reach effect is to be executed are displayed.

  Here, the battle reach effect is an effect in which it is shown that the enemy character and the ally character fight and the ally character wins a big hit, and it is shown that the ally character loses the enemy character. In the reach title effect, contents of a plurality of types of reach effects including such battle reach are shown by the reach title image 9095 before the reach effect is executed.

  Further, at the time of the reach title effect execution, the notification to output the common sound (melody) by the speakers 9027L and 9027R is executed and the notification by the light emission of the effect lamp is executed. Furthermore, after the common sound is output, an effect is produced in which the character emits a specific sound (voice) indicating that the jackpot expectation is high, such as “Tsu Itsui Tsui”. Here, in the reach title effect, the size of the indication to be displayed is smaller than that of the shutter effect. However, as described above, in the reach title effect, the player can easily recognize that the fruit pattern image is displayed by outputting the specific sound. Although the case where the output period is completely divided has been described for the common sound and the specific sound, the output periods may partially overlap.

  Thereafter, battle reach effect as shown in FIG. 78 (e) is executed. An enemy character is displayed on the left of the screen, and an ally character is displayed on the right of the screen. When the ally character wins the battle with the enemy character, the word "battle won!" Is displayed on the upper left of the screen. It is informed that the big hit was decided by having won the battle. When the battle effect is over, the display returns to the original variable symbol display screen. As shown in FIG. 78 (d), all the symbols are stopped, and the jackpot symbol of "777" is displayed.

  As shown in FIGS. 78 (a) and 78 (d), both the shutter image 9094 and the reach title image 9095 are displayed including all the elements E901 to E905 constituting the fruit pattern image. In this manner, the fruit pattern image can be suitably displayed in any of the shutter image 9094 and the reach title image 9095 having different display sizes. As a result, it is possible to accurately convey that the fruit pattern image having a high hit probability is displayed.

  Further, the display size of the shutter image 9094 shown in FIG. 78 (a) is displayed larger than the display size of the reach title image 9095 shown in FIG. 78 (d). Therefore, the difference between the display size of the shutter image 9094 and the display size of the reach title image 9095 can be noticed.

  In addition, the shutter image 9094 shown in FIG. 78A and the reach title image 9095 shown in FIG. 78D are displayed at different timings. In this way, it is possible to prevent the appearance of the fruit pattern image, which is a specific image, from being obscured by overlapping execution timings.

  FIG. 79 is a timing chart showing the sound output timing and the effect lamp emission timing. The horizontal axis shows time t. As shown in FIG. 79, when the fruit pattern image is displayed at the time of execution of the shutter effect and the reach title effect, the common sound is output and the notification by the sound is performed. The common sound is, for example, an output of some melody. During the period in which the common sound is output, notification by light is also performed by emitting light from the effect lamp. The light emission mode of the effect lamp is common to the shutter effect and the reach title effect.

  After the output of the common sound is finished, in the shutter effect, the notification effect by either the sound or the light is not performed. On the other hand, in the reach title effect, after the output of the common sound is finished, the specific sound is output and the notification by the sound is performed. The specific sound is, for example, a character that appears on the screen and outputs some voice (voice output). During the period in which the specific sound is output and notified, the notification by light is not performed.

  Here, when the fruit pattern image is not displayed, it is desirable to execute notification different from that when the fruit pattern image is displayed. In this way, a special feeling can be given when the fruit pattern image is displayed.

  As shown in FIG. 79, in order to perform notification by outputting common sound (melody) by the speakers 9027L and 9027R in the shutter effect and reach title effect, and by performing notification by light emission of the effect lamp, a fruit pattern image is displayed Can accurately convey

  Further, as shown in FIG. 79, when reach reach image 9095 is displayed, a melody is output as a common notification, and a voice that is a specific sound not output when shutter image 9094 is displayed is further output. In this way, when the reach title image 9095 is displayed, it can be accurately notified that the fruit pattern image has been displayed.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 79, the execution period of the shutter effect (image display period) and the common sound when the shutter effect is being executed are output in the same period, and the reach title effect execution period (image display period) The output period in which the common sound and the specific sound were added when the reach title effect was being performed was the same. However, the image display period and the sound output period may be different. For example, when the image display period is shorter than the sound output period, it is possible to enjoy the afterglow by the sound. Conversely, when the image display period is longer than the sound output period, it is possible to enjoy the afterglow by the image. The notification by light may be short or long depending on the relationship with the image display period. In addition, notification may be performed by light from the common sound to the specific sound.

  Also, the execution period of the shutter effect and the execution period of the reach title effect may be the same. In such a case, when the reach title effect is performed, the specific sound may be output after the execution period of the reach title effect ends.

  Next, the determination method of a fruit pattern image is demonstrated. FIG. 80 is an explanatory view of a fruit pattern execution determination table. The fruit pattern execution determination table is a data table used for a lottery for determining whether to display a fruit pattern image. The fruit pattern execution determination table includes the jackpot fruit pattern execution determination table of FIG. 80 (A) and the out-of-time fruit pattern execution determination table of FIG. 80 (B). These fruit pattern execution determination tables are stored in the ROM 90102 provided on the effect control board 9080.

  The big hit time fruit pattern execution determination table of FIG. 80 (A) has a fruit pattern so that the magnitude relation of “execute fruit pattern> do not execute fruit pattern” according to the value of SR2 ′ extracted at a predetermined timing. The data is set so that the rate at which the decision to display the image is selected is higher. According to the value of SR2 'extracted at a predetermined timing, the fruit pattern execution decision table of FIG. 80 (B) has a fruit pattern so that "the fruit pattern is executed <the fruit pattern is not executed" by the value of SR2'. The data is set such that the rate at which the decision not to display the image is selected is higher.

  FIG. 81 is a flowchart showing an effect setting process. The effect setting process is executed in the effect symbol variation start process executed by the effect control microcomputer 90100 (see S90616 in FIG. 77). In the effect setting process, the presence or absence of display of a fruit pattern is determined in the fourth super reach, and when a fruit pattern image is displayed, display setting and output setting of sound are performed. Hereinafter, based on a flowchart, it demonstrates concretely.

  In the effect setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation display executed this time is the fluctuation pattern of the fourth super reach based on the fluctuation pattern command received at the time of the fluctuation this time (S90630). The received variation pattern command is stored in a command storage area provided in the storage area of the RAM 90103. The effect control CPU 90101 refers to the storage area of the RAM 90103, and is a variation pattern of the fourth super reach depending on whether or not the variation pattern command of the fourth super reach is stored in the region indicating the variation display to be executed this time. It is determined whether or not. If it is determined in the process of S90630 that the variation to be executed this time is the fourth super reach (Y in S90630), the process proceeds to S90631. On the other hand, when it is determined that the variation to be executed this time is not the fourth super reach (N in S90630), the process proceeds to S90637.

  In S90631, the presence or absence of the display of the fruit pattern is determined based on the fruit pattern execution determination table (see FIG. 80) (S90631), and the process proceeds to S90632. For example, at the time of big hit, the presence / absence of execution of the fruit pattern is determined by the value of SR2 'extracted at the predetermined timing using the big hit fruit pattern execution determination table of FIG. 80 (A). If it is determined in the process of S90632 that the fruit pattern has been executed (Y in S90632), the process proceeds to S90633. On the other hand, when it is determined that the fruit pattern has not been executed (N in S90632), the process proceeds to S90637.

  In the process of S90633, it is set such that all elements of elements E901 to E905 are displayed in the size of the first suggested image (within the shutter image 9094) at the time of the shutter effect (S90633), and the process proceeds to S90634. The image data of the elements E901 to E905 is stored as data of a standard size. If the image data composed of elements E901 to E905 of standard size is displayed on the shutter image as it is, the image of each fruit pattern (elements E901 to E905) looks small, so the image data composed of elements E901 to E905 of standard size Is enlarged and displayed (see FIG. 78 (a)).

  Next, in step S90634, the common sound (melody) is set to be output at the time of the shutter effect (see FIG. 79), and the process proceeds to step S90635.

  In the process of S90635, it is set such that all elements of elements E901 to E905 are displayed in the size of the second suggested image (within the reach title image 9095) at the time of reach title effect (S90635), and the process proceeds to S90636. Here, image data composed of elements E901 to E905 of standard size used in the process of S90633 is used. When image data composed of elements E901 to E905 of standard size is displayed on the shutter image as it is, the respective fruit patterns (elements E901 to E905) do not fit within reach title image 9095, so elements E901 to E901 of standard size are not displayed. The image data composed of E 905 is reduced and displayed so that all of the elements E 901 to E 905 can be visually recognized (see FIG. 78 (d)).

  In order to display all elements E901 to E905 in the reach title image 9095, a part of image data configured from elements E901 to E905 of a standard size may be cut out and displayed. In addition, each of the elements E901 to E905 of the standard size may be reduced, and the reduced elements E901 to E905 may be arranged in the reach title image 9095. However, as described above, it is possible to reduce the data volume and reduce one image data composed of the standard size elements E901 to E905 rather than reduce each of the standard size elements E901 to E905. The burden can be reduced.

  In the process of S90636, the common sound (melody) and the specific sound (voice) are set to be output at the time of reach title effect (see FIG. 79), and the process proceeds to S90637. The common sound is the same as the sound output at the time of the shutter effect. When the output of the common sound by the melody ends, the voice which is the voice of the character is output.

  In the process of S90637, other effects are determined (S90637), and the process ends. As other effects, for example, an effect by light emission of an effect lamp performed in the shutter effect and the reach title effect is determined. The light emission mode of the effect lamp is set in the same manner for the shutter effect and the reach title effect, but the light emission mode may be different. In the process of S90637, various effects to be executed in each of the variable display patterns are determined.

  The display sizes of the elements E901 to E905 are changed according to the display size difference between the shutter image 9094 and the reach title image 9095 by the processing executed by S90633 and S90636 as the display settings in FIGS. 78 (a) and 78 (d). Can be displayed. In this way, the fruit pattern image can be suitably displayed regardless of the display size of the suggestion image. This makes it possible to accurately convey that the fruit pattern image has been displayed.

  Also, by the processing executed by S90633 and S90636 as setting of display in FIGS. 78 (a) and 78 (d), all elements E901 to E905 should be displayed so as to fit in the shutter image 9094 and reach title image 9095 respectively. Can. In this way, the fruit pattern image can be suitably displayed regardless of the display size of the suggestion image. This makes it possible to accurately convey that the fruit pattern image has been displayed.

  Note that the shutter effect and the reach title effect may be performed within the same period. In such a case, the fruit pattern image displayed on the full screen as shown in FIG. 78 (a) and the fruit pattern image displayed using a part of the screen as shown in FIG. 78 (d) overlap. And it is assumed that it will be difficult for the player to recognize. However, as shown in FIG. 78 (d), by displaying the edge image around the fruit pattern image, it is possible to prevent making it difficult to recognize even when the fruit pattern image is displayed overlapping. Can. In addition, you may make it easy to visually recognize by adding other images, such as providing a base part to an image instead of an edge image, or even if it makes it easy to visually recognize by displaying the line of an edge image thickly. Good. In addition, when a fruit pattern image overlaps and is not displayed, it is not necessary to display an edge image. As described above, what is not performed when displaying as a single image may be performed when displaying as an overlapping image. In the case where the shutter effect and the reach title effect are performed in the same period, when the sound is output by the shutter effect performed earlier, the sound of the reach title effect performed later is The output may be prohibited. In this way, it is possible to prevent the sound from being interrupted halfway and feeling uncomfortable.

Next, modifications and feature points of the embodiment described above will be listed below.
(1) In the example shown in FIG. 78 and the like, the case where all the elements of the elements E901 to E905 are displayed so as to fit in the shutter image 9094 and the reach title image 9095 has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be performed as follows.

  For example, in the image display area of the shutter image 9094 and the reach title image 9095, the elements E901 to E905 may be scrolled from left to right and displayed. Since the elements E901 to E905 are repeatedly scrolled and displayed, some of the elements E901 to E905 are always displayed in the image display area. In such a case, each of the elements E901 to E905 may be larger in image size than that shown in FIG. 78 and may not fit within the image display area of the shutter image 9094 and the reach title image 9095. . However, by scrolling the elements E901 to E905 from left to right and displaying them, all the elements become visible after a predetermined time has elapsed. As described above, by scroll-displaying the elements E901 to E905, it becomes possible to display all the elements of the same size even if the display areas are different.

  In the reach title image 9095 whose display size is smaller than that of the shutter image 9094, the reach title image 9095 may be scrolled faster than the shutter image 9094. By increasing the scrolling speed, it is possible to make the player's eyes more visible even if the image is small. Note that the reach title image 9095 may be scrolled while being blinked to make it easy for the player to notice. In addition, the shutter image 9094 may not be scrolled, and the player may be made more noticeable by scrolling only the reach title image 9095.

  Further, the scroll direction is not limited to the scroll from the left to the right, but may be the scroll from the right to the left, or may be the scroll from the top to the bottom, or from the bottom to the top It may be scrolled, may be scrolled in an oblique direction, or may be different from the jackpot expectation degree by the scroll operation. Further, the elements E901 to E905 may be repeatedly enlarged and reduced without being limited to the scrolled ones. In this case, all elements may not be displayed at the time of enlargement, but all elements may be displayed at the time of reduction. In addition, an image including characters may be displayed as an element and scrolled. In this case, all characters may be made recognizable by scrolling for a certain period of time. Also, the jackpot expectation may be different between the display on which the operation is performed and the display on which the operation is not performed.

  (2) In the embodiment described above, all elements E901 to E905 are displayed as specific images so as to fit in each of the first indication display and the second indication indication. However, the present invention is not limited to this, as long as at least two or more of the elements E901 to E905 are displayed so as to fit in each of the first indication and the second indication. For example, as far as the “handle” of fruit is concerned, it is not appropriate to be composed of only a banana (element E 901), but it is desirable to be composed of a plurality of kinds of fruit. Further, the element is not limited to a handle such as a fruit, and may be composed of characters. However, as the display pattern of the image, a jackpot expectation degree suggestion pattern may be provided which is displayed by only one element. For example, it may have an image display pattern composed only of an apple (element E 903). Such an image pattern composed of only one element may be executed as a pattern having a lower hit probability than the image display pattern (fruit pattern image) composed of all the elements. In this way, since the pattern for displaying the image increases, the interest can be improved. However, if one element is displayed in the same size by display effects different in area displayed on the display means such as shutter effect and reach title effect, a pattern to be displayed with only one element is provided. In some cases, a pattern displayed with only one element may be mistaken for an image display pattern composed of all the elements. Therefore, when displaying a specific image, it is necessary to change the display size of the element and ensure that a plurality of elements can be clearly viewed.

  (3) In the embodiment described above, the image data composed of the standard-size elements E901 to E905 is enlarged and displayed as a shutter image, and the image data is reduced and displayed as a reach title image. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and image data composed of elements E901 to E905 of the same size as the shutter image may be stored. In this case, the image data may be displayed as a shutter image as it is, and the image data may be reduced and displayed as a reach title image. Also, image data composed of elements E 901 to E 905 of the same size as the reach title image may be stored. In this case, the image data may be enlarged and displayed as a shutter image, and the image data may be displayed as a reach title image as it is. Further, two image data of image data composed of elements E901 to E905 of the same size as the shutter image and image data composed of elements E901 to E905 of the same size as the reach title image may be stored. In this case, image data composed of elements E901 to E905 having the same size as the shutter image is displayed as a shutter image as it is, and image data composed of elements E901 to E905 having the same size as the reach title image is used as the reach title image as it is It may be made to display.

  (4) In the embodiment described above, as shown in FIGS. 80 and 81, at the time of the fourth super reach execution, the fruit pattern execution presence / absence is determined based on the fruit pattern execution determination table (S90631), and the fruit pattern is When it is executed, the shutter effect and the reach title effect are always performed (S90633 to S90636). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be as follows. For example, the type of advance notice effect may be determined according to the variation pattern. For example, when the variation pattern is the first super reach to the fourth super reach, the presence or absence of the execution of the shutter effect is first determined. Furthermore, after that, when the shutter effect is executed, it may be determined whether or not to display the fruit pattern image. Also for the reach title effect, it may be determined whether to display a fruit pattern image after determining whether to execute the reach title effect. Then, when it is determined to display the fruit pattern image, a process of changing the display size may be executed.

  In addition, the pattern of images other than a fruit pattern image may be prepared as an image which shows big hit expectation. For example, white images <blue images <red images <fruit pattern images may be prepared in the order of the jackpot expectation. Then, depending on whether or not the display result of the variable display is a big hit, any one image pattern may be selected in a predetermined random number lottery. However, the number of image patterns to be selected may be different between the shutter effect and the reach title effect. For example, in the shutter effect executed earlier in timing, any image pattern is selected from the four types of image patterns, and in the reach title effect executed later in timing, blue image <red image <fruit pattern One of the three image patterns such as an image may be selected. In such a case, for effects performed at a later timing, among effects performed at earlier timings, an image pattern recognized by the player as having a low hit probability is not selected. By doing this, it is possible to prevent a drop in the sense of expectation.

  (5) In the embodiment described above, a fruit constituted by including element E 901 (banana), element E 902 (melon), element E 903 (apple), element E 904 (watermelon), element E 905 (strawberry) as a specific image. The example which used the image of the handle was demonstrated. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a pattern with a continuous pattern may be used as a specific image. For example, a continuous pattern image such as an animal pattern may be used as the specific image. However, in the case of enlarging the image, it is necessary to expand the image so that it can be recognized as being a continuous pattern. For example, when the image data stored is enlarged and displayed in S90633 of FIG. 81, it may be set so as not to enlarge to a size that can not recognize that it is an animal pattern.

  (6) In the embodiment described above, as the specific image, one other than the fruit pattern image may be used. For example, it may be a display pattern of a symbol combining symbols such as a mere round shape or a square shape, or may be a display pattern of an image combining various character images. As described above, the specific image may be a combination of a plurality of types of images (images of a plurality of types of elements) that can be recognized as separate images by a person.

  (7) In the embodiment described above, only one of the first suggested effect (shutter effect) and the second suggested effect (reach title effect) may be performed. In such a case, when the second suggestion effect (reach title effect) is executed, the big hit expectation is configured to be higher than when the first indication effect (shutter effect) is executed. It is also good. Furthermore, in such a case, when the second suggestion effect is executed, an effect that draws the player's attention may be performed more than when the first suggestion effect is executed. For example, when the reach title effect is performed, the sound output time is longer (the specific sound is output in addition to the common sound) as compared to the case where the first suggested effect is performed. When the second suggested effect is executed, the volume at the time of audio output may be increased.

  (8) In the above-described embodiment, a pachinko machine has been exemplified as a gaming machine, but various settings shown in the above-described embodiment are such that medals are inserted and a predetermined bet number is set. When the combination of stop symbols becomes a combination of specific symbols when the symbols in the display means are stopped according to the operation of the stop button by rotating a plurality of types of symbols according to the operation of the control lever, the predetermined number It is also possible to apply to a slot machine (slot machine) in which the medals of the medals are paid out to the player. Specifically, in the display device such as the effect display device provided in the slot machine, the above-described shutter effect and reach title effect may be performed. When applied to a slot machine, when a fruit pattern image is displayed, there is a possibility that the player is more advantageous for a player such as a big bonus or AT (assist time) than when a fruit pattern image is not displayed. Should be shown to be high.

  (9) In the embodiment described above, the jackpot gaming state has been described as a representative example as an advantageous state advantageous to the player. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and advantageous states advantageous to the player may include high probability state (probability state), short time state, and other advantageous states such as high base state.

  (10) Although the gaming machine for paying out the game medium to the player's hand according to the occurrence of the prize has been described as the present embodiment, the game medium is enclosed and the game medium is used for the player according to the occurrence of the prize. You may employ the enclosure type game machine which adds a game point (score), without paying out at hand. The enclosed type game machine is provided with a circulation path for circulating a plurality of balls as an example of a game medium in the game machine, and a storage unit for storing the game points is provided according to the ball lending operation. The gaming points are added to the storage unit, the gaming points are subtracted from the storage unit according to the firing operation of the ball, and the gaming points are added to the storage unit according to the occurrence of the winning.

  (11) In the embodiment described above, for example, the case is shown in which a plurality of types of special symbols and effect symbols of “1” to “9” are variably displayed and the display result is derived and displayed. It is not limited to the form. For example, the symbol displayed in a variable manner and the symbol displayed in a derived manner do not necessarily have to be the same, and a symbol different from the symbol displayed in a variable manner may be derived and displayed. In addition, it is not necessary to change and display a plurality of types of symbols, and the change display may be performed using only one type of symbol. In this case, for example, the variable display may be performed by alternately repeating lighting and blinking of the one type of symbol display. And even in this case, one kind of symbol used for the variable display may be finally derived and displayed, or a symbol different from the one kind of symbol is finally derived and displayed It may be one.

  (12) In the embodiment described above, the “ratio (probability, probability)” has been described by taking a predetermined value exceeding 0% as a specific example. However, 0% may be used as the “proportion (proportion, probability)”. For example, in the case where "the occurrence rate of one is higher than the occurrence rate of the other" by comparing the occurrence rate of the predetermined gaming state 1 with the occurrence rate of the other gaming state 2 in the predetermined gaming period, Also includes the case where the rate of occurrence of one game state is 0%.

  (13) In the embodiment described above, after the variable display result is derived and displayed when it is determined that the display result of the variable display is a probability change big hit, after the end of the jackpot gaming state, unconditionally in a probability change state An example of controlled stochastic state control is shown. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the probability change determination device is controlled to a probability change state when it is detected by the detection means that the game ball has passed through the specific area provided in the special winning opening in special variable winning ball device 9020 A type of probability change state control may be performed.

  (14) It should be understood that the embodiments disclosed herein are illustrative and non-restrictive in every respect. The scope of the present invention is indicated not by the above description but by the claims, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope equivalent to the claims.

  The present invention is suitably applied to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine which allows a player to play a predetermined game.

1 Pachinko Machine 8a 1st Special Symbol Display 8b 2nd Special Symbol Display 9 Effect Display (Main Display)
9a 1st storage memory display portion 9b 2nd storage memory display portion 13 1st start winning opening 14 2nd start winning opening 20 special variable winning ball device 31 game control board (main board)
56 CPU
560 Microcomputer for game control 80 Effect control board 100 Microcomputer for effect control 101 CPU for effect control
109 VDP
901 Pachinko gaming machine 909 effect display device 9094 shutter image 9095 reach title image 90100 microcomputer for effect control 90560 microcomputer for game control

Claims (1)

A gaming machine capable of performing variable display,
Specific display means capable of displaying a specific display corresponding to the variable display;
After the specific display is displayed according to the first aspect, a change production performing means capable of executing a change production for changing the display mode of the specific display is provided,
The change production executing means is
As the change effect, after displaying the specific display according to the first aspect, it is possible to execute an effect of changing the display aspect of the specific display to the second aspect having a high degree of advantage,
As a change effect, after the specific indication is displayed according to the first aspect, when the display aspect of the specific indication is not changed to the second aspect, an effect of changing the display aspect of the specific indication to the third aspect can be performed And
In the predetermined period, the ratio of changing the display mode of the specific display to the third mode is low,
further,
As the indication indicating the expectation of control to the advantageous state advantageous to the player, the first indication indicating that the indication size is the first size and the second indication indicating that the indication size is the second size can be displayed Equipped with various display means,
The display means is
It is possible to display a specific image configured to include multiple types of elements having different aspects,
Even when any of the first suggestion display and the second suggestion display is displayed in a pattern including the specific image, a plurality of types of elements are included in both the first suggestion display and the second suggestion display. To display, gaming machines.